DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1
Transcript of DL-EP1_UM_96140E_E_1031-1
96140E
Read this manual before using the product in order toachieve maximum performance.Keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.
EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit
DL-EP1User’s Manual
Introduction
This manual describes the basic operations and hardware functions of the DL-EP1. Read
the manual carefully to ensure safe performance and function of the DL-EP1.
Keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.
Ensure that the end user of this product receives this manual.
Symbols
The following symbols alert you to matters concerning the prevention of injury and
product damage.
It indicates cautions and limitations that must be followed during opera-tion.
It indicates additional information on proper operation.
It indicates tips for better understanding or useful information.
It indicates reference pages.
It indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in
death or serious injury.
It indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result
in death or serious injury.
It indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result
in minor or moderate injury.
It indicates a situation which, if not avoided, could result in product
damage as well as property damage.
Point
Important
CAUTION
DANGER
NOTICE
WARNING
Reference
Safety Information for DL-EP1
General Precautions
• Before and while operating this product, confirm its performance and functions
operate correctly.
• Implement sufficient safety measures to prevent human and property damage
in case this product fails.
• Be aware that the product functions and performance are not warranted if the product is
used outside the range of stated specifications or is modified by the customer.
• Combining this product with other equipment requires sufficient consideration
because the proper functions and performance may not be met depending on
the environment.
• Do not use this product for the purpose of protecting a human body or a part of
the human body.
• This product is not intended for use as an explosion-proof product. Do not use
this product in hazardous locations and/or in a potentially explosive atmo-
sphere.
• Do not expose equipment, including peripherals, to rapid temperature
changes. Equipment failure may result from condensation build up.
Precautions for Use
Equipment Environment
For safe, trouble-free operation of this product, the product must not be installed
• To avoid injury or failure, turn off the power immediately in the following cases.
- Water or foreign matter enters the main unit. - The case is broken, for example if it is dropped. - Smoke or unusual smell is emitted from the product.
• Use the correct power voltage. Failure to observe may result in injury, or failure.
• Do not disassemble or modify this product. Failure to observe may result in injury.
Do not turn off the power while you are setting any item.
Doing this may cause loss of data settings.
CAUTION
NOTICE
in the following environments:
• Humid, dusty, or poorly ventilated.
• Exposed to direct sunlight or heat source.
• Exposed to corrosive or flammable gases.
• Exposed directly to vibration or shock.
• Exposed to water, oil, or chemical splashes.
• Exposed to static electricity.
196140E
Noise Protection
If this product is installed in a location near an electrical noise source, e.g., a power
2
source or high-voltage line, it may malfunction or fail because of noise. Take protec-
tive measures, such as using a noise filter or running the cables separately.
About the Power Supply
• Noise superimposed on the power supply may result in malfunction. Use a stabi-
lized DC power supply configured with an isolation transformer.
• When using a commercially available switching regulator, be sure to ground the
frame ground terminal.
UL Certification
This product is an UL/C-UL Listed product.
Precautions on Regulations and Standards
• UL File No. E207185
• Category NRAQ, NRAQ7
Be sure to consider the following specifications when using this product as an UL/C-
UL Listed Product.
• Use this product under pollution degree 2.
• For wiring to the power supply connector, use a power supply with Class 2 output
defined in NFPA70 (NEC: National Electric Code).
• This product is an open type device. Therefore, it must be installed in an enclo-
sure with an IP 54 or higher rating. (e.g. Industrial control panel)
CE Marking
Keyence Corporation has confirmed that this product complies with the essential
requirements of the applicable EC Directive, based on the following specifications.
Be sure to consider the following specifications when using this product in a member
state of European Union.
EMC Directive (2004/108/EC)
EMI : EN55011, Class A
EMS : EN61000-6-2
• Use an STP (shielded twisted pair) cable for connection to the network.
These specifications do not give any guarantee that the end-product with this prod-
uct incorporated complies with the essential requirements of EMC Directive. The
manufacturer of the end-product is solely responsible for the compliance on the end-
product itself according to EMC Directive.
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
Relevant Manuals
The manuals relevant to this document are as follows:
PLC CPU unitEtherNet/IP scanner unit
DL-EP1 (this unit)
Manuals related to CPU unit
Manuals related to EtherNet/IP scanner unit
This manual
Manuals for each sensor amplifier unit
Example) • GT2-70 Series User’ s Manual • IG Series User’ s Manual • FD-MH Series Instruction Manual
KV-DN20
MSNS
ON
TERM.
Sensor amplifiers
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 3
4
MEMO
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Manual Organization
Before Using1
Connection and Configuration2Communicating with the GT2 Series3
4
5
6
7
Communicating with the IB Series
Appendix9
Specifications8
Communicating with the FD-MH Series
Communicating with the IG Series
Communicating with the GT-70A Series
This chapter provides an overview of the DL-EP1 and describes its part names and functions.
This chapter describes the procedures from installing the DL-EP1 and sensor amplifiers to configuring communication.
This chapter describes the configuration of memory that communicates with the EtherNet/IP compatible network unit and a communication timing chart.
This chapter describes the configuration of memory that communicates with the EtherNet/IP compatible network unit and a communication timing chart.
This chapter describes the configuration of memory that communicates with the EtherNet/IP compatible network unit and a communication timing chart.
This chapter describes the configuration of memory that communicates with the EtherNet/IP compatible network unit and a communication timing chart.
This chapter describes the configuration of memory that communicates with the EtherNet/IP compatible network unit and a communication timing chart.
This chapter describes the specifications and external dimensions of the DL-EP1.
This chapter provides the parameter list, as well as troubleshooting instructions.
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 5
Table of Contents
Safety Information for DL-EP1 ..................................................................... 1
General Precautions ......................................................................... 1Precautions for Use ........................................................................... 1Precautions on Regulations and Standards ...................................... 2
Relevant Manuals .......................................................................................... 3
Manual Organization ..................................................................................... 5
Table of Contents .......................................................................................... 6
Terms Used in This Document ................................................................... 11
Chapter 1 Before Using
1-1 DL-EP1 Overview .............................................................................. 1-2Overview ........................................................................................ 1-2Connectable Sensor Amplifiers ...................................................... 1-2
1-2 Checking the Package Contents ..................................................... 1-3Package Contents .......................................................................... 1-3
1-3 Names and Functions of Each Part ................................................. 1-4
Chapter 2 Connection and Configuration
2-1 Procedures from Installation before Using the DL-EP1 to Configuration .................................................................................... 2-2
Configuration Procedures .............................................................. 2-22-2 Installation and Connection to Sensor Amplifiers ......................... 2-3
Mounting and connection to Sensor Amplifiers .............................. 2-3Assigning ID Numbers ................................................................... 2-6
2-3 Wiring ............................................................................................... 2-10Connecting a communication cable ............................................. 2-10
2-4 Configuring Communication with the DL-EP1 ............................. 2-12DL-EP1 Settings ........................................................................... 2-12
2-5 Configuring Communication with the Scanner ............................ 2-15Setting the scanner ...................................................................... 2-15
Chapter 3 Communicating with the GT2 Series
3-1 What is EtherNet/IP? ......................................................................... 3-2What is EtherNet/IP? ...................................................................... 3-2
3-2 DL-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication Function .............................. 3-3Overview of Communication Methods ........................................... 3-3
3-3 Cyclic communication ...................................................................... 3-5Configuring Cyclic Communication ................................................ 3-6
6 - EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
Actions which can be completed with Cyclic Communication ........ 3-6Usable Connections ....................................................................... 3-7Assignment to IN Area (DL-EP1 to Scanner) ................................. 3-8Assignment to OUT Area (Scanner to DL-EP1) ........................... 3-15Communication Methods ............................................................. 3-17Checking the Device Compatibility ............................................... 3-20
3-4 Message Communication ............................................................... 3-21Configuring Message Communication ......................................... 3-22Actions which can be Completed with Message Communication 3-22Objects and Services ................................................................... 3-25Objects Usable by DL-EP1 .......................................................... 3-27Basic Format and Processing Flow of Message Communication 3-28Reading the DL Object Table ....................................................... 3-30DL Object (Class ID:67H) ............................................................. 3-31Using DL Object ........................................................................... 3-46
Chapter 4 Communicating with GT-70A Series
4-1 What is EtherNet/IP? ......................................................................... 4-2What is EtherNet/IP? ...................................................................... 4-2
4-2 DL-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication Function .............................. 4-3Overview of Communication Methods ........................................... 4-3
4-3 Cyclic communication ...................................................................... 4-5Configuring Cyclic Communication ................................................ 4-6Actions which can be completed with Cyclic Communication ........ 4-6Usable Connections ....................................................................... 4-7Assignment to IN Area (DL-EP1 to Scanner) ................................. 4-8Assignment to OUT Area (Scanner to DL-EP1) ........................... 4-15Communication Methods ............................................................. 4-17Checking the Device Compatibility ............................................... 4-20
4-4 Message Communication ............................................................... 4-21Configuring Message Communication ......................................... 4-22Actions which can be Completed with Message Communication 4-22Objects and Services ................................................................... 4-25Objects Usable by DL-EP1 .......................................................... 4-27Basic Format and Processing Flow of Message Communication 4-28Reading the DL Object Table ....................................................... 4-30DL Object (Class ID:67H) ............................................................. 4-31Using DL Object ........................................................................... 4-45
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 7
Chapter 5 Communicating with IG Series
5-1 What is EtherNet/IP? ......................................................................... 5-2What is EtherNet/IP? ...................................................................... 5-2
5-2 DL-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication Function .............................. 5-3Overview of Communication Methods ........................................... 5-3
5-3 Cyclic communication ...................................................................... 5-5Configuring Cyclic Communication ................................................ 5-6Actions which can be completed with Cyclic Communication ........ 5-6Usable Connections ....................................................................... 5-7Assignment to IN Area (DL-EP1 to Scanner) ................................. 5-8Assignment to OUT Area (Scanner to DL-EP1) ........................... 5-15Communication Methods ............................................................. 5-17Checking the Device Compatibility ............................................... 5-20
5-4 Message Communication ............................................................... 5-21Configuring Message Communication ......................................... 5-22Actions which can be Completed with Message Communication 5-22Objects and Services ................................................................... 5-25Objects Usable by DL-EP1 .......................................................... 5-27Basic Format and Processing Flow of Message Communication 5-28Reading the DL Object Table ....................................................... 5-30DL Object (Class ID:67H) ............................................................. 5-31Using DL Object ........................................................................... 5-52
Chapter 6 Communicating with IB Series
6-1 What is EtherNet/IP? ......................................................................... 6-2What is EtherNet/IP? ...................................................................... 6-2
6-2 DL-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication Function .............................. 6-3Overview of Communication Methods ........................................... 6-3
6-3 Cyclic communication ...................................................................... 6-5Configuring Cyclic Communication ................................................ 6-6Actions which can be completed with Cyclic Communication ........ 6-6Usable Connections ....................................................................... 6-7Assignment to IN Area (DL-EP1 to Scanner) ................................. 6-8Assignment to OUT Area (Scanner to DL-EP1) ........................... 6-16Communication Methods ............................................................. 6-18Checking the Device Compatibility ............................................... 6-21
6-4 Message Communication ............................................................... 6-22Configuring Message Communication ......................................... 6-23Actions which can be Completed with Message Communication 6-23Objects and Services ................................................................... 6-26Objects Usable by DL-EP1 .......................................................... 6-28Basic Format and Processing Flow of Message Communication 6-29
8 - EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
Reading the DL Object Table ....................................................... 6-31DL Object (Class ID:67H) ............................................................. 6-32Using DL Object ........................................................................... 6-53
Chapter 7 Communicating with FD-MH Series
7-1 What is EtherNet/IP? ......................................................................... 7-2What is EtherNet/IP? ...................................................................... 7-2
7-2 DL-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication Function .............................. 7-3Overview of Communication Methods ........................................... 7-3
7-3 Cyclic communication ...................................................................... 7-5Configuring Cyclic Communication ................................................ 7-6Actions which can be completed with Cyclic Communication ........ 7-6Usable Connections ....................................................................... 7-7Assignment to IN Area (DL-EP1 to Scanner) ................................. 7-8Assignment to OUT Area (Scanner to DL-EP1) ........................... 7-15Communication Methods ............................................................. 7-17Checking the Device Compatibility ............................................... 7-20
7-4 Message Communication ............................................................... 7-21Configuring Message Communication ......................................... 7-22Actions which can be Completed with Message Communication 7-22Objects and Services ................................................................... 7-25Objects Usable by DL-EP1 .......................................................... 7-27Basic Format and Processing Flow of Message Communication 7-28Reading the DL Object Table ....................................................... 7-30DL Object (Class ID:67H) ............................................................. 7-31Using DL Object ........................................................................... 7-44
Chapter 8 Specifications
8-1 Specifications .................................................................................... 8-28-2 Data Processing Time ...................................................................... 8-38-3 Dimensions ........................................................................................ 8-5
Chapter 9 Appendix
9-1 Connecting with Sensor Amplifiers ................................................ 9-2Connectable Sensor Amplifiers ...................................................... 9-2Mixed Connection of Sensor amplifiers .......................................... 9-3
9-2 Device Profile .................................................................................... 9-59-3 Troubleshooting ................................................................................ 9-6
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 9
9-4 Default Settings ................................................................................. 9-89-5 Procedures for Communicating with an Allen-Bradley ControlLogix
PLC ..................................................................................................... 9-9Procedures for Communicating with an Allen-Bradley ControlLogix PLC ................................................................................................ 9-9Procedures for Communication with an Allen-Bradley SLC5/05 PLC .............................................................................................. 9-15
9-6 Objects Usable by DL-EP1 ............................................................. 9-20List of Usable Objects .................................................................. 9-20Reading Each Object Table ......................................................... 9-21Identity Object (Class ID: 01H) ..................................................... 9-22Message Router Object (Class ID: 02H) ...................................... 9-25Assembly Object (Class ID: 04H) ................................................. 9-26Connection Manager Object (Class ID: 06H) ............................... 9-28TCP/IP Interface Object (Class ID: F5H) ..................................... 9-30Ethernet Link Object (Class ID: F6H) ........................................... 9-34
9-7 Index ................................................................................................. 9-39
10 - EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
Terms Used in This Document
This document uses the following terms:
Term Description
Sensor A sensor amplifier
Scanner The EtherNet/IP scanner device
Adaptor The EtherNet/IP adaptor device
Main unitA sensor amplifier that has a power line and can operate
alone
Expansion unitA sensor amplifier that does not have a power line and
must be connected to a main unit
D-bus
The name of KEYENCE's wiring-saving system for sensor
amplifiers
For example, the high-precision contact type digital sen-
sors of the GT2-70 series support this system.
PLC Programmable logic controller
Ladder program A program which controls the PLC
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 11
1
MEMO
2 - EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 1-1
1Before Using
This chapter provides an overview of the DL-EP1 and describes its
part names and functions.
1-1 DL-EP1 Overview ............................................... 1-2
1-2 Checking the Package Contents ........................ 1-3
1-3 Names and Functions of Each Part.................... 1-4
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -1-2
1
Be
fore
Usin
g
1-1 DL-EP1 Overview
The DL-EP1 operates as an EtherNet/IP communication adaptor. EtherNet/IP
communications enable you to output the ON/OFF control signals and current values
of the DL-EP1 and sensor amplifiers connected to the DL-EP1 as communication
data to a PLC or other equipment.
The DL-EP1 supports EtherNet/IP cyclic communication (Implicit messaging) and
message communication (Explicit messaging). Cyclic communication enables data
exchange without a ladder program. Message communication allows for reading/
writing sensor amplifier parameters and issuing commands to the sensor amplifiers.
System configuration example
You can connect a maximum of 15 sensor amplifiers supporting D-bus to the DL-
EP1. You can connect single main unit to the DL-EP1 and a maximum of 14
expansion units to the main unit. (D-bus is the name of KEYENCE's wiring-saving
system for sensor amplifiers.) If the sensor amplifier is D-bus compatible, different
models can be connected together.
How many and what types of sensor amplifiers can be connected depends on the
sensor amplifiers or units to be connected. For details, refer to "Connectable
Sensor Amplifiers" (Page 9-2).
Overview
PLC or other host device(EtherNet/IP unit)
DL-EP1 (this unit)
EtherNet/IPadaptor
EtherNet
Connectable Sensor Amplifiers
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 1-3
1
Be
fore
Usin
g
1-2 Checking the Package Contents
Before using the DL-EP1, make sure that the following equipment and accessories
are included in the package. We have thoroughly inspected the package contents
before shipment.
However, in the event of defective or broken items, contact your nearest KEYENCE
office.
Package contents
List of Optional Parts
Package Contents
DL-EP1 main unit x 1 Expansion connector
sticker x 1
End unit x 2
OP-26751
Instruction manual x 1
• STP (shielded twisted pair) cable
(Category 5e, straight)
- OP-51504 (0.2 m)
- OP-51505 (0.5 m)
- OP-51506 (1 m)
- OP-51507 (3 m)
- OP-51508 (5 m)
* The working ambient temperature of the above
cables are 0 to 50°C.
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -1-4
1
Be
fore
Usin
g
1-3 Names and Functions of Each Part
This section describes the part names and functions of the DL-EP1.
(8) Sensor amplifier connector(for DIN rail mount type)
(1) RJ-45 connector(2) Reset switch (3) Link/activity indicator (green)(4) Module status indicator (green/red)
(5) Network status indicator (green/red)(6) Sensor communication indicator
(green/red)(7) MAC address
(9) Sensor amplifier connector (for panel mount type
and large display type)
Name Description
(1) RJ-45 connector Attach the network cable to this connector.
(2) Reset switch When held down for three seconds or longer, the DL-EP1
settings will be reset to the default settings.
For details, refer to "Default Settings" (Page 9-8).
(3) Link/activity
indicator
Normal: Green LED lights up or blinks
For details, refer to "Troubleshooting" (Page 9-6).
(4) Module status
indicator
Normal: Green LED lights up
For details, refer to "Troubleshooting" (Page 9-6).
(5) Network status
indicator
Normal: Green LED lights up
For details, refer to "Troubleshooting" (Page 9-6).
(6) Sensor communication
indicator
Indicates the status of communication between the DL-
EP1 and sensor amplifiers.
Normal: Green LED lights up
For details, refer to "Troubleshooting" (Page 9-6).
(7) MAC address MAC address for this DL-EP1
(8) Sensor amplifier
connector (for DIN rail
mount type)
Attach the sensor amplifier to this connector. When not
using this connector, remove it and replace with the
protective sticker.
1-3 Names and Functions of Each Part
1-5- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
1
Be
fore
Usin
g
(9) Sensor amplifier
connector (for panel
mount/large display
type)
Attach the sensor amplifier to this connector. A protective
seal is attached when shipped from the factory. The
optional expansion cable (OP-35361) is used for this
connection.
Name Description
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
1
Be
fore
Usin
g
MEMO
1-6
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 2-1
2Connection and Configuration
This section describes procedures from installing the DL-EP1 and
sensor amplifiers to configuring communication.
2-1 Procedures from Installation before Using the DL-EP1 to Configuration ........................................................ 2-2
2-2 Installation and Connection to Sensor Amplifiers ........ 2-3
2-3 Wiring ............................................................... 2-10
2-4 Configuring Communication with the DL-EP1... 2-12
2-5 Configuring Communication with the Scanner.. 2-15
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -2-2
2
Co
nn
ec
tion
an
d C
on
figu
ratio
n
2-1 Procedures from Installation before Using the DL-EP1 to Configuration
This section describes the procedures before you use the DL-EP1.
The above configurations enable communication.
For the outline of scanner side configuration for communication with an Allen-Bradley
scanner, refer to "Procedures for Communicating with an Allen-Bradley
ControlLogix PLC" (Page 9-9).
Configuration Procedures
1. Installation and Connection to Sensor Amplifiers
Connecting the DL-EP1 to sensor amplifiers (Page 2-4)
Assigning ID Numbers (Page 2-6)
2. Wiring
3. Configuring Communication with the DL-EP1
4. Configuring Communication with the Scanner
Connecting a communication cable (Page 2-10)
Setting the IP address (Page 2-12)
Setting the IP address (Page 2-15)
Registering the device profile of the DL-EP1 (Page 2-15)
Configuring the Scanner Side
(Refer to each scanner manual.)
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 2-3
2
Co
nn
ec
tion
an
d C
on
figu
ratio
n
2-2 Installation and Connection to Sensor Amplifiers
This section describes how to mount the DE-EP1 on the DIN rail and to connect it to
sensor amplifiers.
You can connect a maximum of 15 sensor amplifiers supporting D-bus to the DL-
EP1. You can connect one main unit to the DL-EP1 and a maximum of 14 expansion
units to the main unit. (D-bus is the name of KEYENCE's wiring-saving system for
sensor amplifiers.) If the sensor amplifier is D-bus compatible, different models can
be connected together.
How many and what types of sensor amplifiers can be connected depends on the
sensor amplifiers or units to be connected. For details, refer to "Connectable
Sensor Amplifiers" (Page 9-2).
Mounting the DL-EP1 on the DIN rail
1 Align the claw on the bottom of the DL-EP1 with the DIN rail. While pushing the amplifier in the direction of arrow (1), press down in the direction of arrow (2).
2 To remove the DL-EP1, raise the amplifier in the direction of arrow (3) while pushing the DL-EP1 in the direction of arrow (1).
Mounting and connection to Sensor Amplifiers
(3)
(2)(1)
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
2-2 Installation and Connection to Sensor Amplifiers
2-4
2
Co
nn
ec
tion
an
d C
on
figu
ratio
n
Connecting the DL-EP1 to sensor amplifiers
The EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 must be connected to sensor
amplifiers before it can function.The connecting procedure varies with the mounting type of the sensor amplifiers tobe connected.
For the instructions on connecting additional sensor amplifiers, refer to theinstruction manual of each sensor amplifier.
Connecting to sensor amplifiers of the DIN rail mount type
1 Remove the expansion protective cover from the sensor amplifier to be connected.
2 Mount the EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1, on the DIN rail and connect it to the sensor amplifier.Insert the EtherNet I/P Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 to the sensor amplifierconnector so as not to leave space between them.
Make sure that the sensor amplifiers are turned off before
connecting the EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1.
Connecting the DL-EP1 to the sensor amplifiers when they are
turned on may damage the DE-EP1.
Make sure that the sensor amplifier connector (for DIN rail
mount type) is not askew on the side face of the EtherNet/IP
Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 according to the figure
shown below. Connecting the DL-EP1 to the sensor amplifier
with the connector being askew may damage the DL-EP1.
NOTICE
Point
Sensor amplifier
Expansion protective cover
Sensor amplifier EtherNet/IP Compatible Network UnitDL-EP1
Connector
NOTICE Sensor amplifier connector
EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
2-2 Installation and Connection to Sensor Amplifiers
2-5
2
Co
nn
ec
tion
an
d C
on
figu
ratio
n
3 Mount the supplied end units (OP-26751: a set of two pieces) on the outer ends of the amplifier and the EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1. Then, fix the end units with the screws on the top of each end unit (2 points x 2 units). (Tightening torque : 0.6 N•m or less)Mount the end units in the same way as the EtherNet/IP Compatible Network
Unit DL-EP1.
Connecting to sensor amplifiers of panel mount type
1 Connect the sensor amplifier and the EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1, with the optional expansion cable (OP-35361).
2 Remove the sensor amplifier connector (for DIN rail mount type) from the EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 using pliers. Then, attach the expansion connector sticker supplied with the DL-EP1.
Press the EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1, into
full engagement with the sensor amplifier. Energizing the DL-
EP1 when not inserted fully may damage the DE-EP1.
• Turn off the power supply and connect the expansion cable
securely. Energizing the DL-EP1 when not inserted fully
may damage the DL-EP1.
• Attaching or detaching the cable when the power supply is
on may damage the DL-EP1.
End unit
End unit
NOTICE
Peel off the protective sticker.
Expansion cable (Cable length: 300 mm)
NOTICE
Sensor amplifier connector(for DIN rail moun type) Expansion
connector sticker
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
2-2 Installation and Connection to Sensor Amplifiers
2-6
2
Co
nn
ec
tion
an
d C
on
figu
ratio
n
Connecting to sensor amplifiers of large display type
1 Connect the sensor amplifier and the EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 with the optional expansion cable (OP-35361).
2 Remove the sensor amplifier connector (for DIN rail mounting type) from the EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1, using pliers. Then, attach the expansion connector sticker supplied with the DL-EP1.
Several sensor amplifiers can be connected to the DL-EP1. ID numbers for data
identification are assigned to each sensor amplifier.
The method for assigning ID numbers is as follows:
• "ID01" to "ID15" can be assigned as ID numbers (up to 15 sensor amplifiers can
be connected).
• ID numbers are assigned in order, starting from the sensor amplifier that is the
main unit. (Optional numbers cannot be assigned.)
• 0 is assigned as the ID number of the DL-EP1.
• Turn off the power supply and connect the expansion cable
securely. Energizing the DL-EP1 when not inserted fully
may damage the DL-EP1.
• Attaching or detaching the cable when the power supply is
on may damage the DL-EP1.
Expansion cable (Cable length: 300 mm)
Peel off theprotective sticker
Peel off the protective sticker
NOTICE
Sensor amplifier connector(for DIN rail mount type) Expansion
connector sticker
Assigning ID Numbers
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
2-2 Installation and Connection to Sensor Amplifiers
2-7
2
Co
nn
ec
tion
an
d C
on
figu
ratio
n
• You cannot change the ID numbers assigned to the sensor amplifiers.• In this manual, ID number 00 to ID number 15 are denoted as ID00 to
ID15, respectively.
Also for cyclic communication, output, current value, and external input are assigned
one by one per ID number. Data assignment depends on sensor amplifiers, so refer
to Chapter 3 to Chapter 8.
For DIN rail mount type
For panel mount type
Point
ID number 01
Mainunit
Expansionunit
Expansionunit
Expansionunit
02 08 09 00
ID number Sensor amplifier
01
02
08
09
Main unit
Expansion unit
Sensor amplifier
Expansion unit
Expansion unit
DL-EP1ID number 00
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
2-2 Installation and Connection to Sensor Amplifiers
2-8
2
Co
nn
ec
tion
an
d C
on
figu
ratio
n
For large display type (GT2-100N/100P)
ID01 ID02
ID03 ID04 ID05
ID06 ID07 ID08
ID09 ID10 ID11
DL-EP1ID number 00
: ID number 01 to11to
GT2-100N/100P
ID01 ID11
Headexpansionboard
Sensor amplifier
* The numbers are different from the ID numbers marked on the back of the GT2-100N/100P.
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
2-2 Installation and Connection to Sensor Amplifiers
2-9
2
Co
nn
ec
tion
an
d C
on
figu
ratio
n
ID numbers are assigned automatically, so changing the number of sensoramplifiers or their connection sequence may require control programmodification. In addition, some units are restricted in their connectionsequence (e.g., a unit that must be the first connection). For this reason,keep these in mind when creating a control program.• An "unassigned ID error" occurs if more sensor amplifiers are connected
than the maximum number of connectable amplifiers .
"Error code list" (Page 3-13)
"Connectable Sensor Amplifiers" (Page 9-2)• For the GT2-100 series, set the effective IDs correctly. Otherwise,
correct communication is not assured. For details on effective ID
settings, refer to the GT2-100 Series User's Manual.
・
When the DL-EP1 is used to communicate with the GT2-100 Series,
the ID numbers of the heads are ID01 for the main unit, ID02 for
expansion unit 1, ID03 for expansion unit 2, ..., and ID11 for
expansion unit 10.
Note that these numbers differ from the ID numbers described in the
GT2-100 Series Instruction Manual or User's Manual.
NOTICE
Point
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -2-10
2
Co
nn
ec
tion
an
d C
on
figu
ratio
n
2-3 Wiring
The DL-EP1 uses the power supplied to sensor amplifiers, so there is no power cable
wiring. This section describes the wiring of communication cables used by the DL-
EP1.
Use the following procedures to connect the DL-EP1 to the communication cable
required for EtherNet/IP communication.
Usable cable
Usable cables depend on whether the system is configured with 10BASE-T or
100BASE-TX.
Structuring a 10BASE-T system
When the system is configured
with 10BASE-T, use a Category
3 or higher shielded twisted-
pair (STP) cable or an
unshielded twisted-pair (UTP)
cable.
Structuring a 100BASE-TX network
When the system (network) is configured with 100BASE-TX, use a Category 5 or
higher STP or UTP cable. Do not use a Category 3 or Category 4 UTP cable.
• Use a STP/UTP straight cable when connecting the DL-EP1 to anEthernet switch.
• Use a STP/UTP cross cable when directly connecting the DL-EP1 to aPC.
• Do not use the STP/UTP cross cable incorrectly because it is difficult todistinguish this cable from the STP/UTP straight cable in appearance.
• When the system (Ethernet) is configured with a type (e.g., 10BASE-2 or10BASE-5) other than 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX, use an Ethernetswitch with an AUI (MAU) connector or a BNC connector or use a mediaconverter (10BASE5 → 10BASE-T or 10BASE2 → 10BASE-T).
Connecting a communication cable
STP/UTP cable
Point
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
2-3 Wiring
2-11
2
Co
nn
ec
tion
an
d C
on
figu
ratio
n
DL-EP1 connector port
The DL-EP1 connector port accepts an RJ-45 8-pole modular connector (ISO8877
compliant) used with 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX and complies with the IEEE802.3
Standards.
Precautions for connecting a STP/UTP cable to the DL-EP1 connector port
Take care not to apply a load to the DL-EP1 connector port when connecting the
STP/UTP cable to the DL-EP1.
Connecting the DL-EP1 to EtherNet/IP
The following describes how to connect the DL-EP1 to the RJ-45 connector.
1 Turn off the power supply.
2 Connect one modular jack of the STP/UTP cable to the 10BASE-T/100BAS port of the Ethernet switch to be used.
Insert the modular jack until a "click" is heard. The modular jack and connector
will lock.
• Keep the length of the STP/UTP cable to be used 100 m or less.• Carefully check the state of connector (port) on the Ethernet
switch before connecting the DL-EP1. There are various Ethernetswitches. Some Ethernet switches have a different shapeconnector (AUI connector or BNC connector, etc.) from the RJ-45,while some have connectors used to connect Ethernet switchestogether (cascade ports).
3 Connect the modular jack on the other end of the STP/UTP cable to the DL-EP1 connector port.
Insert the jack until a "click" is heard. The modular jack and connector will lock.
The cable may be bent and used when installed. Bending the cable
at a sharp angle may cut the wires in the cable or the cable may be
disconnected during use. Install or lay the cable to be used with
attention to the recommended bending radius R of the cable.
NOTICE
Point
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -2-12
2
Co
nn
ec
tion
an
d C
on
figu
ratio
n
2-4 Configuring Communication with the DL-EP1
This section describes settings for connecting the DL-EP1 to the EtherNet/IP system.
The following describes how to set communication with the DL-EP1.
Setting the IP address
Set the IP address with the DL-EP1 wired and with the power supplied.
By default, the IP address is not set. However, you can use the BOOTP client function
to set the IP address via Ethernet.
The following 2 methods are available for setting the IP address.
• Use the IP address setting tool (this tool can be downloaded from the Keyence
web site http://www.keyence.com).
Refer to the following setting procedures or the "IP Setting Tool User's Manual".
• Use an IP address setting tool from other sources.
Refer to the manuals provided by the respective sources.
Using the IP address setting tool
Here briefly describes the procedures for setting the IP address with the IP
address setting tool. For details on how to use the IP address setting tool, refer to
the "IP Setting Tool User's Manual". You can view the "IP Setting Tool User's
Manual" from [Help(H)] of "IP Setting Tool" as the PDF file.
1 Start the IP Setting Tool.Devices such as the DL-EP1 connected to the network and for which their IP
addresses are not set will appear.
To display the devices for which their IP addresses are not set, click the [Scan
EtherNet/IP devices (A)] button.
DL-EP1 Settings
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
2-4 Configuring Communication with the DL-EP1
2-13
2
Co
nn
ec
tion
an
d C
on
figu
ratio
n
To display "Not Set" for the IP address, the network status indicator(NS) must be off (IP address not assigned). To unassign the IPaddress, hold down the Reset switch on the DL-EP1 for threeseconds or longer.
2 Select the device for which to set the IP address and click [Setup IP addr.(I)] to display [Setup IP addr.].Compare the MAC address to be displayed with the front MAC address on the
DL-EP1 and select the device for which to set the IP address.
Set an IP address which is not currently used in "IP addr.(required)(I)" and click
the [OK] button.
Using the [Search available IP addresses (F)] button enables you to
search for open IP addresses.
Point
Reference
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
2-4 Configuring Communication with the DL-EP1
2-14
2
Co
nn
ec
tion
an
d C
on
figu
ratio
n
3 The IP address has now been set.
What is BOOTP?BOOTP is the abbreviation of BOOT strap Protocol. This protocol is used
by the client device in the TCP/IP network to make the network settings
assigned from the server.
If there is a BOOTP server in the same network as the device running as
the BOOTP client, an IP address is assigned to the device connected as
the BOOTP client.
Reference
IP address assignment
BOOTP client BOOTP server
Via Ethernet
Ethernet
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 2-15
2
Co
nn
ec
tion
an
d C
on
figu
ratio
n
2-5 Configuring Communication with the Scanner
This section describes scanner side configuration for connecting the DL-EP1 to the
EtherNet/IP system.
When communicating with an Allen-Bradley scanner, also refer to the
"Procedures for Communicating with an Allen-Bradley ControlLogix PLC" (Page 9-9).
Connecting the DL-EP1 to the EtherNet/IP scanner requires the following settings:
Setting the IP address
Set the IP address of the scanner.
Registering the device profile of the DL-EP1
Register the device profile of the adaptor (DL-EP1) to be connected using the
scanner's setting software.
You can register the device profile manually or by reading the EDS (Electronic Data
Sheet) file. You can download the EDS file of the DL-EP1 from the Keyence web site
(http://www.keyence.com).
Configuring communication with the DL-EP1
The DL-EP1 uses EtherNet/IP cyclic communication or message communication to
communicate with the scanner.
Cyclic communication (Implicit messaging)
This function sends and receives data at a set RPI (Requested Packet Interval).
Selecting the communication method called "connection" and assigning the
devices to be sent and received on the scanner side enables the DL-EP1 to
communicate with the scanner without creating a ladder program.
Message communication (Explicit messaging)
This function is used to send and receive data which does not need to be timed.
Use this function when changing the sensor amplifier settings or when performing
EtherNet/IP communication with the scanner (e.g., Allen-Bradley SLC5/05 Series)
that does not support cyclic communication.
This function uses a ladder program to create a message on the scanner side for
communication.
For more information on setting each communication method, refer to the chapters
titling "Communicating with...." of each sensor amplifier as well as the manuals
enclosed with each scanner.
This manual explains only the EtherNet/IP scanner functions and settings
required for communication with the DL-EP1. For details on the functions
and settings between the EtherNet/IP scanner and CPU unit, refer to the
manuals enclosed with the scanner and CPU unit.
Setting the scanner
Reference
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
2-5 Configuring Communication with the Scanner
2-16
2
Co
nn
ec
tion
an
d C
on
figu
ratio
n
MEMO
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 3-1
3Communicating with
the GT2 Series
This chapter describes the configuration of memory that
communicates with the EtherNet/IP compatible network unit
and a communication timing chart.
3-1 What is EtherNet/IP?.......................................... 3-2
3-2 DL-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication Function ... 3-3
3-3 Cyclic communication......................................... 3-5
3-4 Message Communication................................. 3-21
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -3-2
3
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
the G
T2 S
erie
s
3-1 What is EtherNet/IP?
EtherNet/IP is an industrial communication network with open specifications. The
specifications are managed by ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendor Association, Inc.).
Industrial protocol has been combined with the Ethernet and standardized as Ether-
Net/IP (Industrial Protocol).
Communication is realized by combining the protocols known as Common Industrial
Protocol (CIP) with TCP/IP and Ethernet. This allows regular Ethernet to be used
together with the network.
Before starting EtherNet/IP communication, one of the devices must open a
communication line called a "connection" with the other device. The side which
opens the connection is called the "scanner", and the side to be opened is called the
"adaptor". (The DL-EP1 is an adaptor.)
EtherNet/IP includes cyclic communication (Implicit messaging) which sends and
receives data periodically. Message communication (Explicit messaging) which
sends and receives commands and responses at a time specified by the user.
Cyclic communication enables you to set RPI (Requested Packet Interval) according
to the priority of the data to be exchanged, allowing the entire communication load to
be adjusted for data exchange.
Message communication enables you to exchange the required commands and
responses at the required timing. Message communication is used for applications
which do not require the punctuality of cyclic communication, such as reading and
writing adaptor settings.
What is EtherNet/IP?
Scanner
Adaptor Adaptor Adaptor
High speed(Communication cycle: 10 ms)
Regular speed(Communication cycle: 100 ms)
Low speed (Communication cycle: 1000 ms)
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 3-3
3
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
the G
T2 S
erie
s
3-2 DL-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication Function
This section describes the EtherNet/IP functions supported by the DL-EP1.
The DL-EP1 functions as an EtherNet/IP adaptor, and supports both cyclic and
message EtherNet/IP communications.
The EtherNet/IP scanner can use the following functions:
Output
Comparator Value
・・・・・・Error information
External input
Setting value
Output
Comparator Value
・・・・・・Error information
External input
Setting value
IN area
OUT area
Output
Current value
Error information
External input
EtherNet/IP scanner DL-EP1
Sensor amplifier
Message communication
Output
Comparator Value
・・・・・・Error information
IN area
OUT areaDirect read/write of various parameters
Cyclic communicationExternal input
Setting value
Cyclic communication
Overview of Communication Methods
Function of sensor amplifier
Communication Methods
Cyclic communication(Page 3-5)
Message Communication(Page 3-21)
Read status
Read output
Read current value
Execute external input
Change bank number
X
Rewrite setting value
Motion command
Read current value, setting,
and status
Read number of decimal
places
Rewrite setting value
Lock all
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
3-2 DL-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication Function
3-4
3
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
the G
T2 S
erie
s
Cyclic communication
This function sends and receives data between the scanner and DL-EP1 at the set
RPI (Requested Packet Interval). The function can exchange data such as the
sensor amplifier's output signals and comparator values and error status without
ladder programs.
Configurations such as RPI and data size for cyclic communication are seton the scanner side.In a network which has many connected devices, including EtherNet/IPdevices, a delay or packet loss could occur if a large load is constantly ortemporarily applied on the network. Verify the settings carefully beforeoperation.
Message communication
Message communication can be used for applications which do not require a
punctuality like cyclic communication.
In message communication, various parameters, including data which can be
exchanged with cyclic communication, can be read and written. Functions specific
to sensors such as the sensor amplifier preset function can also be executed.
PLC EtherNet/IP scanner
RPI=3 (ms)* RPI=0.5 (ms)*
RPI=5 (ms)*
RPI=10 (ms)*
Various EtherNet/IP adaptors
Ethernet
* RPI (Requested Packet Interval) can be set individually for each connection.
Point
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 3-5
3
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
the G
T2 S
erie
s
3-3 Cyclic communication
This section describes the cyclic communication functions and how to use them.
What is cyclic communication?
Cyclic communication is a function that exchanges data with the EtherNet/IP devicein a cyclic manner (at a set cycle).
In cyclic communication, data can be exchanged when one device successfullyopens a logical communication line called a "connection" with the other device.The side which opens the connection is called the scanner, and the side to be
opened is called the adaptor. (The DL-EP1 is an adaptor.)
Cyclic communication is started in the following procedures:
(1) The scanner requests the adaptor to open the connection.(2) The adapter side checks compatibility.(3) If no error occurs as a result the compatibility check, the adapter opens the
connection.(* If an error is found during the compatibility check, the adapter does not openthe connection.)
"Checking the Device Compatibility" (Page 3-20)
Data is exchanged between the EtherNet/IP scanner, DL-EP1 and each sensoramplifier as follows:
To carry out EtherNet/IP communication with a scanner which does not
support cyclic communication (Allen-Bradley SLC5/05 Series, etc.), use
"Message Communication" (Page 3-21).
(1) Request connection open
(3) Open connection
(2) Check compatibility
Output data
Data reflected in thescanner
Input data
The data output from thescanner is stored by theDL-EP1.
EtherNet/IP scanner DL-EP1 Sensor amplifier
IN area
OUT area
Cyclic communication
Data betweensensors isrefreshed
Cyclic communication
Data betweensensors isrefreshed
Reference
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
3-3 Cyclic communication
3-6
3
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
the G
T2 S
erie
s
The following settings are required to execute cyclic communication with the DL-
EP1.
[DL-EP1]
The DL-EP1 does not require any setting.
[Scanner]
(1) Set the connection to be used.
(2) Set the devices used in cyclic communication.
Refer to the scanner manual for details on how to make the above settings.
(* No ladder program is required when cyclic communication is used.)
Cyclic communication can use the following functions:
(1) Read status
(2) Read output (Page 3-17)
Outputs that can be read: HIGH output, LOW output, GO output, HH output, LL
output
(3) Read P.V. value (Page 3-19)
(4) Execute external input (Page 3-18)
Inputs that can be used: PRESET, TIMING, RESET, error clear
Configuring Cyclic Communication
Actions which can be completed with Cyclic Communication
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
3-3 Cyclic communication
3-7
3
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
the G
T2 S
erie
s
EtherNet/IP requires that a connection must be opened from the scanner when cyclic
communication is started. There are various types of connections, and the type
usable by each device is defined in the EDS file.
The DL-EP1 can use the following connections:
• Each connection's trigger timing is executed cyclically. The connection
type supports both point-to-point and multicast.
• The details of each application type are as follows:
Exclusive Owner:This connection allows simultaneous setting of both data
transmission from the scanner to the DL-EP1 and data
transmission from the DL-EP1 to the scanner. This setting is
made not only when the scanner monitors the adaptor (DL-EP1)
data, but also when it issues external inputs and rewrites the
settings, etc. Multiple "Exclusive Owner" connections cannot be
opened to one adaptor (DL-EP1).
Input Only:This connection allows only data transmission from the DL-EP1
to the scanner. This setting is made when the scanner only
monitors adaptor (DL-EP1) data. Multiple scanners can open an
"Input Only" connection simultaneously to one adaptor (DL-
EP1).
(* To simultaneously open connections from multiple scanners,
set the Connection Type to Multicast.
Usable Connections
NoConnection
NameInput/Output
Assembly Instance
Size(Byte)
RPI Range (in 0.5 ms)
Application Type
1
Monitor Data
And External
Input
DL-EP1 to
scanner64H (100) 168
0.5 ms to
10000 ms
Exclusive
OwnerScanner to
DL-EP165H (101) 10
2Monitor Data
(Input Only)
DL-EP1 to
scanner64H (100) 168
0.5 ms to
10000 msInput Only
Scanner to
DL-EP1FEH (254) 0
Reference
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
3-3 Cyclic communication
3-8
3
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
the G
T2 S
erie
s
The data from the DL-EP1 is assigned to the EtherNet/IP scanner's IN area.
The data such as 16-bit data extending over multiple bytes is stored into
an area which starts with an even address in order from the lowest-order
byte.
Example)
Assignment to IN Area (DL-EP1 to Scanner)
DL-EP1 data
Scanner IN area
Address 0Address 1
Address 167
Monitor Data(Assembly Instance: 100)
1-byte (8-bit) data
Reference
16-bit dataAddress 40 to 41
16-bit dataAddress 42 to 43
12H 34H
56H 78H
High-order byte Low-order byte
High-order byte Low-order byte
56H43
78H42
12H41
34H40
32-bit dataAddress 48 to 51
12H51
34H50
56H49
78H48
12H 34H 56H 78H
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
3-3 Cyclic communication
3-9
3
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
the G
T2 S
erie
s
Monitor Data (84 Words (168 Bytes)) Assembly Instance (Instance ID): 64H
This is the device map for the monitor data to be assigned to the IN area.
For details on each parameter, refer to "Parameter List" (Page 3-11).
For details on current value 0 and current value 1, refer to "Current Value 0/
Current Value 1" (Page 3-12).
Name Address(Byte) bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
Status
0 Reserved for systemDL-EP1
Error Status
1 Error StatusWarningStatus
Reserved for system
SensorError
Status
2 ID08 . . . . . ID01
3Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
SensorWarningStatus
4 ID08 . . . . . ID01
5Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
Current Value 0
OverRange
6 ID08 . . . . . ID01
7Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
Current Value 0UnderRange
8 ID08 . . . . . ID01
9Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
Current Value 0Invalid
10 ID08 . . . . . ID01
11Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
Current Value 1
OverRange
12 ID08 . . . . . ID01
13Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
Current Value 1UnderRange
14 ID08 . . . . . ID01
15Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
Current Value 1Invalid
16 ID08 . . . . . ID01
17Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
Output 1 (HIGH)
18 ID08 . . . . . ID01
19Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
Output 2 (LOW)
20 ID08 . . . . . ID01
21Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
Output 3 (GO)
22 ID08 . . . . . ID01
23Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
Output 4 (HH)
24 ID08 . . . . . ID01
25Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
Output 5 (LL)
26 ID08 . . . . . ID01
27Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
3-3 Cyclic communication
3-10
3
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
the G
T2 S
erie
s
External Input
Response 1(Preset)
28 ID08 . . . . . ID01
29Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
External Input
Response 2(Timing)
30 ID08 . . . . . ID01
31Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
External Input
Response 3(Preset)
32 ID08 . . . . . ID01
33Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
External Input
Response 4(ErrorClear)
34 ID08 . . . . . ID01
35Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
External Input
Response 5(Unassigned)
36 ID08 . . . . . ID01
37Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
ErrorID Number
40Current Error ID Number (16-bit unsigned integer)
41
ErrorCode
42Current Error Code (16-bit unsigned integer)
43
WarningID Number
44Current Warning ID Number (16-bit unsigned integer)
45
Warning Code
46Current Warning Code (16-bit unsigned integer)
47
Current Value 0
(Comparator Value (P.V.)
or Raw Value (R.V.))
48
ID Number 1 (Current Value 0) (32-bit signed integer)49
50
51
: :
104
ID Number 15 (Current Value 0) (32-bit signed integer)105
106
107
Current Value 1
(Unassigned)
108
ID Number 1 (Current Value 1) (32-bit signed integer)109
110
111
: :
164
ID Number 15 (Current Value 1) (32-bit signed integer)165
166
167
Name Address(Byte) bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
3-3 Cyclic communication
3-11
3
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
the G
T2 S
erie
s
Parameter List
Item Description
DL-EP1 Error
Status
The error status of the DL-EP1 is output.
ON: An error occurred.
OFF: No error occurred.
Warning Status (Unassigned)
Error Status
The error status of the DL-EP1 or the error statuses of all the connected sensor
amplifiers are output.
When ON, a value is stored in "Error ID Number" and "Error Code". When OFF, 0
is stored in "Error ID Number" and "Error Code".
ON: An error occurred in the DL-EP1 or in any of the connected sensor
amplifiers.
OFF: No error occurred in the DL-EP1 or in the connected sensor amplifiers.
Sensor Error Status
The target ID number bit of the sensor amplifier where the error occurred is
output.
ON: An error occurred in the sensor amplifier with the target ID number.
OFF: No error occurred in the sensor amplifier with the target ID number.
Sensor Warning
Status(Unassigned)
Current Value n
Over Range
(n: 0 to 1)
The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number
is compared with the measurement upper limit and the comparison result is
output.
ON: The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID
number is greater than the measurement upper limit.
OFF: The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID
number is less than the measurement upper limit.
(* The current value 1 does not exist in the GT2 Series.)
Current Value n
Under Range
(n: 0 to 1)
The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number
is compared with the measurement lower limit and the comparison result is
output.
ON: The current value of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is less
than the measurement lower limit.
OFF: The current value of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is
greater than the measurement lower limit.
(* The current value 1 does not exist in the GT2 Series.)
Current Value n
Invalid
(n: 0 to 1)
The status of current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID
number is output.
ON: The current value of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is
invalid.
OFF: The current value of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is
valid (normal).
(* The current value 1 does not exist in the GT2 Series.)
Output n (n: 1 to 5)
The ON/OFF status of output n (n: 1 to 5) of the sensor amplifier with the target
ID number is output.
Output 1: HIGH output
Output 2: LOW output
Output 3: GO output
Output 4: HH output*1
Output 5: LL output*1
ON: Output n is output.
OFF: Output n is not output.
External Input
Response
n (n: 1 to 5)
An external input response is output when the corresponding external input
request n (n: 1 to 5) is made via communication.
The ID number of an unexisting external input is also output.
ON: The external input request was made (ON).
OFF: The external input request was not made (OFF).
For details, refer to "Entering an external input to a sensor amplifier"
(Page 3-18).
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
3-3 Cyclic communication
3-12
3
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
the G
T2 S
erie
s
*1 There is no assigned output in GT2-71MC*.
Current Value 0/Current Value 1
Error ID Number
If "Error Status" in ON, the ID number of the DL-EP1 where the error occurred and
the ID numbers of sensor amplifiers connected to the DL-EP1 are stored (the ID
number of the DL-EP1 is 0). If no error has occurred, 0 is stored. If an error occurs
in multiple IDs, the ID number of the DL-EP1 or sensor amplifier where the highest
priority error occurred is stored.
Error priority:
(1) DL-EP1 error
(2) Sensor amplifier errors (the error with the smallest error code has the
highest priority)*
* If the same error code occurs in multiple sensor amplifiers, the error
with the smallest ID number has the highest priority.
Error Code
If "Error Status" is ON, the error code is stored. If no error has occurred, 0 is
stored. If an error occurs in multiple IDs, the error code of the DL-EP1 or sensor
amplifier where the highest priority error occurred is stored.
Error priority:
(1) DL-EP1 error
(2) Sensor amplifier errors (the error with the smallest error code has the
highest priority)*
* If the same error code occurs in multiple sensor amplifiers, the error
with the smallest ID number has the highest priority.
"Error code list" (Page 3-13)
Warning ID
Number(Unassigned)
Warning Code (Unassigned)
Current Value n
(n: 0 to 1)
The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier is stored. The current value
0 always exists without reference to sensor amplifier models. Whether the
current value 1 exists depends on sensor amplifier models. If the current value
1 does not exist, 0 is stored. The contents displayed in the current value n (n: 0
to 1) depend on the use conditions.
(* The current value 1 does not exist in the GT2 Series.)
"Current Value 0/Current Value 1" (Page 3-12)
Item Description
Name Model Conditions Function
Current Value 0Main unit/
expansion unit
When calculation mode is
OFFComparator value (P.V.)
When calculation mode is
ON (standard difference)Comparator value (P.V.)
When calculation mode is
ON (other than standard
difference)
Raw value (R.V.)
When calculation-only mode
is usedComparator value (P.V.)
Current Value 1Main unit/
expansion unit- (Unassigned)
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
3-3 Cyclic communication
3-13
3
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
the G
T2 S
erie
s
Error code list
The following error codes may occur in the DL-EP1 and sensor amplifiers.
DL-EP1
ErrorID
NumberCode Description Cause Actions
0
0 No error - -
51Unassigned ID
error
The main unit assigned no ID
within 10 seconds after the
DL-EP1 had been started.
• Check if the number of
connected sensor
amplifiers exceeds the
maximum number of
sensor amplifiers that can
be connected to the main
unit.
"Connectable Sensor
Amplifiers" (Page 9-2)
• Check the connection with
the sensor amplifiers and
then turn the power on
again.
If this error cannot be
recovered, contact your
nearest KEYENCE office.
52Start-time
communication error
Communication between
sensor amplifiers ended
abnormally before ID
assignment completion.
Check the connection with
the sensor amplifiers and
then turn the power on again.
If this error cannot be
recovered, contact your
nearest KEYENCE office.
53
Unsupported
sensor amplifier
connection error
A sensor amplifier not
supported by the DL-EP1 is
connected.
Check the model of the
connected sensor amplifier
and remove the sensor
amplifier if it is not supported
by the DL-EP1.
54 Mixed model error
Sensor amplifiers outside the
specifications have a mixed
connection.
Check if the models are
mixable.
"Mixed Connection of
Sensor amplifiers" (Page 9-3)
55Start-time
communication error
ID number assignment is
successful but
communication failed during
the subsequent initial
communication.
Check the connection with
the sensor amplifiers and
then turn the power on again.
If this error cannot be
recovered, contact your
nearest KEYENCE office.
56Current limitation
error
The number of connected
sensor amplifiers exceeds
the allowable range.
Use sensor amplifiers within
the allowable range.
57
Communication
error between
sensor amplifiers
An error occurred during
communication between
sensor amplifiers.
Check if there is a noise
source around the DL-EP1.
If the sensor communication
indicator is flashing red, turn
the power on again.
70IP address
duplicate error
The IP address is the same
as another device.
Check the IP address
setting.
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
3-3 Cyclic communication
3-14
3
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
the G
T2 S
erie
s
GT2 Series
Warning code list
No warning code occurs in the DL-EP1 and in the GT2 Series sensor amplifiers
connected to the DL-EP1.
0
100 System error The IP address is incorrect.
Contact your nearest
KEYENCE office.
101 System errorA default gateway setting
error occurred.
102 System error
An attempt to read data in
EEPROM such as the MAC
address has failed.
103 System errorAn attempt to start the
protocol stack has failed.
104 System errorAn attempt to access
FlashROM has failed.
150 System errorThe number of held IDs is
incorrect.
151 System errorThe number of sensors is
incorrect.
152 System error An initial read error occurred.
ErrorID
NumberCode Description Cause Actions
01H to
0FH
(Each
ID
number)
01H
Sensor amplifier
error 1 of each ID
number
Overcurrent error (ErC)
Refer to the GT2 Series
User's Manual.
02H
Sensor amplifier
error 2 of each ID
number
Head error (ErH)
03H
Sensor amplifier
error 3 of each ID
number
EEPROM error (ErE)
04H
Sensor amplifier
error 4 of each ID
numbe
Jam check error
(Er.ChK)
05H
Sensor amplifier
error 5 of each ID
number
Self-timing
delay error
(Er.dLY)
06H
Sensor amplifier
error 6 of each ID
number
Number-of-units error
(Er.Unit)
07H
Sensor amplifier
error 7 of each ID
number
Calculation error(Er.CAL)
08H
Sensor amplifier
error 8 of each ID
number
Calculation-only mode error
(Er.noH)
ErrorID
NumberCode Description Cause Actions
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
3-3 Cyclic communication
3-15
3
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
the G
T2 S
erie
s
The data to the sensor amplifier is assigned to the OUT area of the EtherNet/IP
scanner.
External Input (5 Words (10 Bytes)) assembly instance (Instance ID): 65H
Assignment to OUT Area (Scanner to DL-EP1)
DL-EP1 data
Scanner's OUT area
Address 0Address 1
Address 9
External Input(Assembly Instance: 101)
1-byte (8-bit) data
Name Address(Byte) bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
External
Input
Request 1
(Preset)
0 ID08 . . . . . ID01
1Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
External
Input
Request 2
(Timing)
2 ID08 . . . . . ID01
3Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
External
Input
Request 3
(Reset)
4 ID08 . . . . . ID01
5Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
External
Input
Request 4
(Error Clear)
6 ID08 . . . . . ID01
7Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
External
Input
Request 5
(Unassigned)
8 ID08 . . . . . ID01
9Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
3-3 Cyclic communication
3-16
3
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
the G
T2 S
erie
s
Parameter List
Name Function Operation
External
Input
Request 1
Preset
ON: Executes preset. Executing preset turns on external input
response 1.
OFF: Turns off external input response 1.
External
Input
Request 2
Timing
execution
ON: Turns on timing. Turning on timing also turns on external input
response 2.
OFF: Turns off timing. Turning off timing also turns off external input
response 2.
External
Input
Request 3
Reset Request
ON: Executes reset. Executing reset turns on external input
response 3.
OFF: Turns off external input response 3.
External
Input
Request 4
Error clear
ON: Executes error clear. Executing error clear turns on external
input response 4.
OFF: Turns off external input response 4.
External
Input
Request 5
(Unassigned) (Unassigned)
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
3-3 Cyclic communication
3-17
3
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
the G
T2 S
erie
s
The following describes how the scanner cyclically communicates with the DL-EP1
(cyclic communication).
"Reading an output from a sensor amplifier" (Page 3-17)
"Entering an external input to a sensor amplifier" (Page 3-18)
"Reading comparator values (P.V. values) from sensor amplifiers" (Page 3-19)
For the message communication method, refer to "Message communication"
(Page 3-4).
Reading an output from a sensor amplifier
Available outputs: HIGH, LOW, GO, HH, and LL
Device assignments: "Monitor Data (84 Words (168 Bytes)) Assembly Instance
(Instance ID): 64H" (Page 3-9)
This example shows how to read the HIGH output from the sensor amplifier ID01.
(1)The output from the sensor amplifier entered into the IN area via cyclic
communication.
To use the HH output and LL output, set "Special Output Setting" of thesensor amplifier to "5-Output".
Communication Methods
PLCOutput of sensor amplifierIN area [18] Bit0
Sensor amplifier (1)Output
HIGH output of ID 01
10
ONOFF
Point
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
3-3 Cyclic communication
3-18
3
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
the G
T2 S
erie
s
Entering an external input to a sensor amplifier
Available external inputs: PRESET, TIMING, RESET, error clear
Device assignments: "External Input (5 Words (10 Bytes)) assembly instance
(Instance ID): 65H" (Page 3-15)
This example shows how to enter a TIMING input to the sensor amplifier ID01.
(1)The device value in the OUT area to which an external input request was
assigned is linked via cyclic communication and the external input of the sensor
amplifier is turned on or off.
(2)You can check the input status of the sensor amplifier with the external input
response.
• To use the TIMING input, set "Simultaneous Input Setting" of the sensor amplifier to "Individual Input".
• To use the TIMING input, set the "Timing Type" of the sensor amplifier to"External Timing Input".
After the external input is executed, the button operation of the sensor
amplifiers is locked for about 10 seconds. "COM-Lock ( )" is
displayed for about 2 seconds during switching to the locked state or
when an attempt is made to operate a locked button. When button
operation is unlocked, "COM-Unlock ( )" is displayed for about 2
seconds. However, the initialization screen appears when an initialization
reset is executed. If an external input is repeatedly executed when the
initialization screen is being displayed, the initialization screen is retained.
PLC (1)External Input requestOUT area [2]Bit0
(2)External Input responseIN area [30]Bit0
Sensor amplifierExternal InputExternal input 2 to ID 01
10
ONOFF
10
Point
Reference
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
3-3 Cyclic communication
3-19
3
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
the G
T2 S
erie
s
Reading comparator values (P.V. values) from sensor amplifiers
Comparator values (P.V. values) are read from the IN area to which the ID number of
each sensor amplifier is assigned.
Device assignments: "Monitor Data (84 Words (168 Bytes)) Assembly Instance
(Instance ID): 64H" (Page 3-9)
This example shows how to read the comparator values from the sensor amplifiers
ID01, ID02, and ID03.
(1)When the comparator value of a sensor amplifier is updated, the new comparator
value is entered into the IN area via cyclic communication.
If the comparator value is correct, the parameter range is -199.9999 to 199.9999.
If the current value is over range, under range, or invalid, the previous value is
retained without updating the current value.
(2)The properties of the comparator value (Current Value n Over Range (each bit of
IN area [6]), Current Value n Under Range (each bit of IN area [8]), and Current
Value n Invalid (each bit of IN area [10]) are entered. If the comparator value of a
sensor amplifier is "over", "under," or "invalid," the bit corresponding to the ID
number of that sensor amplifier is set to 1.
*For the GT2 Series, the comparator value is stored in the current value 0.
PLC (2)Comparator value propertyEach bit of IN [6, 8,10]
Comparator value of ID 01 1234 4567 6789
IN area [48 to 51]
Comparator value of ID 02 2345 5678 7890
IN area [52 to 55]
Comparator value of ID 03 3456 8901
IN area [56 to 59]
Sensor amplifierComparator value of ID 01 1234 4567 6789
Comparator value of ID 02 2345 5678 7890
Comparator value of ID 03 3456 8901
(1)
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
3-3 Cyclic communication
3-20
3
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
the G
T2 S
erie
s
Compatibility check is a function executed when the scanner communicates with the
DL-EP1. This function checks if the device set with the scanner matches the DL-EP1
to prevent communicating with the wrong device. This function is executed when a
connection is opened.
When using scanners of other manufacturers
For how to use the scanners of other manufacturers, refer to the manual of each
scanner.
Checking the Device Compatibility
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 3-21
3
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
the G
T2 S
erie
s
3-4 Message Communication
This section describes the message communication functions and how to use them.
What is Message communication (Explicit messaging)?
Message communication is a function that performs communication by issuing
commands using the objects and services (Service Codes) prepared for each
EtherNet/IP device. Message communication is used for applications which do not
require the punctuality of cyclic communication, such as reading and writing adaptor
settings.
The objects and service codes which can be used with message communication
include those which are specified as a standard and those which are unique to the
device. You can use the objects and services unique to the DL-EP1to monitor data,
to read and write parameters, and to perform operations such as reset.
The DL-EP1 message communication function supports CIP-defined
UCMM (unconnected) and Class 3 (connected) message communication.
Scanner DL-EP1 Sensor amplifier
Send
Receive
Receive
Send
(1) Message communication command
(3) Message communication response
(2) Interpret and execute command
Reference
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
3-4 Message Communication
3-22
3
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
the G
T2 S
erie
s
The following settings are required to execute message communication with the DL-
EP1.
[DL-EP1]
The DL-EP1 does not require any setting.
[Scanner]
Set the applicable service, Class ID, Instance ID, Attribute ID, and service data, and
send the commands used for message communication. "Objects and Services"
(Page 3-25)
Refer to the scanner manual for details on the setting methods and applicable
commands.
The following lists the contents that can be executed by message communication
when the objects (DL Object) and services unique to the DL-EP1 are used.
(1) Reading data from a sensor amplifier
(2) Writing data to a sensor amplifier
(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier
(4) Locking sensor amplifier operations
(5) Reading the number of decimal places from a sensor amplifier
(1) Reading data from a sensor amplifier
Message communication reads parameters from the DL-EP1 and the sensor
amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.
"(1) Reading parameters from a sensor amplifier" (Page 3-46)
Configuring Message Communication
Actions which can be Completed with Message Communication
Command
Response:123456
GT2-7∗ Comparator values (P. V. values): 123456
DL-EP1Scanner
<Details of command>Service code: 0EHClass ID: 67HInstance ID: 01HAttribute ID: 0325H (805)
GT2-7∗
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
3-4 Message Communication
3-23
3
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
the G
T2 S
erie
s
(2) Writing data to a sensor amplifier
Message communication writes parameters to the DL-EP1 and the sensor
amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.
"(2) Writing parameters to a sensor amplifier" (Page 3-47)
(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier
Message communication issues operation commands such as preset to the DL-
EP1 and the sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.
"(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier" (Page 3-48)
(4) Locking sensor amplifier operations
Message communication locks operations by keys on the sensor amplifier
connected to the DL-EP1.
* If a key is locked, message communication cannot switch a bank.
"(4) Locking sensor amplifier operations" (Page 3-49)
Command:6000
Response
GT2-7∗ jam detection position: 5000→6000
DL-EP1Scanner
<Details of command>Service code: 10HClass ID: 67HInstance ID: 01HAttribute ID: 0399H(921)Service data: 6000
GT2-7∗
Command
Response
Preset execution by GT2-7∗
DL-EP1Scanner
<Details of command>Service code: 4BHClass ID: 67HInstance ID: 01HAttribute ID: 0301H(769)
GT2-7∗
Command
Response
Changes using thesensor amplifier keys are locked.
DL-EP1Scanner
<Details of command>Service code: 4CHClass ID: 67HInstance ID: 00HService data: 01H
GT2-7*
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
3-4 Message Communication
3-24
3
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
the G
T2 S
erie
s
(5) Reading the number of decimal places from a sensor amplifier
Message communication reads the number of decimal places of settings read
from the sensor amplifier.
"(5) Reading the number of decimal places in the parameter from a sensor
amplifier" (Page 3-51)
For the GT2 Series, if the current value is 12.53 mm, data is stored as
follows:
Data: 125300
Number of decimal places: 4
Perform calculation from the read data and the number of decimal places.
If message communication writes data to a sensor amplifier, issues anoperation command to the sensor amplifier, or locks sensor amplifieroperations, the sensor amplifier button operations are locked for about 10
seconds. "COM-Lock ( )" is displayed for about 2 seconds duringswitching to the locked state or when an attempt is made to operate alocked button. When button operation is unlocked, "COM-Unlock
( )" is displayed for about 2 seconds.
Command
Response
<Details of command>Service code: 4CHClass ID: 67HInstance ID: 01HAttribute ID: 0325H(805)
Reads the number of decimal places of the GT2-7∗ comparator value (P.V. value).
Reference
125300 12.5300 12.53mmNumber of decimal places 4 3 2 1
Point
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
3-4 Message Communication
3-25
3
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
the G
T2 S
erie
s
Message communication uses objects and services to send and receive data.
Executing a service (1) for a DL-EP1 object enables data read (2), parameter
change (3), specified operation execution (4), and read of the number of decimal
places (5), etc.
Taking DL Object as an example, one instance is provided for each of the sensor
amplifiers connected to the DL-EP1. Reading the attributes corresponding to the
comparator values (P.V. values) of the respective instances using a service makes it
possible to read the comparator values (P.V. values) of the sensor amplifiers
corresponding to the respective instances.
Objects and Services
Parameter change(3)
Operation command execution(4)
Read of the number of decimal places(5)
DL-EP1 or sensor amplifier connected to DL-EP1
Object(1)
(2)
Service
Data output
ID: 0324H Output
Attribute
ID: 0325H Current value (instantaneous flow rate)
ID: 0326H Raw value (R.V. value)
DL Object(Class ID: 67H)
DL-EP1Instance ID: 00H
ID number 1 sensorInstance ID: 01H
ID number 2 sensorInstance ID: 02H
:
:
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
3-4 Message Communication
3-26
3
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
the G
T2 S
erie
s
• In EtherNet/IP (CIP), the method called "object modeling" is used to
express a device. The device is handled as a group of objects. Objects
abstractly express the configuration elements in the device. A class is a
group of objects expressing the configuration elements of the same
type. An instance actually expresses a specific object contained in a
class. Each instance in the class has the same attribute group, but each
uses a unique attribute value.
• To execute a service for the DL-EP1, send a command from the scanner.
The DL-EP1 then returns the service execution results as a response. A
command requires a service, class ID (Class ID), instance ID (Instance
ID), and attribute ID (Attribute ID)*. When a parameter is written, the
command also requires a setting (service data).
* Some of the commands to be used may not require the above items.
"Basic Format and Processing Flow of Message Communication"
(Page 3-28)
Reference
Command Response
・Service
・Class ID
・Instance ID
・Attribute ID*
・Service data*
・General Status
・Additional Status*
・Service response data*
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
3-4 Message Communication
3-27
3
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
the G
T2 S
erie
s
The following describes the objects usable by the DL-EP1.
Objects Usable by DL-EP1
Command
Response
DLObject
MessageRouterObject
ConnectionManagerObject
AssemblyObject
IdentityObject
TCP/IPInterfaceObject
EthernetLink
Object
EtherNet/IP unit
Object Name Class ID Description ReferencePage
DL Object 67H
This object provides the statuses of the DL-EP1 and
the sensor amplifiers connected to the DL-EP1 and
writes and reads parameters. This object is unique to
the DL-EP1.
3-31
Identity Object 01HThis object provides identification information,
general information and a reset service, etc.9-22
Message Router
Object02H
This object provides connection points for message
communication.9-25
Assembly Object 04H
This object provides access to the devices via cyclic
communication. This object can be used to send data
to the devices that do not support cyclic
communication.
9-26
Connection
Manager Object06H
This object is used for connection-type
communication.9-28
TCP/IP Interface
ObjectF5H
This object provides the structure for setting the TCP/
IP network interface. You can set an IP address,
subnet mask and gateway, etc., in this object.
9-30
Ethernet Link Object F6H This object provides Ethernet status information. 9-34
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
3-4 Message Communication
3-28
3
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
the G
T2 S
erie
s
The EtherNet/IP scanner and the DL-EP1 exchange Explicit messages for
communication. The following provides a basic example of the command format of
Explicit messages to be sent and the response format returned from the DL-EP1 to
the scanner.
Commands
• Command format
*1 For details on usable services, refer to "DL Object (Class ID:67H)" (Page 3-
31) or "Objects Usable by DL-EP1" (Page 9-20).
Responses
• Response format
Basic Format and Processing Flow of Message Communication
Item Description
Service code*1 Designates the service code to be used (Service Code).
Class ID Designates a class ID (Class ID) tailored to the service*1 to be used.
Instance IDDesignates an instance ID (Instance ID) tailored to the service*1 to be
used.
Attribute IDDesignates an attribute ID (Attribute ID) tailored to the service*1 to be
used.
Service Data Designates service data (Service Data) tailored to the service*1 to be used.
Item Description
General statusReturns a general status in respect to the command (General Status). 00H
is returned when the command ends normally.
Additional status Returns the additional status (Additional Status).
Service response
data
Returns service response data Service Response Data) in respect to the
command.
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
3-4 Message Communication
3-29
3
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
the G
T2 S
erie
s
Command processing order and error response
Check whether each ID is within the supported range in the following order:
Supplement for object processing
• Get_Attribute_Single and Get_Attributes_All are executed, ignoring send service
data.
• The service (Get_Attributes_All, Reset) that does not designate an attribute ID is
executed, ignoring Attribute ID.
• If Set_Attribute_Single is designated for an attribute which cannot be written (Set),
"0EH" (Attribute not settable) is returned as the general status.
• If Set_Attribute_Single for the writable attribute is designated and the writing size
is less than the attribute size, the general status "13H" (Not enough data) is
returned. If the writing size is greater than the attribute size, the service is
executed, ignoring the excessive data.
Class ID check
Yes
No
Instance ID check
Yes
No
Service check
Yes
No
Attribute ID check
Executes supported service process
Yes
No
Path Destination Unknown (05H)returned as general status
Path Destination Unknown (05H)returned as general status
Service not Supported (08H)returned as general status
Attribute not Supported (14H)returned as general status
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
3-4 Message Communication
3-30
3
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
the G
T2 S
erie
s
Reading the attribute ID
Example) Excerpt from DL Object attribute ID
Data Type
The data type is defined in the EtherNet/IP specifications as follows:
Reading the DL Object Table
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
Instance ID
Attribute ID
Name Description Attribute Data Type
00H74H
(116)
Output
1
Stores the HIGH output (output 1) status of each
sensor amplifier. When HIGH is output, the bit
corresponding to the ID number of the sensor
amplifier is set to ON.
Bit 0 to bit 14: ID number 1 to ID number 15
Bit15: Reserved for system
R WORD
Item Description
(1) Instance ID Represents the instance ID in hexadecimal notation.
(2) Attribute ID Represents the attribute ID in hexadecimal (decimal) notation.
(3) Name Represents the attribute name.
(4) DescriptionDescribes the attribute and represents the data to be read and the range of
parameters that can be set.
(5) Attribute
Represents the direction of services for the attribute ID.
R (Read): The parameter read service (Get_Attribute_Single,
Get_Attributes_All) can be used to read the attribute value.
W (Write): The parameter write service (Set_Attribute_Single) can be used
to write the attribute value.
(6) Data type Represents the attribute data type.
Data Type DescriptionRange
Minimum Maximum
INT Signed 16-bit integer -32768 32767
UINT Unsigned 16-bit integer 0 65535
DINT Signed 32-bit integer -2147483648 2147483647
WORD Bit string: 16 bits - -
DWORD Bit string: 32 bits - -
STRING
Character string
(2-byte length information +
1-byte array per character)
- -
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
3-4 Message Communication
3-31
3
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
the G
T2 S
erie
s
The DL Object provides the DL-EP1 connection status and device write/read. This
object is unique to the DL-EP1.
Services
*1 This service cannot be used in the DL-EP1 (instance ID:00H).*2 This service cannot be used in the sensor amplifier (instance ID: 01H to 0FH)
connected to the DL-EP1.*3 In the DL-EP1 (instance ID: 00H), this service can be used as the attribute ID
90H to 9EH and A0H to AEH.
DL Object (Class ID:67H)
Service Code
Service Name Description
0EHParameter
read
Reads parameters from the DL-EP1 and the sensor amplifier
connected to the DL-EP1. For examples of using this service,
refer to "(1) Reading parameters from a sensor amplifier"
(Page 3-46).
10HParameter
write
Writes parameters to the DL-EP1 and the sensor amplifier
connected to the DL-EP1. For examples of using this service,
refer to "(2) Writing parameters to a sensor amplifier"
(Page 3-47).
4BH*1 Operation
command
Requests processing such as zero shift and tuning from the
sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1. The contents of
processing that can be requested differ per sensor amplifier.
Set the contents of processing with the attribute ID in the
object.
refer to "Attribute IDs supported by the instance service
4BH (operation command)" (Page 3-48). For examples of
using this service, refer to
"(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier"
(Page 3-48).
4CHBatch lock
setting*2
Collectively performs lock or unlock for all the connected
sensor amplifiers. Even if a lock setting that is not supported
by sensor amplifiers is designated, locks all the sensor
amplifiers without interrupting processing. Then, error code
09H is returned as a response.
Setting 0: Not lock
Setting 1: Full key lock
Setting 2: Key lock
"Lock setting" (Page 3-32)
For examples of using this service, refer to "(4) Locking
sensor amplifier operations" (Page 3-49).
* If a key is locked, message communication cannot switch
the bank.
4DH
Acquisition of the
number of decimal
places *3
Acquires the number of decimal places of the designated
parameter. For examples of using this service, refer to "(5)
Reading the number of decimal places in the parameter from
a sensor amplifier" (Page 3-51).
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
3-4 Message Communication
3-32
3
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
the G
T2 S
erie
s
• Lock setting
Responses
The responses made when each service is used are as follows:
(1) Parameter read: : Service code 0EH
(2) Parameter write: : Service code 10H
(3) Operation command: : Service code 4BH
(4) Batch lock setting: : Service code 4CH
(5) Read of number of decimal places: : Service code 4DH
Setting Description
0 Does not execute lock.
1Executes full key lock (inhibition of operations other than basic screen
display switching).
2Executes key lock (inhibition of operations other than basic screen display
switching and [RESET] button).
GeneralStatus
Command TypeDescription
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
00H Normal end
05H The instance ID is out of range.
08H - - -The designated instance ID does not support this service or
cannot be executed.
09H - - - - The written data is out of range.
0CH - - -
• Parameter write was executed for the function controlled
by cyclic communication.
• An attempt to execute the operation command has failed.
Check if the sensor amplifier can execute the operation
command.
0EH - - - -
• An attempt was made to write data to the attribute ID that
cannot be written or to the attribute ID that is in the
unwritable status.
• The written data is out of range.
10H - - - -
An attempt was made to read data from the attribute ID that
cannot be read or from the attribute ID that is in the
unreadable status.
13H - -The service data size is less than the defined size.
The defined data size is stored in the additional status.
14H - The attribute ID is out of range.
16H -The sensor amplifier corresponding to the designated
instance ID is not connected.
1FH
• This service is supported by the designated instance ID
but cannot be used by the designated attribute ID.
(Additional status: C350H)
• In the current mode, the designated setting cannot be
written into the parameter.
(Additional status: C351H)
• The DL-EP1 is now initializing communication. (Additional
status: C352H)
FEH System error. Contact your nearest KEYENCE office.
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
3-4 Message Communication
3-33
3
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
the G
T2 S
erie
s
Attributes
Instance ID
Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
00H
64H
(100)Status
Indicates the status of this unit and connected
sensor amplifier.
Bit 0: DL-EP1 Error Status
Bit 1 to bit 13: Reserved for system
Bit14: Warning Status
Bit15: Error Status
R WORD
65H
(101)
Sensor Error
Status
Indicates the error status of the connected
senosr amplifiers. If an error occurs, the bit of the
corresponding ID number of amplifier is turned
to ON.
Bit 0 to bit 14: ID number 1 to ID number 15
Bit15: Reserved for system
R WORD
66H
(102)
Warning
Status(Unassigned) R WORD
67H
(103)Reserved for system
68H
(104)
Current
Value 0
Property
Indicates the status of current value 0 of each
amplifier. If the current value 0 is “0ver Range",
“Under Range", or "Invalid", the bit
corresponding to the ID number is turned ON.
Bit 0 to bit 14: ID number 1 to ID number 15
Bit15: Reserved for system
R WORD
69H
(105)
Current
Value 1
Property
Indicates the status of current value 1 of each
amplifier. If the current value 1 is "0ver Range",
"Under Range", or "Invalid", the bit
corresponding to the ID number is turned ON.
Bit 0 to bit 14: ID number 1 to ID number 15
Bit15: Reserved for system
R WORD
6AH
(106) to
6BH
(107)
Reserved for system
6CH
(108)
Error ID
Number
Indicates the ID number of the unit having error.
Parameter range: 0 to 15 (initial value: 0)R UINT
6DH
(109)Error Code
Indicates the error code that is happening.
Parameter range: 0 to 65535 (initial value: 0)R UINT
6EH
(110)
Warning ID
Number(Unassigned) R UINT
6FH
(111)
Warning
Code(Unassigned) R UINT
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
3-4 Message Communication
3-34
3
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
the G
T2 S
erie
s
00H
70H
(112) to
73H
(115)
Reserved for system
74H
(116)
Output1
(HIGH)
Indicates the HIGH output (output 1) status of
each amplifier. When HIGH is output, the bit
corresponding to the ID number of the sensor
amplifier is turned ON.
Bit 0 to bit 14: ID number 1 to ID number 15
Bit15: Reserved for system
R WORD
75H
(117)
Output2
(LOW)
Indicates the LOW output (output 2) status of
each amplifier. When LOW is output, the bit
corresponding to the ID number of the sensor
amplifier is turned ON.
Bit 0 to bit 14: ID number 1 to ID number 15
Bit15: Reserved for system
R WORD
76H
(118)
Output3
(GO)
Indicates the GO output (output 3) status of each
amplifier. When GO is output, the bit
corresponding to the ID number of the sensor
amplifier is turned ON.
Bit 0 to bit 14: ID number 1 to ID number 15
Bit15: Reserved for system
R WORD
77H
(119)Output4*1
(HH)
Indicates the status of HH output (output 4) *1 of
each amplifier. When HH is output, the bit
corresponding to the ID number of the sensor
amplifier is turned ON.
Bit 0 to bit 14: ID number 1 to ID number 15
Bit15: Reserved for system
R WORD
78H
(120)Output5*1
(LL)
Indicates the status of LL output (output 5) *1 of
each amplifier. When LL is output, the bit
corresponding to the ID number of the sensor
amplifier is turned ON.
Bit 0 to bit 14: ID number 1 to ID number 15
Bit15: Reserved for system
R WORD
79H
(121) to
89H
(137)
Reserved for system
8AH
(138)
Current
Value 0
Invalid
When the current value 0 of each amplifier is
invalid, the bit of corresponding ID number is
turned ON.
Bit 0 to bit 14: ID number 1 to ID number 15
Bit15: Reserved for system
R WORD
8BH
(139)
Current
Value 0
Under Range
When the current value 0 of each amplifier is less
than the lower limit of the detection range, the bit
of the corresponding ID number is turned ON.
Bit 0 to bit 14: ID number 1 to ID number 15
Bit15: Reserved for system
R WORD
Instance ID
Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
3-4 Message Communication
3-35
3
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
the G
T2 S
erie
s
00H
8CH
(140)
Current
Value 0
Over Range
When the current value 0 of each amplifier is
higher than the upper limit of the detection range,
the bit of corresponding ID number is turned
ON.
Bit 0 to bit 14: ID number 1 to ID number 15
Bit15: Reserved for system
R WORD
8DH
(141)
Current
Value 1
Invalid
When the current value 1 of each amplifier is
invalid, the bit of the corresponding ID number is
turned ON.
Bit 0 to bit 14: ID number 1 to ID number 15
Bit15: Reserved for system
R WORD
8EH
(142)
Current
Value 1
Under Range
When the current value 1 of each amplifier is less
than the lower limit of the detection range, the bit
of the corresponding ID number is turned ON.
Bit 0 to bit 14: ID number 1 to ID number 15
Bit15: Reserved for system
R WORD
8FH
(143)
Current
Value 1 Over
Range
When the current value 1 of each amplifier is
higher than the upper limit of the detection
range, the bit of the corresponding ID number is
turned ON.
Bit 0 to bit 14: ID number 1 to ID number 15
Bit15: Reserved for system
R WORD
90H
(144)
Current
Value 0 (ID
Number 1)
Indicates the current value 0 of the sensor of ID
number 1.
Parameter range:
-2147483648 to 2147483647 (initial value: 0)
R DINT
91H
(145)
to 9DH
(157)
:
9EH
(158)
Current
Value 0 (ID
Number 15)
Indicates the current value 0 of the sensor ID
number 15.
Parameter range:
-2147483648 to 2147483647 (initial value: 0)
R DINT
9FH
(159)Reserved for system
A0H
(160)
Current
Value 1 (ID
Number 1)
Indicates the current value 1 of the sensor ID
number 1.
Parameter range:
-2147483648 to 2147483647 (initial value: 0)
R DINT
A1H
(161) to
ADH
(173)
:
AEH
(174)
Current
Value 1 (ID
Number 15)
Indicates the current value 1 of the sensor ID
number 15.
Parameter range:
-2147483648 to 2147483647 (initial value: 0)
R DINT
AFH
(175)Reserved for system
Instance ID
Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
3-4 Message Communication
3-36
3
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
the G
T2 S
erie
s
*1 If the sensor amplifier is GT2-71MC*, there is no assigned output.
*2 This attribute cannot be used in the GT2-100 Series. The initial value of the
effective ID is read irrespective of the effective ID setting.
For details on current value 0 and current value 1, refer to "Current
Value 0/Current Value 1" (Page 3-12).
00H
B0H
(176)
Sensor
Status Mask
Setting
Set up the condition to determine if the sensor
error or warning is a recoverable DL-EP1 error
(MS LED blinks in red). If mask is selected, MS
LED does not blink in red when a sensor error or
warning occurs.
Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)
0: Not mask
1: Mask
R/W UINT
B1H
(177)
Sensor
Connected
Number*2
Indicates the number of connected sensor
amplifiers.
Parameter range: 0 to 15 (initial value: 0)
R UINT
B2H
(178) to
C7H
(199)
Reserved for system
0300H
(768)
Error Code
(ID number
00)
Indicates the error code of ID number 0.
Parameter range: 0 to 65535 (initial value: 0)R UINT
0301H
(769) to
030EH
(782)
:
030FH
(783)
Error Code
(ID number
15)
Indicates the error code of ID number 15.
Parameter range: 0 to 65535 (initial value: 0)R UINT
0310H
(784) to
04FFH
(1279)
Reserved for system
Instance ID
Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
Reference
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
3-4 Message Communication
3-37
3
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
the G
T2 S
erie
s
Attributes for GT2 Series (Common to all GT2 Series)
Designate the ID number (01H to 0FH) of a sensor amplifier as the instance ID.
Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
Group1
0320H
(800)
Group1
Entry count
Indicates the number of items (entries) that can
be set in Group 1.
Parameter range: 9
R DINT
0321H
(801)
Sensor
amplifier
error state
Indicates the error status of the sensor amplifier.
bit0: Overcurrent error (ErC)
bit1: Head error (ErH)
bit2: EEPROM error (ErE)
bit3: Jam check error (Er.chK)
bit4: Self-timing delay (Er.dLY)
bit5: Number-of-units error (Er.Unit)
bit6: Calculation error(Er.CAL)
bit7: Calculation-only mode error (Er.noH)
R DWORD
0322H
(802) to
0323H
(803)
Reserved for system
0324H
(804)
Control
output
Indicates the control output status.
Parameter range: 00H to 1FH (initial value: 00H)
bit0: HIGH output
bit1: LOW output
bit2: GO output
bit3: HH output*1
bit4: LL output*1
R DWORD
0325H
(805)
Comparator
value (P.V.
Value)*2, *3, *4
Indicates the comparator value (P.V. value).
Parameter range:
-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 0.0000)
R DINT
0326H
(806)
Raw value
(R.V. Value)*2, *4, *5
Indicates the raw value (R.V. value).
Parameter range:
-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 0.0000)
R DINT
0327H
(807)
Peak value
during
sampling *2 , *3, *4, *6
Indicates the peak-hold value in peak-to-peak
mode.
Parameter range:
-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 0.0000)
R DINT
0328H
(808)
Bottom value
during
sampling*2, *3, *4, *6
Indicates the bottom-hold value in peak-to-peak
mode.
Parameter range:
-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 0.0000)
R DINT
0329H
(809)
Calculation
display
value*2, *4, *7
Indicates the calculation display value.
Parameter range:
-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 0.0000)
R DINT
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
3-4 Message Communication
3-38
3
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
the G
T2 S
erie
s
Group2
032AH
(810) to
033FH
(831)
Reserved for system
0340H
(832)
Group2 Entry
count
Indicates the number of items (entries) that can be
set in Group 2.
Parameter range: 20
R DINT
0341H
(833)
Bank 0 HIGH
setting
Indicates the bank 0 HIGH setting.
Parameter range:
-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 5.0000)
R/W DINT
0342H
(834)
Bank 0 LOW
setting
Indicates the bank 0 LOW setting.
Parameter range:
-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 1.0000)
R/W DINT
0343H
(835)
Bank 0
preset value
Indicates the bank 0 preset value.
Parameter range:
-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 0.0000)
R/W DINT
0344H
(836)
Bank 0 HH
setting*1
Indicates the bank 0 HH setting.
Parameter range:
-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 7.0000)
R/W DINT
0345H
(837)
Bank 0 LL
setting*1
Indicates the bank 0 LL setting.
Parameter range:
-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 1.0000)
R/W DINT
0346H
(838)
Bank 1 HIGH
setting
Indicates the bank 1 HIGH setting.
Parameter range:
-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 5.0000)
R/W DINT
0347H
(839)
Bank 1 LOW
setting
Indicates the bank 1 LOW setting.
Parameter range:
-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 1.0000)
R/W DINT
0348H
(840)
Bank 1
preset value
Indicates the bank 1 preset value.
Parameter range:
-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 0.0000)
R/W DINT
0349H
(841)
Bank 1 HH
setting*1
Indicates the bank 1 HH setting.
Parameter range:
-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 7.0000)
R/W DINT
034AH
(842)
Bank 1 LL
setting*1
Indicates the bank 1 LL setting.
Parameter range:
-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 1.0000)
R/W DINT
034BH
(843)
Bank 2 HIGH
setting
Indicates the bank 2 HIGH setting.
Parameter range:
-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 5.0000)
R/W DINT
034CH
(844)
Bank 2 LOW
setting
Indicates the bank 2 LOW setting.
Parameter range:
-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 1.0000)
R/W DINT
034DH
(845)
Bank 2
preset value
Indicates the bank 2 preset value.
Parameter range:
-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 0.0000)
R/W DINT
Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
3-4 Message Communication
3-39
3
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
the G
T2 S
erie
s
Group2
034EH
(846)
Bank 2 HH
setting*1
Indicates the bank 2 HH setting.
Parameter range:
-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 7.0000)
R/W DINT
034FH
(847)
Bank 2 LL
setting*1
Indicates the bank 2 LL setting.
Parameter range:
-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 1.0000)
R/W DINT
0350H
(848)
Bank 3 HIGH
setting
Indicates the bank 3 HIGH setting.
Parameter range:
-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 5.0000)
R/W DINT
0351H
(849)
Bank 3 LOW
setting
Indicates the bank 3 LOW setting.
Parameter range:
-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 1.0000)
R/W DINT
0352H
(850)
Bank 3
preset value
Indicates the bank 3 preset value.
Parameter range:
-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 0.0000)
R/W DINT
0353H
(851)
Bank 3 HH
setting*1
Indicates the bank 3 HH setting.
Parameter range:
-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 7.0000)
R/W DINT
0354H
(852)
Bank 3 LL
setting*1
Indicates the bank 3 LL setting.
Parameter range:
-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 1.0000)
R/W DINT
0355H
(853) to
035FH
(863)
Reserved for system
Group3
0360H
(864)
Group3 Entry
count
Indicates the number of items
(number of entries) that can be set in Group 3.
Parameter range: 7
R DINT
0361H
(865) Key lock*8
Sets key lock. "Lock setting" (Page 3-32)
Parameter range: 0 to 2 (initial value: 0)
0: Unlock
1: Full key lock
2: Key lock
R/W DINT
0362H
(866)
Bank
switching
State*9
Indicates the bank switching.
Parameter range: 0 to 3 (initial value: 0)R/W DINT
0363H
(867)
Timing
status*10
Indicates the timing status.
Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)
For R (read)
0: The timing input is OFF or measurement is in
progress in self-timing mode.
1: The timing input is ON or measurement is
not in progress in self-timing mode.
For W (write)
0: Change was made during measurement.
1: Change was made during non-
measurement.
R/W DINT
Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
3-4 Message Communication
3-40
3
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
the G
T2 S
erie
s
Group3
0364H
(868) to
0366H
(870)
Reserved for system
0367H
(871)
Bar display
mode*11
Indicates bar display mode.
Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)
0: Bar display mode *11
1: OK/NG display mode
R/W DINT
0368H
(872) to
037FH
(895)
Reserved for system
Group4
0380H
(896)
Group4 Entry
count
Indicates the number of items (entries) that can
be set in Group 4.
Parameter range: 29
R DINT
0381H
(897)
Calculation
mode and
Setting*12, *19
Indicates calculation mode/calculation setting.
Parameter range: 0 to 27 (initial value: 0)
Tenth place (calculation mode)
0: Does not use the calculation function.
1: Uses the calculation function.
2: Calculation-only mode
Unit digit (calculation setting)
0: Maximum value
1: Minimum value
2: Flatness
3: Average
4: Reference difference
5: Twist
6: Warpage
7: Thickness
(If the calculation function is not used, the
values written into the calculation setting are
invalid.)
R/W DINT
0382H
(898)
Detection
mode
Indicates detection mode.
Parameter range: 0 to 4 (initial value: 0)
0: Standard
1: NG hold
2: Peak hold
3: Bottom hold
4: Peak-to-peak
R/W DINT
0383H
(899)
Hold update
method
Indicates the hold update method.
Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)
0: Timing
1: Regular update
R/W DINT
Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
3-4 Message Communication
3-41
3
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
the G
T2 S
erie
s
Group4
0384H
(900)
Response
time*13
Indicates the response time.
Parameter range: 0 to 5 (initial value: 3)
0: hSP (3.0)
1: 5 ms
2: 10 ms
3: 100 ms
4: 500 ms
5: 1000 ms
R/W DINT
0385H
(901)
Timing
type*14
Indicates the timing type.
Parameter range: 0 to 2 (initial value: 0)
0: External timing input
1: Rising edge self-timing
2: Falling edge self-timing
R/W DINT
0386H
(902)
Self-timing
level
Indicates the self timing level.
Parameter range: 199.9999
-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 0.5000)
R/W DINT
0387H
(903)
Self-timing
delay type
Indicates the self-timing delay type.
Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)
0: Static hold
1: Delay timer
R/W DINT
0388H
(904)
User-
specified
delay time
Indicates the user-specified delay time.
Parameter range: 0 to 9999
(initial value: 1000)
R/W DINT
0389H
(905)
Static hold
determination
Indicates the static hold delay stable
determination.
Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)
0: Default
1: User
R/W DINT
038AH
(906)
Static hold
stable range
Indicates the static hold delay stable range.
Parameter range: 0.0000 to 199.9999
(initial value: 0.0100)
R/W DINT
038BH
(907)
Measurement
direction
Indicates the measurement increase/decrease
direction.
Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)
0: Normal
1: Reversed
R/W DINT
038CH
(908)Multiplier
Indicates the multiplier.
Parameter range: 0.1 to 100.0
(Initial value: 1.0)
R/W DINT
038DH
(909)Output mode
Indicates output mode.
Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)
0: N.O.
1: N.C.
R/W DINT
038EH
(910)
Display
resolution
Indicates the display resolution.
Parameter range: 0 to 3 (initial value: 0)
0: 0.0001
1: 0.001
2: 0.01
3: ___0.1
R/W DINT
Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
3-4 Message Communication
3-42
3
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
the G
T2 S
erie
s
Group4
038FH
(911)Hysteresis
Indicates the hysteresis.
Parameter range: 0.0000 to 199.9999
(Initial value: 0.0030)
R/W DINT
0390H
(912)
Simultaneous
input
setting*12
Indicates the simultaneous input setting.
Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)
0: Individual input
1: Simultaneous input
R/W DINT
0391H
(913)
Special output
setting*1, *15
Indicates the special output setting.
Parameter range: 0 to 5 (initial value: 0)
0: Not used
1: 5-output
2: Limit output
3: Limit output user setting
4: All GO
5: All limit output
R/W DINT
0392H
(914)
Limit output
HH position*1
Indicates the limit output HH position.
Parameter range:
-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 0.5000)
R/W DINT
0393H
(915)
Limit output
LL position*1
Indicates the limit output LL position.
Parameter range:
-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 0.5000)
R/W DINT
0394H
(916)
Select preset
data
Indicates the select preset data.
Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)
0: R.V. value
1: P.V. value
R/W DINT
0395H
(917)
Preset
memory
Indicates the preset memory.
Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)
0: YES
1: NO
R/W DINT
0396H
(918)Preset point
Indicates the preset point.
Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)
0: Common to all banks
1: Save for each bank
R/W DINT
0397H
(919)
Power-saving
function
(ECO)
Indicates the power-saving function (ECO).
Parameter range: 0 to 2 (initial value: 0)
0: OFF
1: HALF
2: ALL
R/W DINT
0398H
(920)
Jam
detection
function
Indicates the jam detection function.
Parameter range: 0 to 2 (initial value: 0)
0: OFF
1: ON
2: USER
R/W DINT
0399H
(921)
Jam
detection
position
Indicates the jam detection position.
Parameter range:
-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 0.5000)
R/W DINT
Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
3-4 Message Communication
3-43
3
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
the G
T2 S
erie
s
Group4
039AH
(922)
Batch
setting*16
Indicates the batch setting.
Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)
0: Individual
1: Batch
R/W DINT
039BH
(923)
Analog
Range
setting*17
Indicates the analog range setting.
Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)
0: Default
1: Free range setting
R/W DINT
039CH
(924)
Free range
setting
(Hi)*17
Indicates the free range setting (Hi).
Parameter range:
-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 12.0000)
R/W DINT
039DH
(925)
Free range
setting
(Lo)*17
Indicates the free range setting (Lo).
Parameter range:
-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 0.0000)
R/W DINT
039EH
(926) to
039FH
(927)
Reserved for system
Group5
03A0H
(928)
Group5
Entry count
Indicates the number of items
(number of entries) that can be set in Group 5.
Parameter range: 15
R DINT
03A1H
(929)
R.V. (base of
calc.) ID1*4, *18
Indicates the R.V. value of main unit (ID number
1) on which the calculation result was based.
Parameter range:
-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 0.0000)
R DINT
03A2H
(930) to
03AEH
(942)
:
03AFH
(943)
R.V. (base of
calc.) ID15*4, *18
Indicates the R.V. value of expansion unit (ID
number 15) on which the calculation result was
based.
Parameter range:
-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 0.0000)
R DINT
03B0H
(944) to
03BFH
(959)
Reserved for system
Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
3-4 Message Communication
3-44
3
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
the G
T2 S
erie
s
*1 When GT2-71MC* is used, these cannot be read and written.
*2 Use these in combination with the comparator value property (Current Value n
Over Range, Current Value n Under Range, Current Value n Invalid).
*3 If the calculation function is used and the calculation setting is other than
standard difference display, a read error occurs in the expansion unit.
*4 If this value is Current Value Over Range, 999.9999 is stored.
If this value is Current Value Under Range, -999.9999 is stored.
If this value is Current Value Invalid, -999.9998 is stored.
If this value is Error, 1000.0000 is stored.
*5 For calculation-only mode, a read error occurs in the main unit.
Group6
03C0H
(960)
Group6
Entry count
Indicates the number of items (entries) that can
be set in Group 6.
Parameter range: 11
R DINT
03C1H
(961)Product code
Indicates the product code.
Parameter range:
GT2-7*(main unit) : 4006
GT2-7*(expansion unit) : 4007
GT2-71MC* : 4008
GT2-100*(main unit) : 4010
GT2-100*(expansion unit) : 4011
R DINT
03C2H
(962)Revision
Indicates the revision.
Parameter range: 0101H to FFFFHR DINT
03C3H
(963) to
03C7H
(967)
Reserved for system
03C8H
(968)
Product
name
Indicates the product name.
Parameter range:
GT2-7*(main unit) : "GT2-71*/75*"
GT2-7*(expansion unit) : "GT2-72*/76*"
GT2-71MC* : "GT2-71MC*"
GT2-100*(main unit) : "GT2-100*"
GT2-100*(expansion unit) : "GT2-100*"
R STRING
03C9H
(969) to
03D6H
(982)
Reserved for system
03D7H
(983)Series code
Indicates the series code.
Parameter range:
GT2-7*(main unit) : 4006
GT2-7*(expansion unit) : 4007
GT2-71MC* : 4008
GT2-100*(main unit) : 4010
GT2-100*(expansion unit) : 4011
R DINT
03D8H
(984)Series version
Indicates the series version.
Parameter range: 1R DINT
03D9H
(985)Device type
Indicates the device type.
Parameter range: 0R DINT
03DAH
(986) to
03DFH
(991)
Reserved for system
Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
3-4 Message Communication
3-45
3
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
the G
T2 S
erie
s
*6 If the sensor amplifier detection mode is other than peak-to-peak mode, a read
error occurs.
Using this for discriminating the outer diameter of a cylinder makes it possible
to read the peak and bottom values during the measurement period.
*7 If the calculation function is not used, a read error occurs. If this value is other
than standard difference display, a read error occurs in the expansion unit. If
this value is standard difference display, a read error occurs in the main unit.
*8 If the key lock function is being used in the main unit when simultaneous input
is set, a write error occurs in the expansion unit. If GT2-100* is being used, a
write error occurs in other than ID01 (main unit).
*9 If the key lock function is being used, a write error occurs.
*10 If self-timing is selected, a write error occurs. If simultaneous input is set, a
write error occurs in the main unit. If a connection is established with the
Assembly instance 65H(101) during cyclic communication, a write error
occurs.
*11 If the GT2-100* is being used, a write error occurs in other than ID01 (main
unit).
*12 Read and write are enabled only for the main unit (ID01)
*13 If calculation is performed, the expansion unit operates for the response time
set in the main unit.
*14 The main unit for which peak-to-peak mode, NG hold mode, or calculation-only
mode is set operates according to the external timing without reference to the
timing type setting.
*15 If an unselectable setting is set, a write error occurs. Unselectable settings are
saved in EEPROM but not reflected in operation.
*16 If the GT2-100* is used, read and write are enabled only for ID01 (main unit).
If other than the GT2-100* is used, a read error occurs during reading and a
write error occurs during writing.
*17 If other than the GT2-71* is used, a read error occurs during reading and a
write error occurs during writing.
*18 If the calculation function is not used, a read error occurs.
If a standard difference display is set for the main unit, a read error occurs. If a
standard difference display is set for the expansion unit, a read error occurs in
parameters for units other than the main unit (ID01) and the local unit. If other
than the standard difference display is set for the expansion unit, a read error
occurs.
If detection mode is peak-to-peak mode, a read error occurs.
*19 If the calculation mode and calculation setting that cannot be set within the
current number of connected sensor amplifiers are written, a write error occurs.
If the calculation function is used, the sensor amplifiers can hold only the
calculated P.V. values. Reading this attribute ID makes it possible to read
the R.V. values of each sensor amplifier on which the held calculation
results were based. Therefore, the R.V. values of each sensor amplifiers
on which the held calculation results were based can be read without
being affected by communication response delay.
Reference
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
3-4 Message Communication
3-46
3
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
the G
T2 S
erie
s
The following describes how to perform message communication with a DL Object.
(1) Reading parameters from a sensor amplifier
(2) Writing parameters to a sensor amplifier
(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier
(4) Locking sensor amplifier operations
(5) Reading the number of decimal places from a sensor amplifier
(1) Reading parameters from a sensor amplifier
Message communication reads each parameter from the DL-EP1 and the sensor
amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.
Service code 0EH is used.
The following settings are required to use this object.
• Service Code
• Class ID
• Instance ID
• Attribute ID
• Commands
• Responses (when successful)
Using DL Object
Item Description Data Example
Service CodeDesignates "Parameter read (0EH)" (fixed
value).0EH
Class ID Designates DL Object(67H) (fixed value). 67H
Instance ID Designates the ID number. 0AH
Attribute IDDesignates the attribute ID to be read from
"Attribute".0324H(804)
Service Data There is no service data. -
Item Description Data Example
General status
A status (00H) is returned that indicates
normal completion of message
communication.
00H
Service response
data
The settings of the read parameter are
returned.0000H
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
3-4 Message Communication
3-47
3
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
the G
T2 S
erie
s
• Responses (when unsuccessful)
For details on the attribute ID, settings, general status, and additional status of each
parameter, refer to "DL Object (Class ID:67H)" (Page 3-31) and "Attributes"
(Page 3-33).
(2) Writing parameters to a sensor amplifier
Message communication writes parameters to the DL-EP1 and the sensor amplifierconnected to the DL-EP1.Service code 10H is used.The following settings are required to use this object.• Service Code• Class ID• Instance ID• Attribute ID• Service Data
• Commands
• Responses (when successful)
Item Description Data Example
General status A general status for the service is returned 16H
Additional status An additional status is returned. -
Service response
dataThere is no service response data. -
Item Description Data Example
Service CodeDesignates "Parameter write (10H)" (fixed value).
10H
Class ID Designates DL Object(67H) (fixed value). 67H
Instance ID Designates the ID number. 05H
Attribute IDDesignates the attribute ID to be written from "Attribute".
0347H(839)
Service Data Writes the setting. 0064H
Item Description Data Example
General status
A status (00H) is returned that indicates normal completion of message communication. (The written parameters are reflected in the sensor amplifier at the status (00H) return timing.)
00H
Service response data
There is no service response data. -
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
3-4 Message Communication
3-48
3
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
the G
T2 S
erie
s
• Responses (when unsuccessful)
For details on the attribute ID, settings, general status, and additional status of eachparameter, refer to "DL Object (Class ID:67H)" (Page 3-31) and "Attributes"(Page 3-33).
(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier
Message communication issues operation commands such as error clear to the
sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.
Service code 4BH is used.
The following settings are required to use this object.
• Service Code
• Class ID
• Instance ID
• Attribute ID
• Attribute IDs supported by the instance service 4BH (operation command)
The contents of processing performed by the instance service 4BH (operation
command) depend on the attribute ID to be selected.
The table below details the attribute IDs that can be selected.
• Commands
Item Description Data Example
General status A general status for the service is returned 0EH
Additional status An additional status is returned. -
Service response data
There is no service response data. -
Name Description Attribute ID
Perform preset request Executes preset. 0301H(769)
Perform preset reset request Executes preset reset. 0302H(770)
Reset request Executes reset. 0303H(771)
Error clear request Executes error clear. 0304H(772)
Initial reset request Resets the value to the initial value. 0305H(773)
Item Description Data Example
Service CodeDesignates the "operation command (4BH)"
(fixed value).4BH
Class ID Designates DL Object (67H)(fixed value). 67H
Instance IDDesignates the ID number. The ID number
(00H) of the DL-EP1 cannot be designated.08H
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
3-4 Message Communication
3-49
3
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
the G
T2 S
erie
s
• Responses (when successful)
• Responses (when unsuccessful)
For details on the attribute ID, settings, general status, and additional status of each
parameter, refer to "DL Object (Class ID:67H)" (Page 3-31) and "Attributes"
(Page 3-33).
(4) Locking sensor amplifier operations
Message communication executes batch key lock for the sensor amplifier connected
to the DL-EP1.
Service code 4CH is used.
The following settings are required to use this object.
• Service Code
• Class ID
• Instance ID
• Attribute ID
• Service Data
Attribute ID
Designates the attribute ID to be designated
from "Attribute". "(3) Issuing operation
commands to a sensor amplifier" "Attribute
IDs supported by the instance service 4BH
(operation command)" (Page 3-48)
0301H(769)
Service Data There is no service response data. -
Item Description Data Example
General status
A status (00H) is returned that indicates
normal completion of message
communication.
00H
Service response
dataThere is no service response data. -
Item Description Data Example
General status A general status for the service is returned 08H
Additional status An additional status is returned. -
Service response
dataThere is no service response data. -
Item Description Data Example
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
3-4 Message Communication
3-50
3
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
the G
T2 S
erie
s
• Commands
• Responses (when successful)
• Responses (when unsuccessful)
• If a sensor amplifier that does not support key lock is connected to theDL-EP1, the error code 09H is returned (the settings of the sensoramplifier are not changed).
• If the device is key locked, message communication cannot switch thebank.
Item Description Data Example
Service CodeDesignates the "batch lock setting (4CH)"
(fixed value).4CH
Class ID Designates DL Object (67H)(fixed value). 67H
Instance IDDesignates ID number 0 (00H) for issuing a
command to the DL-EP1 (fixed value).00H
Attribute ID There is no data. -
Service Data Designates the batch lock setting. 0001H
Item Description Data Example
General statusMessage communication has ended
normally.00H
Service response
dataThere is no service response data. -
Item Description Data Example
General status A general status for the service is returned 08H
Additional status An additional status is returned. -
Service response
dataThere is no service response data. -
Point
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
3-4 Message Communication
3-51
3
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
the G
T2 S
erie
s
(5) Reading the number of decimal places in the parameter from a sensor
amplifier
Message communication reads the number of decimal places in the parameter from
the sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.
Service code 4DH is used.
The following settings are required to use this object.
• Service Code
• Class ID
• Instance ID
• Attribute ID
• Commands
• Responses (when successful)
• Responses (when unsuccessful)
For details on the attribute ID, settings, general status, and additional status of each
parameter, refer to "DL Object (Class ID:67H)" (Page 3-31) and "Attributes"
(Page 3-33).
Item Description Data Example
Service Code Designates parameter read (fixed value). 4DH
Class ID Designates DL Object (67H)(fixed value). 67H
Instance ID Designates the ID number. 01H
Attribute IDDesignates the attribute ID to be read from
"Attribute".
03A1H
(929)
Service Data There is no service data. -
Item Description Data Example
General statusMessage communication has ended
normally.00H
Service response
dataThe read decimal point position is returned. 04H
Item Description Data Example
General status A general status for the service is returned 14H
Additional status An additional status is returned. -
Service response
dataThere is no service response data. -
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -3-52
MEMO
3
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
the G
T2 S
erie
s
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 4-1
4Communicating with
GT-70A Series
This chapter describes the configuration of memory that
communicates with the EtherNet/IP compatible network unit
and a communication timing chart.
4-1 What is EtherNet/IP?.......................................... 4-2
4-2 DL-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication Function ... 4-3
4-3 Cyclic communication......................................... 4-5
4-4 Message Communication................................. 4-21
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -4-2
4
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
GT-7
0A
Serie
s
4-1 What is EtherNet/IP?
EtherNet/IP is an industrial communication network with open specifications. The
specifications are managed by ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendor Association, Inc.).
Industrial protocol has been combined with the Ethernet and standardized as Ether-
Net/IP (Industrial Protocol).
Communication is realized by combining the protocols known as Common Industrial
Protocol (CIP) with TCP/IP and Ethernet. This allows regular Ethernet to be used
together with the network.
Before starting EtherNet/IP communication, one of the devices must open a
communication line called a "connection" with the other device. The side which
opens the connection is called the "scanner", and the side to be opened is called the
"adaptor". (The DL-EP1 is an adaptor.)
EtherNet/IP includes cyclic communication (Implicit messaging) which sends and
receives data periodically. Message communication (Explicit messaging) which
sends and receives commands and responses at a time specified by the user.
Cyclic communication enables you to set RPI (Requested Packet Interval) according
to the priority of the data to be exchanged, allowing the entire communication load to
be adjusted for data exchange.
Message communication enables you to exchange the required commands and
responses at the required timing. Message communication is used for applications
which do not require the punctuality of cyclic communication, such as reading and
writing adaptor settings.
What is EtherNet/IP?
Scanner
Adaptor Adaptor Adaptor
High speed(Communication cycle: 10 ms)
Regular speed(Communication cycle: 100 ms)
Low speed (Communication cycle: 1000 ms)
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 4-3
4
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
GT-7
0A
Serie
s
4-2 DL-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication Function
This section describes the EtherNet/IP functions supported by the DL-EP1.
The DL-EP1 functions as an EtherNet/IP adaptor, and supports both cyclic and
message EtherNet/IP communications.
The EtherNet/IP scanner can use the following functions:
Output
Comparator Value
・・・・・・Error information
External input
Setting value
Output
Comparator Value
・・・・・・Error information
External input
Setting value
IN area
OUT area
Output
Current value
Error information
External input
EtherNet/IP scanner DL-EP1
Sensor amplifier
Message communication
Output
Comparator Value
・・・・・・Error information
IN area
OUT areaDirect read/write of various parameters
Cyclic communicationExternal input
Setting value
Cyclic communication
Overview of Communication Methods
Function of sensor amplifier
Communication Methods
Cyclic communication(Page 4-5)
Message Communication(Page 4-21)
Read status
Read output
Read current value
Execute external input
Change bank number
X
Rewrite setting value
Motion command
Read current value, setting,
and status
Read number of decimal
places
Rewrite setting value
Lock all
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -4-4
4-2 DL-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication Function
4
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
GT-7
0A
Serie
s
Cyclic communication
This function sends and receives data between the scanner and DL-EP1 at the set
RPI (Requested Packet Interval). The function can exchange data such as the
sensor amplifier's output signals and comparator values and error status without
ladder programs.
Configurations such as RPI and data size for cyclic communication are seton the scanner side.In a network which has many connected devices, including EtherNet/IPdevices, a delay or packet loss could occur if a large load is constantly ortemporarily applied on the network. Verify the settings carefully beforeoperation.
Message communication
Message communication can be used for applications which do not require a
punctuality like cyclic communication.
In message communication, various parameters, including data which can be
exchanged with cyclic communication, can be read and written. Functions specific
to sensors such as the sensor amplifier preset function can also be executed.
PLC EtherNet/IP scanner
RPI=3 (ms)* RPI=0.5 (ms)*
RPI=5 (ms)*
RPI=10 (ms)*
Various EtherNet/IP adaptors
Ethernet
* RPI (Requested Packet Interval) can be set individually for each connection.
Point
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 4-5
4
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
GT-7
0A
Serie
s
4-3 Cyclic communication
This section describes the cyclic communication functions and how to use them.
What is cyclic communication?
Cyclic communication is a function that exchanges data with the EtherNet/IP device
in a cyclic manner (at a set cycle).
In cyclic communication, data can be exchanged when one device successfully
opens a logical communication line called a "connection" with the other device.
The side which opens the connection is called the scanner, and the side to be
opened is called the adaptor. (The DL-EP1 is an adaptor.)
Cyclic communication is started in the following procedures:
(1) The scanner requests the adaptor to open the connection.
(2) The adapter side checks compatibility.
(3) If no error occurs as a result the compatibility check, the adapter opens the
connection.
(* If an error is found during the compatibility check, the adapter does not open
the connection.)
"Checking the Device Compatibility" (Page 4-20)
Data is exchanged between the EtherNet/IP scanner, DL-EP1 and each sensor
amplifier as follows:
To carry out EtherNet/IP communication with a scanner which does not
support cyclic communication (Allen-Bradley SLC5/05 Series, etc.), use
"Message Communication" (Page 4-21).
(1) Request connection open
(3) Open connection
(2) Check compatibility
Output data
Data reflected in thescanner
Input data
The data output from thescanner is stored by theDL-EP1.
EtherNet/IP scanner DL-EP1 Sensor amplifier
IN area
OUT area
Cyclic communication
Data betweensensors isrefreshed
Cyclic communication
Data betweensensors isrefreshed
Reference
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -4-6
4-3 Cyclic communication
4
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
GT-7
0A
Serie
s
The following settings are required to execute cyclic communication with the DL-
EP1.
[DL-EP1]
The DL-EP1 does not require any setting.
[Scanner]
(1) Set the connection to be used.
(2) Set the devices used in cyclic communication.
Refer to the scanner manual for details on how to make the above settings.
(* No ladder program is required when cyclic communication is used.)
Cyclic communication can use the following functions:
(1) Read status
(2) Read output (Page 4-17)
Outputs that can be read: HIGH output, LOW output, GO output
(3) Read P.V. value (Page 4-18)
(4) Execute external input (Page 4-19)
Inputs that can be used: PRESET, TIMING, RESET
Configuring Cyclic Communication
Actions which can be completed with Cyclic Communication
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
4-3 Cyclic communication
4-7
4
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
GT-7
0A
Serie
s
EtherNet/IP requires that a connection must be opened from the scanner when cyclic
communication is started. There are various types of connections, and the type
usable by each device is defined in the EDS file.
The DL-EP1 can use the following connections:
• Each connection's trigger timing is executed cyclically. The connection
type supports both point-to-point and multicast.
• The details of each application type are as follows:
Exclusive Owner:This connection allows simultaneous setting of both data
transmission from the scanner to the DL-EP1 and data
transmission from the DL-EP1 to the scanner. This setting is
made not only when the scanner monitors the adaptor (DL-EP1)
data, but also when it issues external inputs and rewrites the
settings, etc. Multiple "Exclusive Owner" connections cannot be
opened to one adaptor (DL-EP1).
Input Only:This connection allows only data transmission from the DL-EP1
to the scanner. This setting is made when the scanner only
monitors adaptor (DL-EP1) data. Multiple scanners can open an
"Input Only" connection simultaneously to one adaptor (DL-
EP1).
(* To simultaneously open connections from multiple scanners,
set the Connection Type to Multicast.
Usable Connections
NoConnection
NameInput/Output
Assembly Instance
Size(Byte)
RPI Range (in 0.5 ms)
Application Type
1
Monitor Data
And External
Input
DL-EP1 to
scanner64H (100) 168
0.5 ms to
10000 ms
Exclusive
OwnerScanner to
DL-EP165H (101) 10
2Monitor Data
(Input Only)
DL-EP1 to
scanner64H (100) 168
0.5 ms to
10000 msInput Only
Scanner to
DL-EP1FEH (254) 0
Reference
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -4-8
4-3 Cyclic communication
4
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
GT-7
0A
Serie
s
The data from the DL-EP1 is assigned to the EtherNet/IP scanner's IN area.
The data such as 16-bit data extending over multiple bytes is stored into
an area which starts with an even address in order from the lowest-order
byte.
Example)
Assignment to IN Area (DL-EP1 to Scanner)
DL-EP1 data
Scanner IN area
Address 0Address 1
Address 167
Monitor Data(Assembly Instance: 100)
1-byte (8-bit) data
Reference
16-bit dataAddress 40 to 41
16-bit dataAddress 42 to 43
12H 34H
56H 78H
High-order byte Low-order byte
High-order byte Low-order byte
56H43
78H42
12H41
34H40
32-bit dataAddress 48 to 51
12H51
34H50
56H49
78H48
12H 34H 56H 78H
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
4-3 Cyclic communication
4-9
4
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
GT-7
0A
Serie
s
Monitor Data (84 Words (168 Bytes)) Assembly Instance (Instance ID): 64H
This is the device map for the monitor data to be assigned to the IN area.
For details on each parameter, refer to "Parameter List" (Page 4-11).
For details on current value 0 and current value 1, refer to "Current Value 0/
Current Value 1" (Page 4-12).
Name Address(Byte) bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
Status
0 Reserved for systemDL-EP1
Error Status
1 Error StatusWarningStatus
Reserved for system
SensorError
Status
2 ID08 . . . . . ID01
3Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
SensorWarningStatus
4 ID08 . . . . . ID01
5Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
Current Value 0
OverRange
6 ID08 . . . . . ID01
7Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
Current Value 0UnderRange
8 ID08 . . . . . ID01
9Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
Current Value 0Invalid
10 ID08 . . . . . ID01
11Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
Current Value 1
OverRange
12 ID08 . . . . . ID01
13Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
Current Value 1UnderRange
14 ID08 . . . . . ID01
15Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
Current Value 1Invalid
16 ID08 . . . . . ID01
17Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
Output 1 (HIGH)
18 ID08 . . . . . ID01
19Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
Output 2 (LOW)
20 ID08 . . . . . ID01
21Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
Output 3 (GO)
22 ID08 . . . . . ID01
23Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
Output 4 (Unassigned)
24 ID08 . . . . . ID01
25Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
Output 5 (Unassigned)
26 ID08 . . . . . ID01
27Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -4-10
4-3 Cyclic communication
4
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
GT-7
0A
Serie
s
External Input
Response 1(Preset)
28 ID08 . . . . . ID01
29Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
External Input
Response 2(Timing)
30 ID08 . . . . . ID01
31Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
External Input
Response 3(Reset)
32 ID08 . . . . . ID01
33Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
External Input
Response 4(Unassigned)
34 ID08 . . . . . ID01
35Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
External Input
Response 5(Unassigned)
36 ID08 . . . . . ID01
37Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
ErrorID Number
40Current Error ID Number (16-bit unsigned integer)
41
ErrorCode
42Current Error Code (16-bit unsigned integer)
43
WarningID Number
44Current Warning ID Number (16-bit unsigned integer)
45
Warning Code
46Current Warning Code (16-bit unsigned integer)
47
Current Value 0
(Comparator Value (P.V.)
or Raw Value (R.V.))
48
ID Number 1 (Current Value 0) (32-bit signed integer)49
50
51
: :
104
ID Number 15 (Current Value 0) (32-bit signed integer)105
106
107
Current Value 1
(Unassigned)
108
ID Number 1 (Current Value 1) (32-bit signed integer)109
110
111
: :
164
ID Number 15 (Current Value 1) (32-bit signed integer)165
166
167
Name Address(Byte) bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
4-3 Cyclic communication
4-11
4
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
GT-7
0A
Serie
s
Parameter List
Item Description
DL-EP1 Error
Status
The error status of the DL-EP1 is output.
ON: An error occurred.
OFF: No error occurred.
Warning Status (Unassigned)
Error Status
The error status of the DL-EP1 or the error statuses of all the connected sensor
amplifiers are output.
When ON, a value is stored in "Error ID Number" and "Error Code". When OFF, 0
is stored in "Error ID Number" and "Error Code".
ON: An error occurred in the DL-EP1 or in any of the connected sensor
amplifiers.
OFF: No error occurred in the DL-EP1 or in the connected sensor amplifiers.
Sensor Error Status
The target ID number bit of the sensor amplifier where the error occurred is
output.
ON: An error occurred in the sensor amplifier with the target ID number.
OFF: No error occurred in the sensor amplifier with the target ID number.
Sensor Warning
Status(Unassigned)
Current Value n
Over Range
(n: 0 to 1)
The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number
is compared with the measurement upper limit and the comparison result is
output.
ON: The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID
number is greater than the measurement upper limit.
OFF: The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID
number is less than the measurement upper limit.
(* The current value 1 does not exist in the GT-70A Series.)
Current Value n
Under Range
(n: 0 to 1)
The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number
is compared with the measurement lower limit and the comparison result is
output.
ON: The current value of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is less
than the measurement lower limit.
OFF: The current value of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is
greater than the measurement lower limit.
(* The current value 1 does not exist in the GT-70A Series.)
Current Value n
Invalid
(n: 0 to 1)
The status of current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID
number is output.
ON: The current value of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is
invalid.
OFF: The current value of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is
valid (normal).
(* The current value 1 does not exist in the GT-70A Series.)
Output n (n: 1 to 5)
The ON/OFF status of output n (n: 1 to 5) of the sensor amplifier with the target
ID number is output.
Output 1: HIGH output
Output 2: LOW output
Output 3: GO output
Output 4: HH output*1
Output 5: LL output*1
ON: Output n is output.
OFF: Output n is not output.
External Input
Response
n (n: 1 to 5)
An external input response is output when the corresponding external input
request n (n: 1 to 5) is made via communication.
The ID number of an unexisting external input is also output.
ON: The external input request was made (ON).
OFF: The external input request was not made (OFF).
For details, refer to "Entering an external input to a sensor amplifier"
(Page 4-18).
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -4-12
4-3 Cyclic communication
4
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
GT-7
0A
Serie
s
Current Value 0/Current Value 1
Error ID Number
If "Error Status" in ON, the ID number of the DL-EP1 where the error occurred and
the ID numbers of sensor amplifiers connected to the DL-EP1 are stored (the ID
number of the DL-EP1 is 0). If no error has occurred, 0 is stored. If an error occurs
in multiple IDs, the ID number of the DL-EP1 or sensor amplifier where the highest
priority error occurred is stored.
Error priority:
(1) DL-EP1 error
(2) Sensor amplifier errors (the error with the smallest error code has the
highest priority)*
* If the same error code occurs in multiple sensor amplifiers, the error
with the smallest ID number has the highest priority.
Error Code
If "Error Status" is ON, the error code is stored. If no error has occurred, 0 is
stored. If an error occurs in multiple IDs, the error code of the DL-EP1 or sensor
amplifier where the highest priority error occurred is stored.
Error priority:
(1) DL-EP1 error
(2) Sensor amplifier errors (the error with the smallest error code has the
highest priority)*
* If the same error code occurs in multiple sensor amplifiers, the error
with the smallest ID number has the highest priority.
"Error code list" (Page 4-13)
Warning ID
Number(Unassigned)
Warning Code (Unassigned)
Current Value n
(n: 0 to 1)
The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier is stored. The current value
0 always exists without reference to sensor amplifier models. Whether the
current value 1 exists depends on sensor amplifier models. If the current value
1 does not exist, 0 is stored. The contents displayed in the current value n (n: 0
to 1) depend on the use conditions.
(* The current value 1 does not exist in the GT-70A Series.)
"Current Value 0/Current Value 1" (Page 4-12)
Item Description
Name Model Conditions Function
Current Value 0
Main unit/
expansion unit
When calculation mode is
OFFComparator value (P.V.)
Main unitWhen calculation mode is ON
(Standard difference)
Comparator value (P.V.)
Expansion unitWhen calculation mode is ON(Standard difference)
Raw value (R.V.)
Main unit/
expansion unit
When calculation mode is ON(Other than standard difference)
Comparator value (P.V.)
Current Value 1Main unit/
expansion unit- (Unassigned)
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
4-3 Cyclic communication
4-13
4
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
GT-7
0A
Serie
s
Error code list
The following error codes may occur in the DL-EP1 and sensor amplifiers.
DL-EP1
ErrorID
NumberCode Description Cause Actions
0
0 No error - -
51Unassigned ID
error
The main unit assigned no ID
within 10 seconds after the
DL-EP1 had been started.
• Check if the number of
connected sensor
amplifiers exceeds the
maximum number of
sensor amplifiers that can
be connected to the main
unit.
"Connectable Sensor
Amplifiers" (Page 9-2)
• Check the connection with
the sensor amplifiers and
then turn the power on
again.
If this error cannot be
recovered, contact your
nearest KEYENCE office.
52Start-time
communication error
Communication between
sensor amplifiers ended
abnormally before ID
assignment completion.
Check the connection with
the sensor amplifiers and
then turn the power on again.
If this error cannot be
recovered, contact your
nearest KEYENCE office.
53
Unsupported
sensor amplifier
connection error
A sensor amplifier not
supported by the DL-EP1 is
connected.
Check the model of the
connected sensor amplifier
and remove the sensor
amplifier if it is not supported
by the DL-EP1.
54 Mixed model error
Sensor amplifiers outside the
specifications have a mixed
connection.
Check if the models are
mixable.
"Mixed Connection of
Sensor amplifiers" (Page 9-3)
55Start-time
communication error
ID number assignment is
successful but
communication failed during
the subsequent initial
communication.
Check the connection with
the sensor amplifiers and
then turn the power on again.
If this error cannot be
recovered, contact your
nearest KEYENCE office.
56Current limitation
error
The number of connected
sensor amplifiers exceeds
the allowable range.
Use sensor amplifiers within
the allowable range.
57
Communication
error between
sensor amplifiers
An error occurred during
communication between
sensor amplifiers.
Check if there is a noise
source around the DL-EP1.
If the sensor communication
indicator is flashing red, turn
the power on again.
70IP address
duplicate error
The IP address is the same
as another device.
Check the IP address
setting.
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -4-14
4-3 Cyclic communication
4
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
GT-7
0A
Serie
s
GT-70A Series
Warning code list
No warning code occurs in the DL-EP1 and in the GT-70A Series sensor amplifiers
connected to the DL-EP1.
0
100 System error The IP address is incorrect.
Contact your nearest
KEYENCE office.
101 System errorA default gateway setting
error occurred.
102 System error
An attempt to read data in
EEPROM such as the MAC
address has failed.
103 System errorAn attempt to start the
protocol stack has failed.
104 System errorAn attempt to access
FlashROM has failed.
150 System errorThe number of held IDs is
incorrect.
151 System errorThe number of sensors is
incorrect.
152 System error An initial read error occurred.
ErrorID
NumberCode Description Cause Actions
01H to
0FH
(Each
ID
number)
01H
Sensor amplifier
error 1 of each ID
number
Overcurrent error (ErC)
Refer to the GT-70A Series
User's Manual.
02H
Sensor amplifier
error 2 of each ID
number
Head error (ErH)
03H
Sensor amplifier
error 3 of each ID
number
EEPROM error (ErE)
04H
Sensor amplifier
error 4 of each ID
numbe
Jam check error
(Er.ChK)
05H
Sensor amplifier
error 5 of each ID
number
Self-timing
delay error
(Er.dLY)
06H
Sensor amplifier
error 6 of each ID
number
Number-of-units error
(Er.Unit)
07H
Sensor amplifier
error 7 of each ID
number
Calculation error(Er.CAL)
ErrorID
NumberCode Description Cause Actions
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
4-3 Cyclic communication
4-15
4
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
GT-7
0A
Serie
s
The data to the sensor amplifier is assigned to the OUT area of the EtherNet/IP
scanner.
External Input (5 Words (10 Bytes)) assembly instance (Instance ID): 65H
Assignment to OUT Area (Scanner to DL-EP1)
DL-EP1 data
Scanner's OUT area
Address 0Address 1
Address 9
External Input(Assembly Instance: 101)
1-byte (8-bit) data
Name Address(Byte) bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
External
Input
Request 1
(Preset)
0 ID08 . . . . . ID01
1Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
External
Input
Request 2
(Timing)
2 ID08 . . . . . ID01
3Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
External
Input
Request 3
(Reset)
4 ID08 . . . . . ID01
5Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
External
Input
Request 4
(Error Clear)
6 ID08 . . . . . ID01
7Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
External
Input
Request 5
(Unassigned)
8 ID08 . . . . . ID01
9Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -4-16
4-3 Cyclic communication
4
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
GT-7
0A
Serie
s
Parameter List
Name Function Operation
External
Input
Request 1
Preset
ON: Executes preset. Executing preset turns on external input
response 1.
OFF: Turns off external input response 1.
External
Input
Request 2
Timing
execution
ON: Turns on timing. Turning on timing also turns on external input
response 2.
OFF: Turns off timing. Turning off timing also turns off external input
response 2.
External
Input
Request 3
Reset Request
ON: Executes reset. Executing reset turns on external input
response 3.
OFF: Turns off external input response 3.
External
Input
Request 4
(Unassigned) (Unassigned)
External
Input
Request 5
(Unassigned) (Unassigned)
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
4-3 Cyclic communication
4-17
4
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
GT-7
0A
Serie
s
The following describes how the scanner cyclically communicates with the DL-EP1
(cyclic communication).
"Reading an output from a sensor amplifier" (Page 4-17)
"Entering an external input to a sensor amplifier" (Page 4-18)
"Reading comparator values (P.V. values) from sensor amplifiers" (Page 4-19)
For the message communication method, refer to "Message communication"
(Page 4-4).
Reading an output from a sensor amplifier
Available outputs: HIGH, LOW, and GO
Device assignments: "Monitor Data (84 Words (168 Bytes)) Assembly Instance
(Instance ID): 64H" (Page 4-9)
This example shows how to read the HIGH output from the sensor amplifier ID01.
(1)The output from the sensor amplifier entered into the IN area via cyclic
communication.
Communication Methods
PLCOutput of sensor amplifierIN area [18] Bit0
Sensor amplifier (1)Output
HIGH output of ID 01
10
ONOFF
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -4-18
4-3 Cyclic communication
4
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
GT-7
0A
Serie
s
Entering an external input to a sensor amplifier
Available external inputs: PRESET, TIMING, RESET
Device assignments: "External Input (5 Words (10 Bytes)) assembly instance
(Instance ID): 65H" (Page 4-15)
This example shows how to enter a TIMING input to the sensor amplifier ID01.
(1)The device value in the OUT area to which an external input request was
assigned is linked via cyclic communication and the external input of the sensor
amplifier is turned on or off.
(2)You can check the input status of the sensor amplifier with the external input
response.
To use the TIMING input, set the "Timing Type" of the sensor amplifier to"External Timing Input". Also, set Input (pink/purple wire) func. 2. to Bankswitching B (bank B).
After the external input is executed, the button operation of the sensor
amplifiers is locked for about 10 seconds. "COM-Lock ( )" is
displayed for about 2 seconds during switching to the locked state or
when an attempt is made to operate a locked button. When button
operation is unlocked, "COM-Unlock ( )" is displayed for about 2
seconds. However, the initialization screen appears when an initialization
reset is executed. If an external input is repeatedly executed when the
initialization screen is being displayed, the initialization screen is retained.
PLC (1)External Input requestOUT area [2]Bit0
(2)External Input responseIN area [30]Bit0
Sensor amplifierExternal InputExternal input 2 to ID 01
10
ONOFF
10
Point
Reference
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
4-3 Cyclic communication
4-19
4
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
GT-7
0A
Serie
s
Reading comparator values (P.V. values) from sensor amplifiers
Comparator values (P.V. values) are read from the IN area to which the ID number of
each sensor amplifier is assigned.
Device assignments: "Monitor Data (84 Words (168 Bytes)) Assembly Instance
(Instance ID): 64H" (Page 4-9)
This example shows how to read the comparator values from the sensor amplifiers
ID01, ID02, and ID03.
(1)When the comparator value of a sensor amplifier is updated, the new comparator
value is entered into the IN area via cyclic communication.
If the comparator value is correct, the parameter range is -199.9999 to 199.9999.
If the current value is over range, under range, or invalid, the previous value is
retained without updating the current value.
(2)The properties of the comparator value (Current Value n Over Range (each bit of
IN area [6]), Current Value n Under Range (each bit of IN area [8]), and Current
Value n Invalid (each bit of IN area [10]) are entered. If the comparator value of a
sensor amplifier is "over", "under," or "invalid," the bit corresponding to the ID
number of that sensor amplifier is set to 1.
*For the GT-70A Series, the comparator value is stored in the current value 0.
PLC (2)Comparator value propertyEach bit of IN [6, 8,10]
Comparator value of ID 01 1234 4567 6789
IN area [48 to 51]
Comparator value of ID 02 2345 5678 7890
IN area [52 to 55]
Comparator value of ID 03 3456 8901
IN area [56 to 59]
Sensor amplifierComparator value of ID 01 1234 4567 6789
Comparator value of ID 02 2345 5678 7890
Comparator value of ID 03 3456 8901
(1)
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -4-20
4-3 Cyclic communication
4
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
GT-7
0A
Serie
s
Compatibility check is a function executed when the scanner communicates with the
DL-EP1. This function checks if the device set with the scanner matches the DL-EP1
to prevent communicating with the wrong device. This function is executed when a
connection is opened.
When using scanners of other manufacturers
For how to use the scanners of other manufacturers, refer to the manual of each
scanner.
Checking the Device Compatibility
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 4-21
4
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
GT-7
0A
Serie
s
4-4 Message Communication
This section describes the message communication functions and how to use them.
What is Message communication (Explicit messaging)?
Message communication is a function that performs communication by issuing
commands using the objects and services (Service Codes) prepared for each
EtherNet/IP device. Message communication is used for applications which do not
require the punctuality of cyclic communication, such as reading and writing adaptor
settings.
The objects and service codes which can be used with message communication
include those which are specified as a standard and those which are unique to the
device. You can use the objects and services unique to the DL-EP1to monitor data,
to read and write parameters, and to perform operations such as reset.
The DL-EP1 message communication function supports CIP-defined
UCMM (unconnected) and Class 3 (connected) message communication.
Scanner DL-EP1 Sensor amplifier
Send
Receive
Receive
Send
(1) Message communication command
(3) Message communication response
(2) Interpret and execute command
Reference
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -4-22
4-4 Message Communication
4
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
GT-7
0A
Serie
s
The following settings are required to execute message communication with the DL-
EP1.
[DL-EP1]
The DL-EP1 does not require any setting.
[Scanner]
Set the applicable service, Class ID, Instance ID, Attribute ID, and service data, and
send the commands used for message communication. "Objects and Services"
(Page 4-25)
Refer to the scanner manual for details on the setting methods and applicable
commands.
The following lists the contents that can be executed by message communication
when the objects (DL Object) and services unique to the DL-EP1 are used.
(1) Reading data from a sensor amplifier
(2) Writing data to a sensor amplifier
(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier
(4) Locking sensor amplifier operations
(5) Reading the number of decimal places from a sensor amplifier
(1) Reading data from a sensor amplifier
Message communication reads parameters from the DL-EP1 and the sensor
amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.
"(1) Reading parameters from a sensor amplifier" (Page 4-45)
Configuring Message Communication
Actions which can be Completed with Message Communication
Command
Response:123456
GT-7∗A Comparator values (P. V. values): 123456
DL-EP1Scanner
<Details of command>Service code: 0EHClass ID: 67HInstance ID: 01HAttribute ID: 0325H (805)
GT-7∗A
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
4-4 Message Communication
4-23
4
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
GT-7
0A
Serie
s
(2) Writing data to a sensor amplifier
Message communication writes parameters to the DL-EP1 and the sensor
amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.
"(2) Writing parameters to a sensor amplifier" (Page 4-46)
(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier
Message communication issues operation commands such as preset to the DL-
EP1 and the sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.
"(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier" (Page 4-47)
(4) Locking sensor amplifier operations
Message communication locks operations by keys on the sensor amplifier
connected to the DL-EP1.
* If a key is locked, message communication cannot switch a bank.
"(4) Locking sensor amplifier operations" (Page 4-49)
Command:6000
Response
GT-7∗A jam detection position: 5000→6000
DL-EP1Scanner
<Details of command>Service code: 10HClass ID: 67HInstance ID: 01HAttribute ID: 0399H(921)Service data: 6000
GT-7∗A
Command
Response
Preset execution by GT-7∗A
DL-EP1Scanner
<Details of command>Service code: 4BHClass ID: 67HInstance ID: 01HAttribute ID: 0301H(769)
GT-7∗A
Command
Response
Changes using thesensor amplifier keys are locked.
DL-EP1Scanner
<Details of command>Service code: 4CHClass ID: 67HInstance ID: 00HService data: 01H
GT-7*A
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -4-24
4-4 Message Communication
4
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
GT-7
0A
Serie
s
(5) Reading the number of decimal places from a sensor amplifier
Message communication reads the number of decimal places of settings read
from the sensor amplifier.
"(5) Reading the number of decimal places in the parameter from a sensor
amplifier" (Page 4-50)
For the GT-70A Series, if the current value is 12.53 mm, data is stored as
follows:
Data: 12530
Number of decimal places: 3
Perform calculation from the read data and the number of decimal places.
If message communication writes data to a sensor amplifier, issues anoperation command to the sensor amplifier, or locks sensor amplifieroperations, the sensor amplifier button operations are locked for about 10
seconds. "COM-Lock ( )" is displayed for about 2 seconds duringswitching to the locked state or when an attempt is made to operate alocked button. When button operation is unlocked, "COM-Unlock
( )" is displayed for about 2 seconds.
Command
Response
DL-EP1Scanner
<Details of command>Service code: 4CHClass ID: 67HInstance ID: 01HAttribute ID: 0325H(805)
GT-7∗A
Reads the number of decimal places of the GT-7∗A comparator value (P.V. value).
Reference
12530 12.530 12.53mmNumber of decimal places
3 2 1
Point
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
4-4 Message Communication
4-25
4
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
GT-7
0A
Serie
s
Message communication uses objects and services to send and receive data.
Executing a service (1) for a DL-EP1 object enables data read (2), parameter
change (3), specified operation execution (4), and read of the number of decimal
places (5), etc.
Taking DL Object as an example, one instance is provided for each of the sensor
amplifiers connected to the DL-EP1. Reading the attributes corresponding to the
comparator values (P.V. values) of the respective instances using a service makes it
possible to read the comparator values (P.V. values) of the sensor amplifiers
corresponding to the respective instances.
Objects and Services
Parameter change(3)
Operation command execution(4)
Read of the number of decimal places(5)
DL-EP1 or sensor amplifier connected to DL-EP1
Object(1)
(2)
Service
Data output
ID: 0324H Output
Attribute
ID: 0325H Current value (instantaneous flow rate)
ID: 0326H Raw value (R.V. value)
DL Object(Class ID: 67H)
DL-EP1Instance ID: 00H
ID number 1 sensorInstance ID: 01H
ID number 2 sensorInstance ID: 02H
:
:
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -4-26
4-4 Message Communication
4
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
GT-7
0A
Serie
s
• In EtherNet/IP (CIP), the method called "object modeling" is used to
express a device. The device is handled as a group of objects. Objects
abstractly express the configuration elements in the device. A class is a
group of objects expressing the configuration elements of the same
type. An instance actually expresses a specific object contained in a
class. Each instance in the class has the same attribute group, but each
uses a unique attribute value.
• To execute a service for the DL-EP1, send a command from the scanner.
The DL-EP1 then returns the service execution results as a response. A
command requires a service, class ID (Class ID), instance ID (Instance
ID), and attribute ID (Attribute ID)*. When a parameter is written, the
command also requires a setting (service data).
* Some of the commands to be used may not require the above items.
"Basic Format and Processing Flow of Message Communication"
(Page 4-28)
Reference
Command Response
・Service
・Class ID
・Instance ID
・Attribute ID*
・Service data*
・General Status
・Additional Status*
・Service response data*
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
4-4 Message Communication
4-27
4
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
GT-7
0A
Serie
s
The following describes the objects usable by the DL-EP1.
Objects Usable by DL-EP1
Command
Response
DLObject
MessageRouterObject
ConnectionManagerObject
AssemblyObject
IdentityObject
TCP/IPInterfaceObject
EthernetLink
Object
EtherNet/IP unit
Object Name Class ID Description ReferencePage
DL Object 67H
This object provides the statuses of the DL-EP1 and
the sensor amplifiers connected to the DL-EP1 and
writes and reads parameters. This object is unique to
the DL-EP1.
4-31
Identity Object 01HThis object provides identification information,
general information and a reset service, etc.9-22
Message Router
Object02H
This object provides connection points for message
communication.9-25
Assembly Object 04H
This object provides access to the devices via cyclic
communication. This object can be used to send data
to the devices that do not support cyclic
communication.
9-26
Connection
Manager Object06H
This object is used for connection-type
communication.9-28
TCP/IP Interface
ObjectF5H
This object provides the structure for setting the TCP/
IP network interface. You can set an IP address,
subnet mask and gateway, etc., in this object.
9-30
Ethernet Link Object F6H This object provides Ethernet status information. 9-34
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -4-28
4-4 Message Communication
4
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
GT-7
0A
Serie
s
The EtherNet/IP scanner and the DL-EP1 exchange Explicit messages for
communication. The following provides a basic example of the command format of
Explicit messages to be sent and the response format returned from the DL-EP1 to
the scanner.
Commands
• Command format
*1 For details on usable services, refer to "DL Object (Class ID:67H)" (Page 4-
31) or "Objects Usable by DL-EP1" (Page 9-20).
Responses
• Response format
Basic Format and Processing Flow of Message Communication
Item Description
Service code*1 Designates the service code to be used (Service Code).
Class ID Designates a class ID (Class ID) tailored to the service*1 to be used.
Instance IDDesignates an instance ID (Instance ID) tailored to the service*1 to be
used.
Attribute IDDesignates an attribute ID (Attribute ID) tailored to the service*1 to be
used.
Service Data Designates service data (Service Data) tailored to the service*1 to be used.
Item Description
General statusReturns a general status in respect to the command (General Status). 00H
is returned when the command ends normally.
Additional status Returns the additional status (Additional Status).
Service response
data
Returns service response data Service Response Data) in respect to the
command.
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
4-4 Message Communication
4-29
4
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
GT-7
0A
Serie
s
Command processing order and error response
Check whether each ID is within the supported range in the following order:
Supplement for object processing
• Get_Attribute_Single and Get_Attributes_All are executed, ignoring send service
data.
• The service (Get_Attributes_All, Reset) that does not designate an attribute ID is
executed, ignoring Attribute ID.
• If Set_Attribute_Single is designated for an attribute which cannot be written (Set),
"0EH" (Attribute not settable) is returned as the general status.
• If Set_Attribute_Single for the writable attribute is designated and the writing size
is less than the attribute size, the general status "13H" (Not enough data) is
returned. If the writing size is greater than the attribute size, the service is
executed, ignoring the excessive data.
Class ID check
Yes
No
Instance ID check
Yes
No
Service check
Yes
No
Attribute ID check
Executes supported service process
Yes
No
Path Destination Unknown (05H)returned as general status
Path Destination Unknown (05H)returned as general status
Service not Supported (08H)returned as general status
Attribute not Supported (14H)returned as general status
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -4-30
4-4 Message Communication
4
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
GT-7
0A
Serie
s
Reading the attribute ID
Example) Excerpt from DL Object attribute ID
Data Type
The data type is defined in the EtherNet/IP specifications as follows:
Reading the DL Object Table
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
Instance ID
Attribute ID
Name Description Attribute Data Type
00H74H
(116)
Output
1
Stores the HIGH output (output 1) status of each
sensor amplifier. When HIGH is output, the bit
corresponding to the ID number of the sensor
amplifier is set to ON.
Bit 0 to bit 9 ID number 1 to ID number 10
Bit 10 to bit 15: Reserved for system
R WORD
Item Description
(1) Instance ID Represents the instance ID in hexadecimal notation.
(2) Attribute ID Represents the attribute ID in hexadecimal (decimal) notation.
(3) Name Represents the attribute name.
(4) DescriptionDescribes the attribute and represents the data to be read and the range of
parameters that can be set.
(5) Attribute
Represents the direction of services for the attribute ID.
R (Read): The parameter read service (Get_Attribute_Single,
Get_Attributes_All) can be used to read the attribute value.
W (Write): The parameter write service (Set_Attribute_Single) can be used
to write the attribute value.
(6) Data type Represents the attribute data type.
Data Type DescriptionRange
Minimum Maximum
INT Signed 16-bit integer -32768 32767
UINT Unsigned 16-bit integer 0 65535
DINT Signed 32-bit integer -2147483648 2147483647
WORD Bit string: 16 bits - -
DWORD Bit string: 32 bits - -
STRING
Character string
(2-byte length information +
1-byte array per character)
- -
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
4-4 Message Communication
4-31
4
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
GT-7
0A
Serie
s
The DL Object provides the DL-EP1 connection status and device write/read. This
object is unique to the DL-EP1.
Services
*1 This service cannot be used in the DL-EP1 (instance ID:00H).*2 This service cannot be used in the sensor amplifier (instance ID: 01H to 0FH)
connected to the DL-EP1.
*3 In the DL-EP1 (instance ID: 00H), this service can be used as the attribute ID 90H to 9EH and A0H to AEH.
DL Object (Class ID:67H)
Service Code Service Name Description
0EHParameter
read
Reads parameters from the DL-EP1 and the sensor amplifier
connected to the DL-EP1. For examples of using this service,
refer to "(1) Reading parameters from a sensor amplifier"
(Page 4-45).
10HParameter
write
Writes parameters to the DL-EP1 and the sensor amplifier
connected to the DL-EP1. For examples of using this service,
refer to "(2) Writing parameters to a sensor amplifier"
(Page 4-46).
4BH*1 Operation
command
Requests processing such as zero shift and tuning from the
sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1. The contents of
processing that can be requested differ per sensor amplifier.
Set the contents of processing with the attribute ID in the
object.
refer to "Attribute IDs supported by the instance service
4BH (operation command)" (Page 4-47). For examples of
using this service, refer to
"(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier"
(Page 4-47).
4CHBatch lock
setting*2
Collectively performs lock or unlock for all the connected
sensor amplifiers. Even if a lock setting that is not supported
by sensor amplifiers is designated, locks all the sensor
amplifiers without interrupting processing. Then, error code
09H is returned as a response.
Setting 0: Not lock
Setting 1: Key lock
"Lock setting" (Page 4-32)
For examples of using this service, refer to "(4) Locking
sensor amplifier operations" (Page 4-49).
* If a key is locked, message communication cannot switch
the bank.
4DH
Acquisition of the
number of decimal
places *3
Acquires the number of decimal places of the designated
parameter. For examples of using this service, refer to "(5)
Reading the number of decimal places in the parameter from
a sensor amplifier" (Page 4-50).
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -4-32
4-4 Message Communication
4
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
GT-7
0A
Serie
s
• Lock setting
Responses
The responses made when each service is used are as follows:
(1) Parameter read: : Service code 0EH
(2) Parameter write: : Service code 10H
(3) Operation command: : Service code 4BH
(4) Batch lock setting: : Service code 4CH
(5) Read of number of decimal places: : Service code 4DH
Setting Description
0 Does not execute lock.
1Executes full key lock (inhibition of operations other than basic screen
display switching).
GeneralStatus
Command TypeDescription
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
00H Normal end
05H The instance ID is out of range.
08H - - -The designated instance ID does not support this service or
cannot be executed.
09H - - - - The written data is out of range.
0CH - - -
• Parameter write was executed for the function controlled
by cyclic communication.
• An attempt to execute the operation command has failed.
Check if the sensor amplifier can execute the operation
command.
0EH - - - -
• An attempt was made to write data to the attribute ID that
cannot be written or to the attribute ID that is in the
unwritable status.
• The written data is out of range.
10H - - - -
An attempt was made to read data from the attribute ID that
cannot be read or from the attribute ID that is in the
unreadable status.
13H - -The service data size is less than the defined size.
The defined data size is stored in the additional status.
14H - The attribute ID is out of range.
16H -The sensor amplifier corresponding to the designated
instance ID is not connected.
1FH
• This service is supported by the designated instance ID
but cannot be used by the designated attribute ID.
(Additional status: C350H)
• In the current mode, the designated setting cannot be
written into the parameter.
(Additional status: C351H)
• The DL-EP1 is now initializing communication. (Additional
status: C352H)
FEH System error. Contact your nearest KEYENCE office.
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
4-4 Message Communication
4-33
4
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
GT-7
0A
Serie
s
Attributes
Instance ID
Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
00H
64H
(100)Status
Indicates the status of this unit and connected
sensor amplifier.
Bit0: DL-EP1 Error Status
Bit 1 to bit 13: Reserved for system
Bit 14: Warning Status
Bit 15: Error Status
R WORD
65H
(101)
Sensor Error
Status
Indicates the error status of the connected
senosr amplifiers. If an error occurs, the bit of the
corresponding ID number of amplifier is turned
to ON.
Bit 0 to bit 9: ID number 1 to ID number 10
Bit 10 to bit 15: Reserved for system
R WORD
66H
(102)
Warning
Status(Unassigned) R WORD
67H
(103)Reserved for system
68H
(104)
Current
Value 0
Property
Indicates the status of current value 0 of each
amplifier. If the current value 0 is “0ver Range",
“Under Range", or "Invalid", the bit
corresponding to the ID number is turned ON.
Bit 0 to bit 9: ID number 1 to ID number 10
Bit10 to bit 15: Reserved for system
R WORD
69H
(105)
Current
Value 1
Property
Indicates the status of current value 1 of each
amplifier. If the current value 1 is "0ver Range",
"Under Range", or "Invalid", the bit corresponding
to the ID number is turned ON.
Bit 0 to bit 9: ID number 1 to ID number 10
Bit 10 to bit 15: Reserved for system
R WORD
6AH
(106) to
6BH
(107)
Reserved for system
6CH
(108)
Error ID
Number
Indicates the ID number of the unit having error.
Parameter range: 0 to 10 (initial value: 0)R UINT
6DH
(109)Error Code
Indicates the error code that is happening.
Parameter range: 0 to 65535 (initial value: 0)R UINT
6EH
(110)
Warning ID
Number(Unassigned) R UINT
6FH
(111)
Warning
Code(Unassigned) R UINT
70H
(112) to
73H
(115)
Reserved for system
74H
(116)
Output1
(HIGH)
Indicates the HIGH output (output 1) status of
each amplifier. When HIGH is output, the bit
corresponding to the ID number of the sensor
amplifier is turned ON.
Bit 0 to bit 9: ID number 1 to ID number 10
Bit10 to bit 15: Reserved for system
R WORD
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -4-34
4-4 Message Communication
4
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
GT-7
0A
Serie
s
00H
75H
(117)
Output2
(LOW)
Indicates the LOW output (output 2) status of
each amplifier. When LOW is output, the bit
corresponding to the ID number of the sensor
amplifier is turned ON.
Bit 0 to bit 9: ID number 1 to ID number 10
Bit10 to bit 15: Reserved for system
R WORD
76H
(118)
Output3
(GO)
Indicates the GO output (output 3) status of each
amplifier. When GO is output, the bit
corresponding to the ID number of the sensor
amplifier is turned ON.
Bit 0 to bit 9: ID number 1 to ID number 10
Bit10 to bit 15: Reserved for system
R WORD
77H
(119)
Output4
(Unassigned)(Unassigned) R WORD
78H
(120)
Output5
(Unassigned)(Unassigned) R WORD
79H
(121) to
89H
(137)
Reserved for system
8AH
(138)
Current
Value 0
Invalid
When the current value 0 of each amplifier is
invalid, the bit of corresponding ID number is
turned ON.
Bit 0 to bit 9: ID number 1 to ID number 10
Bit10 to bit 15: Reserved for system
R WORD
8BH
(139)
Current
Value 0
Under Range
When the current value 0 of each amplifier is less
than the lower limit of the detection range, the bit
of the corresponding ID number is turned ON.
Bit 0 to bit 9: ID number 1 to ID number 10
Bit10 to bit 15: Reserved for system
R WORD
8CH
(140)
Current
Value 0
Over Range
When the current value 0 of each amplifier is
higher than the upper limit of the detection range,
the bit of corresponding ID number is turned ON.
Bit 0 to bit 9: ID number 1 to ID number 10
Bit10 to bit 15: Reserved for system
R WORD
8DH
(141)
Current
Value 1
Invalid
When the current value 1 of each amplifier is
invalid, the bit of the corresponding ID number is
turned ON.
Bit 0 to bit 9: ID number 1 to ID number 10
Bit10 to bit 15: Reserved for system
R WORD
8EH
(142)
Current
Value 1
Under Range
When the current value 1 of each amplifier is less
than the lower limit of the detection range, the bit
of the corresponding ID number is turned ON.
Bit 0 to bit 9: ID number 1 to ID number 10
Bit10 to bit 15: Reserved for system
R WORD
8FH
(143)
Current
Value 1 Over
Range
When the current value 1 of each amplifier is
higher than the upper limit of the detection
range, the bit of the corresponding ID number is
turned ON.
Bit 0 to bit 9: ID number 1 to ID number 10
Bit10 to bit 15: Reserved for system
R WORD
Instance ID
Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
4-4 Message Communication
4-35
4
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
GT-7
0A
Serie
s
00H
90H
(144)
Current
Value 0 (ID
Number 1)
Indicates the current value 0 of the sensor of ID
number 1.
Parameter range:
-2147483648 to 2147483647 (initial value: 0)
R DINT
91H
(145)
to 98H
(152)
:
99H
(153)
Current
Value 0 (ID
Number 10)
Indicates the current value 0 of the sensor ID
number 10.
Parameter range:
-2147483648 to 2147483647 (initial value: 0)
R DINT
9AH
(154)
to 9FH
(159)
Reserved for system
A0H
(160)
Current
Value 1 (ID
Number 1)
Indicates the current value 1 of the sensor ID
number 1.
Parameter range:
-2147483648 to 2147483647 (initial value: 0)
R DINT
A1H
(161)
to A8H
(168)
:
A9H
(169)
Current
Value 1 (ID
Number 10)
Indicates the current value 1 of the sensor ID
number 10.
Parameter range:
-2147483648 to 2147483647 (initial value: 0)
R DINT
AAH
(170)
to AFH
(175)
Reserved for system
B0H
(176)
Sensor
Status Mask
Setting
Set up the condition to determine if the sensor
error or warning is a recoverable DL-EP1 error
(MS LED blinks in red). If mask is selected, MS
LED does not blink in red when a sensor error or
warning occurs.
Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)
0: Not mask
1: Mask
R/W UINT
B1H
(177)
Sensor
Connected
Number
Indicates the number of connected sensor
amplifiers.
Parameter range: 0 to 10 (initial value: 0)
R UINT
B2H
(178)
to C7H
(199)
Reserved for system
0300H
(768)
Error Code
(ID number
00)
Indicates the error code of ID number 0.
Parameter range: 0 to 65535 (initial value: 0)R UINT
Instance ID
Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -4-36
4-4 Message Communication
4
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
GT-7
0A
Serie
s
For details on current value 0 and current value 1, refer to "Current
Value 0/Current Value 1" (Page 4-12).
00H
0301H
(769)
to
0309H
(777)
:
030AH
(778)
Error Code
(ID number
10)
Indicates the error code of ID number 10.
Parameter range: 0 to 65535 (initial value: 0)R UINT
030BH
(779)
to
04FFH
(1279)
Reserved for system
Instance ID
Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
Reference
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
4-4 Message Communication
4-37
4
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
GT-7
0A
Serie
s
Attributes for GT-70A Series (Common to all GT-70A Series)
Designate the ID number (01H to 0AH) of a sensor amplifier as the instance ID.
Class Attribute ID
Name Description Attribute Data Type
Group1
0320H
(800)
Group1
Entry count
Indicates the number of items (entries) that can
be set in Group 1.
Parameter range: 9
R DINT
0321H
(801)
Sensor
amplifier
error state*1
Indicates the error status of the sensor amplifier.
bit0: Overcurrent error (ErC)
bit1: Head error (ErH)
bit2: EEPROM error (ErE)
bit3: Jam check error (Er.chK)
bit4: Self-timing delay (Er.dLY)
bit5: Number-of-units error (Er.Unit)
bit6: Calculation error(Er.CAL)
R DWORD
0322H
(802) to
0323H
(803)
Reserved for system
0324H
(804)
Control
output*2
Indicates the control output status.
Parameter range: 00H to 1FH (initial value: 00H)
bit0: HIGH output
bit1: LOW output
bit2: GO output
R DWORD
0325H
(805)
Comparator
value (P.V.
Value)*3, *4, *5
Indicates the comparator value (P.V. value).
Parameter range:
-99.9999 to 999.9999
R DINT
0326H
(806)
Raw value
(R.V. Value)*3, *4, *5, *6
Indicates the raw value (R.V. value).
Parameter range:
-99.9999 to 999.9999
R DINT
0327H
(807)
Peak value
during
sampling *3, *4, *5, *6, *7
Indicates the peak value during sampling.
Parameter range: -99.999 to 999.999R DINT
0328H
(808)
Bottom value
during
sampling *3, *4, *5, *6, *8
Indicates the bottom value during sampling.
Parameter range: -99.999 to 999.999R DINT
0329H
(809)
Calculation
display
value*3, *4
Indicates the calculation display value.
Parameter range: -99.999 to 999.999R DINT
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -4-38
4-4 Message Communication
4
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
GT-7
0A
Serie
s
Group2
032AH
(810)
to
033FH
(831)
Reserved for system
0340H
(832)
Group2 Entry
count
Indicates the number of items (entries) that can
be set in Group 2.
Parameter range: 12
R DINT
0341H
(833)
Bank 0 HIGH
setting
Indicates the bank 0 HIGH setting.
Parameter range:
-99.999 to 999.999 (initial value: 5,000)
R/W DINT
0342H
(834)
Bank 0 LOW
setting
Indicates the bank 0 LOW setting.
Parameter range:
-99.999 to 999.999 (initial value: 2,000)
R/W DINT
0343H
(835)
Bank 0
preset value
Indicates the bank 0 preset value.
Parameter range:
-99.999 to 999.999 (initial value: 0.000)
R/W DINT
0344H
(836)
Bank 1 HIGH
setting
Indicates the bank 1 HIGH setting.
Parameter range:
-99.999 to 999.999 (initial value: 5,000)
R/W DINT
0345H
(837)
Bank 1 LOW
setting
Indicates the bank 1 LOW setting.
Parameter range:
-99.999 to 999.999 (initial value: 2,000)
R/W DINT
0346H
(838)
Bank 1
preset value
Indicates the bank 1 preset value.
Parameter range:
-99.999 to 999.999 (initial value: 0.000)
R/W DINT
0347H
(839)
Bank 2 HIGH
setting
Indicates the bank 2 HIGH setting.
Parameter range:
-99.999 to 999.999 (initial value: 5,000)
R/W DINT
0348H
(840)
Bank 2 LOW
setting
Indicates the bank 2 LOW setting.
Parameter range:
-99.999 to 999.999 (initial value: 2,000)
R/W DINT
0349H
(841)
Bank 2
preset value
Indicates the bank 2 preset value.
Parameter range:
-99.999 to 999.999 (initial value: 0.000)
R/W DINT
034AH
(842)
Bank 3 HIGH
setting
Indicates the bank 3 HIGH setting.
Parameter range:
-99.999 to 999.999 (initial value: 5,000)
R/W DINT
034BH
(843)
Bank 3 LOW
setting
Indicates the bank 3 LOW setting.
Parameter range:
-99.999 to 999.999 (initial value: 2,000)
R/W DINT
034CH
(844)
Bank 3
preset value
Indicates the bank 3 preset value.
Parameter range:
-99.999 to 999.999 (initial value: 0.000)
R/W DINT
034DH
(845) to
035FH
(863)
Reserved for system
Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
4-4 Message Communication
4-39
4
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
GT-7
0A
Serie
s
Group3
0360H
(864)
Group3 Entry
count
Indicates the number of items
(number of entries) that can be set in Group 3.
Parameter range: 7
R DINT
0361H
(865)Key lock
Sets key lock.
Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)
0: Unlock
1: Key lock
R/W DINT
0362H
(866)
Bank
switching
state*9
Reads the currently operating bank.
Parameter range: 0 to 3 (currently operating
bank)
R DINT
Rewrites the operating bank.
Parameter range: 0 to 3 (initial value: 0)
0: Rewrites the operating bank with bank 0.
1: Rewrites the operating bank with bank 1.
2: Rewrites the operating bank with bank 2.
3: Rewrites the operating bank with bank 3.
W DINT
0363H
(867)
Timing
status*10
Reads the timing status.
Parameter range: 0 to 1
0: The timing input is OFF or measurement is in
progress in self-timing mode.
1: The timing input is ON or measurement is not
in progress in self-timing mode.
R DINT
Writes the timing status.
Parameter range: 0 to 1
0: Change was made during measurement.
1: Change was made during non-measurement.
W
0364H
(868) to
0366H
(870)
Reserved for system
0367H
(871)
Bar display
mode
Indicates bar display mode.
Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)
0: Bar display mode
1: OK/NG display mode
R/W DINT
0368H
(872) to
037FH
(895)
Reserved for system
Group4
0380H
(896)
Group4 Entry
count
Indicates the number of items (entries) that can
be set in Group 4.
Parameter range: 26
R DINT
0381H
(897)
Calculation
mode and
Setting*11, *12
Indicates calculation mode.
Parameter range: 0 to 8 (initial value: 0)
0: OFF
1: Maximum value
2: Minimum value
3: Flatness
4: Mean
5: Standard difference
6: Torsion
7: Warp
8: Thickness
R/W DINT
Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -4-40
4-4 Message Communication
4
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
GT-7
0A
Serie
s
Group4
0382H
(898)
Detection
mode
Indicates detection mode.
Parameter range: 0 to 4 (initial value: 0)
0: Standard
1: NG hold
2: Peak hold
3: Bottom hold
4: Peak-to-peak
R/W DINT
0383H
(899)Reserved for system
0384H
(900)
Response
time*13
Indicates the response time.
Parameter range: 0 to 6 (initial value: 3)
0: HSP (1.5)
1: 5 ms
2: 10 ms
3: 100 ms
4: 500 ms
5: 1000 ms
6: 5000 ms
R/W DINT
0385H
(901)
Timing
type*14
Indicates the timing type.
Parameter range: 0 to 2 (initial value: 0)
0: External timing input
1: Rising edge self-timing
2: Falling edge self-timing
R/W DINT
0386H
(902)
Self-timing
level
Indicates the self timing level.
Parameter range: 199.9999
-99.999 to 999.999 (initial value: 0.500)
R/W DINT
0387H
(903)
Self-timing
delay type
Indicates the self-timing delay type.
Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)
0: Static hold
1: Delay timer
R/W DINT
0388H
(904)
User-
specified
delay time
Indicates the user-specified delay time.
Parameter range: 0 to 9999
(initial value: 1000)
R/W DINT
0389H
(905)
Delay stable
determination
Sets the static hold delay stable determination.
Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)
0: Default
1: User
R/W DINT
038AH
(906)
Delay stable
range
Sets the static hold delay stable range.
Parameter range:
0.000 to 999.999 (initial value: 0.010)
R/W DINT
038BH
(907)
Measurement
direction
Sets the measurement increase/decrease
direction.
Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)
0: Normal
1: Reversed
R/W DINT
038CH
(908)Multiplier
Indicates the multiplier.
Parameter range: 0.1 to 100.0
(Initial value: 1.0)
R/W DINT
038DH
(909)Output mode
Indicates output mode.
Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)
0: N.O.
1: N.C.
R/W DINT
Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
4-4 Message Communication
4-41
4
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
GT-7
0A
Serie
s
Group4
038EH
(910)
Display
resolution
Sets the display resolution.
Parameter range: 0 to 3 (initial value: 0)
0:0.001
1:0.01
2:0.1
3:1
R/W DINT
038FH
(911)Hysteresis
Sets the hysteresis.
Parameter range:
0.000 to 999.999 (initial value: 0.003)
R/W DINT
0390H
(912)
Input (purple
wire) func. 1
Sets input (purple wire) func. 1.
Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)
0: Bank A
1: Reset
R/W DINT
0391H
(913)
Input (pink/
purple wire)
func. 2
Sets input (pink/purple wire) func. 2.
Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)
0: Timing input
1: Bank B
R/W DINT
0392H
(914) to
0394H
(916)
Reserved for system
0395H
(917)
Store preset
value
Set up store preset value.
Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)
0:YES
1:NO
R/W DINT
0396H
(918)Reserved for system
0397H
(919)
Power save
(eco)
function
Set up power save (eco) function.
Parameter range: 0 to 2 (initial value: 0)
0:OFF
1:HALF
2:ALL
R/W DINT
0398H
(920)Core alarm
Set up core alarm.
Parameter range: 0 to 2 (initial value: 0)
0:OFF
1:ON
2:USER
R/W DINT
0399H
(921)
Check point
setting
Set up check point setting.
Parameter range:
-99.999 to 999.999 (initial value: 0.500)
R/W DINT
039AH
(922)
Display filter
function
Set up display filter function.
Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)
0:ON
1:OFF
R/W DINT
039BH
(923)
to
039FH
(927)
Reserved for system
Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -4-42
4-4 Message Communication
4
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
GT-7
0A
Serie
s
Group5
03A0H
(928)
Group5
Entry count
Indicates the number of items
(number of entries) that can be set in Group 5.
Parameter range: 10
R DINT
03A1H
(929)
R.V. (base of
calc.) ID1*4, *15
Indicates the R.V. value of main unit (ID number
1) on which the calculation result was based.
Parameter range:
-999.999 to 1000.000
R DINT
03A2H
(930)
R.V. (base of
calc.) ID2*4, *15
Indicates the R.V. value of expansion unit (ID
number 2) on which the calculation result was
based.
Parameter range:
-999.999 to 1000.000
R DINT
03A3H
(931)
R.V. (base of
calc.) ID3*4, *15
Indicates the R.V. value of expansion unit (ID
number 3) on which the calculation result was
based.
Parameter range:
-999.999 to 1000.000
R DINT
03A4H
(932)
R.V. (base of
calc.) ID4*4, *15
Indicates the R.V. value of expansion unit (ID
number 4) on which the calculation result was
based.
Parameter range:
-999.999 to 1000.000
R DINT
03A5H
(933)
R.V. (base of
calc.) ID5*4, *15
Indicates the R.V. value of expansion unit (ID
number 5) on which the calculation result was
based.
Parameter range:
-999.999 to 1000.000
R DINT
03A6H
(934)
R.V. (base of
calc.) ID6*4, *15
Indicates the R.V. value of expansion unit (ID
number 6) on which the calculation result was
based.
Parameter range:
-999.999 to 1000.000
R DINT
03A7H
(935)
R.V. (base of
calc.) ID7*4, *15
Indicates the R.V. value of expansion unit (ID
number 7) on which the calculation result was
based.
Parameter range:
-999.999 to 1000.000
R DINT
03A8H
(936)
R.V. (base of
calc.) ID8*4, *15
Indicates the R.V. value of expansion unit (ID
number 8) on which the calculation result was
based.
Parameter range:
-999.999 to 1000.000
R DINT
03A9H
(937)
R.V. (base of
calc.) ID9*4, *15
Indicates the R.V. value of expansion unit (ID
number 9) on which the calculation result was
based.
Parameter range:
-999.999 to 1000.000
R DINT
03AAH
(938)
R.V. (base of
calc.) ID10*4, *15
Indicates the R.V. value of expansion unit (ID
number 10) on which the calculation result was
based.
Parameter range:
-999.999 to 1000.000
R DINT
03ABH
(939) to
03BFH
(959)
Reserved for system
Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
4-4 Message Communication
4-43
4
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
GT-7
0A
Serie
s
*1 You can check the error contents of the sensor amplifier according to the ON/
OFF status of each bit.
OFF(0): No error occurred. ON(1): An error occurred.
Two or more errors may simultaneously occur. For details on each error, refer to
"GT-70A Series User's Manual".
*2 You can check the detailed output status according to the ON/OFF status of
each bit.
*3 Use this attribute in combination with the comparator value property or
comparator value information (invalid/over/under).
*4 If the comparator value is correct, the parameter range is -99.9999 to
999.9999.
If this value is Current Value Over Range, 999.9999 is stored.
If this value is Current Value Under Range, -999.9999 is stored.
If this value is Current Value Invalid, -999.9998 is stored.
If this value is Error, 1000.0000 is stored.
*5 If this value is other than standard difference display, a read error occurs in the
expansion unit. For calculation-only mode, a read error occurs in the main unit.
Group6
03C0H
(960)
Group6
Entry count
Indicates the number of items (entries) that can
be set in Group 6.
Parameter range: 11
R DINT
03C1H
(961)Product code
Indicates the product code.
Parameter range:
Main unit : 4000
Expansion unit : 4001
R DINT
03C2H
(962)Revision
Indicates the revision.
Parameter range: 0101H to FFFFHR DINT
03C3H
(963) to
03C7H
(967)
Reserved for system
03C8H
(968)
Product
name
Indicates the product name.
Parameter range:
Main unit : "GT-71A*/75A* "
Expansion unit : "GT-72A*/76A* "
R STRING
03C9H
(969) to
03D6H
(982)
Reserved for system
03D7H
(983)Series code
Indicates the series code.
Parameter range:
Main unit : 4000
Expansion unit : 4001
R DINT
03D8H
(984)Series version
Indicates the series version.
Parameter range: 1R DINT
03D9H
(985)Device type
Indicates the device type.
Parameter range: 0R DINT
03DAH
(986) to
03DFH
(991)
Reserved for system
Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -4-44
4-4 Message Communication
4
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
GT-7
0A
Serie
s
*6 If the sensor amplifier detection mode is other than peak-to-peak mode, a read
error occurs.
*7 Using this for discriminating the outer diameter of a cylinder makes it possible
to read the peak and bottom values during the measurement period.
*8 If the calculation function is not used, a read error occurs.
*9 If the key lock function is being used, a write error occurs.
*10 The timing status can be written only when the sensor amplifier setting satisfies
the following two conditions:
- The external timing function is selected as the timing type.
- Bank switching B (bank B) is selected as Input (pink/purple wire) func. 2.
*11 Read and write are enabled only for the main unit (ID01)
*12 If the settings cannot be used with the current number of sensor amplifiers, a
write error occurs.
*13 If calculation is performed, the expansion unit operates for the response time
set in the main unit.
*14 The main unit for which peak-to-peak mode, NG hold mode, or calculation-only
mode is set operates according to the external timing without reference to the
timing type setting.
*15 This attribute can be used only when the calculation function is used.
If the calculation setting is other than standard difference display, this attribute
is valid only for the main unit (ID01). Message communication reads the R.V.
value of each of the expansion units (ID01 to ID09) used for calculation from
the main unit.
If the calculation setting is standard difference display, this attribute is valid
only for expansion units. Message communication reads the R.V. value of each
expansion unit and the R.V. value of the main unit.
If the calculation function is used, the sensor amplifiers can hold only the
calculated P.V. values. Check the R.V. value of each sensor amplifier on
which the calculation results were based using R.V. (base of calc.).
Reference
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
4-4 Message Communication
4-45
4
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
GT-7
0A
Serie
s
The following describes how to perform message communication with a DL Object.
(1) Reading parameters from a sensor amplifier
(2) Writing parameters to a sensor amplifier
(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier
(4) Locking sensor amplifier operations
(5) Reading the number of decimal places from a sensor amplifier
(1) Reading parameters from a sensor amplifier
Message communication reads each parameter from the DL-EP1 and the sensor
amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.
Service code 0EH is used.
The following settings are required to use this object.
• Service Code
• Class ID
• Instance ID
• Attribute ID
• Commands
• Responses (when successful)
Using DL Object
Item Description Data Example
Service CodeDesignates "Parameter read (0EH)" (fixed
value).0EH
Class ID Designates DL Object(67H) (fixed value). 67H
Instance ID Designates the ID number. 0AH
Attribute IDDesignates the attribute ID to be read from
"Attribute".0324H(804)
Service Data There is no service data. -
Item Description Data Example
General status
A status (00H) is returned that indicates
normal completion of message
communication.
00H
Service response
data
The settings of the read parameter are
returned.0000H
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -4-46
4-4 Message Communication
4
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
GT-7
0A
Serie
s
• Responses (when unsuccessful)
For details on the attribute ID, settings, general status, and additional status of each
parameter, refer to "DL Object (Class ID:67H)" (Page 4-31) and "Attributes"
(Page 4-33).
(2) Writing parameters to a sensor amplifier
Message communication writes parameters to the DL-EP1 and the sensor amplifierconnected to the DL-EP1.Service code 10H is used.The following settings are required to use this object.• Service Code• Class ID• Instance ID• Attribute ID• Service Data
• Commands
• Responses (when successful)
Item Description Data Example
General status A general status for the service is returned 16H
Additional status An additional status is returned. -
Service response
dataThere is no service response data. -
Item Description Data Example
Service CodeDesignates "Parameter write (10H)" (fixed value).
10H
Class ID Designates DL Object(67H) (fixed value). 67H
Instance ID Designates the ID number. 05H
Attribute IDDesignates the attribute ID to be written from "Attribute".
0347H(839)
Service Data Writes the setting. 0064H
Item Description Data Example
General status
A status (00H) is returned that indicates normal completion of message communication. (The written parameters are reflected in the sensor amplifier at the status (00H) return timing.)
00H
Service response data
There is no service response data. -
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
4-4 Message Communication
4-47
4
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
GT-7
0A
Serie
s
• Responses (when unsuccessful)
For details on the attribute ID, settings, general status, and additional status of eachparameter, refer to "DL Object (Class ID:67H)" (Page 4-31) and "Attributes"(Page 4-33).
(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier
Message communication issues operation commands such as error clear to the
sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.
Service code 4BH is used.
The following settings are required to use this object.
• Service Code
• Class ID
• Instance ID
• Attribute ID
• Attribute IDs supported by the instance service 4BH (operation command)
The contents of processing performed by the instance service 4BH (operation
command) depend on the attribute ID to be selected.
The table below details the attribute IDs that can be selected.
Item Description Data Example
General status A general status for the service is returned 0EH
Additional status An additional status is returned. -
Service response data
There is no service response data. -
Name Description Attribute ID
Perform preset request Executes preset. 0301H(769)
Perform preset reset request Executes preset reset. 0302H(770)
Reset request Executes reset. 0303H(771)
Error clear requestClears the jam check error (Er.Chk)
and self-timing delay error (Er.dLY).0304H(772)
Initial reset request
Restores all the settings* to the default
settings.
• The span adjustment results set in
proofreading setting are not
initialized.
0305H(773)
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -4-48
4-4 Message Communication
4
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
GT-7
0A
Serie
s
• Commands
• Responses (when successful)
• Responses (when unsuccessful)
For details on the attribute ID, settings, general status, and additional status of each
parameter, refer to "DL Object (Class ID:67H)" (Page 4-31) and "Attributes"
(Page 4-33).
Item Description Data Example
Service CodeDesignates the "operation command (4BH)"
(fixed value).4BH
Class ID Designates DL Object (67H)(fixed value). 67H
Instance IDDesignates the ID number. The ID number
(00H) of the DL-EP1 cannot be designated.08H
Attribute ID
Designates the attribute ID to be designated
from "Attribute". "(3) Issuing operation
commands to a sensor amplifier" "Attribute
IDs supported by the instance service 4BH
(operation command)" (Page 4-47)
0301H(769)
Service Data There is no service response data. -
Item Description Data Example
General status
A status (00H) is returned that indicates
normal completion of message
communication.
00H
Service response
dataThere is no service response data. -
Item Description Data Example
General status A general status for the service is returned 08H
Additional status An additional status is returned. -
Service response
dataThere is no service response data. -
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
4-4 Message Communication
4-49
4
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
GT-7
0A
Serie
s
(4) Locking sensor amplifier operations
Message communication executes batch key lock for the sensor amplifier connected
to the DL-EP1.
Service code 4CH is used.
The following settings are required to use this object.
• Service Code
• Class ID
• Instance ID
• Attribute ID
• Service Data
• Commands
• Responses (when successful)
• Responses (when unsuccessful)
• If a sensor amplifier that does not support key lock is connected to theDL-EP1, the error code 09H is returned (the settings of the sensoramplifier are not changed).
• If the device is key locked, message communication cannot switch thebank.
Item Description Data Example
Service CodeDesignates the "batch lock setting (4CH)"
(fixed value).4CH
Class ID Designates DL Object (67H)(fixed value). 67H
Instance IDDesignates ID number 0 (00H) for issuing a
command to the DL-EP1 (fixed value).00H
Attribute ID There is no data. -
Service Data Designates the batch lock setting. 0001H
Item Description Data Example
General statusMessage communication has ended
normally.00H
Service response
dataThere is no service response data. -
Item Description Data Example
General status A general status for the service is returned 08H
Additional status An additional status is returned. -
Service response
dataThere is no service response data. -
Point
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -4-50
4-4 Message Communication
4
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
GT-7
0A
Serie
s
(5) Reading the number of decimal places in the parameter from a sensor
amplifier
Message communication reads the number of decimal places in the parameter from
the sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.
Service code 4DH is used.
The following settings are required to use this object.
• Service Code
• Class ID
• Instance ID
• Attribute ID
• Commands
• Responses (when successful)
• Responses (when unsuccessful)
For details on the attribute ID, settings, general status, and additional status of each
parameter, refer to "DL Object (Class ID:67H)" (Page 4-31) and "Attributes"
(Page 4-33).
Item Description Data Example
Service Code Designates parameter read (fixed value). 4DH
Class ID Designates DL Object (67H)(fixed value). 67H
Instance ID Designates the ID number. 01H
Attribute IDDesignates the attribute ID to be read from
"Attribute".
03A1H
(929)
Service Data There is no service data. -
Item Description Data Example
General statusMessage communication has ended
normally.00H
Service response
dataThe read decimal point position is returned. 04H
Item Description Data Example
General status A general status for the service is returned 14H
Additional status An additional status is returned. -
Service response
dataThere is no service response data. -
5-1- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
5Communicating with
IG Series
This chapter describes the configuration of memory that
communicates with the EtherNet/IP compatible network unit
and a communication timing chart.
5-1 What is EtherNet/IP?.......................................... 5-2
5-2 DL-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication Function ... 5-3
5-3 Cyclic communication......................................... 5-5
5-4 Message Communication................................. 5-21
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -5-2
5
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IG S
erie
s
5-1 What is EtherNet/IP?
EtherNet/IP is an industrial communication network with open specifications. The
specifications are managed by ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendor Association, Inc.).
Industrial protocol has been combined with the Ethernet and standardized as Ether-
Net/IP (Industrial Protocol).
Communication is realized by combining the protocols known as Common Industrial
Protocol (CIP) with TCP/IP and Ethernet. This allows regular Ethernet to be used
together with the network.
Before starting EtherNet/IP communication, one of the devices must open a
communication line called a "connection" with the other device. The side which
opens the connection is called the "scanner", and the side to be opened is called the
"adaptor". (The DL-EP1 is an adaptor.)
EtherNet/IP includes cyclic communication (Implicit messaging) which sends and
receives data periodically. Message communication (Explicit messaging) which
sends and receives commands and responses at a time specified by the user.
Cyclic communication enables you to set RPI (Requested Packet Interval) according
to the priority of the data to be exchanged, allowing the entire communication load to
be adjusted for data exchange.
Message communication enables you to exchange the required commands and
responses at the required timing. Message communication is used for applications
which do not require the punctuality of cyclic communication, such as reading and
writing adaptor settings.
What is EtherNet/IP?
Scanner
Adaptor Adaptor Adaptor
High speed(Communication cycle: 10 ms)
Regular speed(Communication cycle: 100 ms)
Low speed (Communication cycle: 1000 ms)
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 5-3
5
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IG S
erie
s
5-2 DL-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication Function
This section describes the EtherNet/IP functions supported by the DL-EP1.
The DL-EP1 functions as an EtherNet/IP adaptor, and supports both cyclic and
message EtherNet/IP communications.
The EtherNet/IP scanner can use the following functions:
Output
Comparator Value
・・・・・・Error information
External input
Setting value
Output
Comparator Value
・・・・・・Error information
External input
Setting value
IN area
OUT area
Output
Current value
Error information
External input
EtherNet/IP scanner DL-EP1
Sensor amplifier
Message communication
Output
Comparator Value
・・・・・・Error information
IN area
OUT areaDirect read/write of various parameters
Cyclic communicationExternal input
Setting value
Cyclic communication
Overview of Communication Methods
Function of sensor amplifier
Communication Methods
Cyclic communication(Page 5-5)
Message Communication(Page 5-21)
Read status
Read output
Read current value
Execute external input
Change bank number
X
Rewrite setting value
Motion command
Read current value, setting,
and status
Read number of decimal
places
Rewrite setting value
Lock all
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
5-2 DL-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication Function
5-4
5
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IG S
erie
s
Cyclic communication
This function sends and receives data between the scanner and DL-EP1 at the set
RPI (Requested Packet Interval). The function can exchange data such as the sensor
amplifier's output signals and comparator values and error status without ladder
programs.
Configurations such as RPI and data size for cyclic communication are seton the scanner side.In a network which has many connected devices, including EtherNet/IPdevices, a delay or packet loss could occur if a large load is constantly ortemporarily applied on the network. Verify the settings carefully beforeoperation.
Message communication
Message communication can be used for applications which do not require a
punctuality like cyclic communication.
In message communication, various parameters, including data which can be
exchanged with cyclic communication, can be read and written. Functions specific
to sensors such as the sensor amplifier preset function can also be executed.
PLC EtherNet/IP scanner
RPI=3 (ms)* RPI=0.5 (ms)*
RPI=5 (ms)*
RPI=10 (ms)*
Various EtherNet/IP adaptors
Ethernet
* RPI (Requested Packet Interval) can be set individually for each connection.
Point
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 5-5
5
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IG S
erie
s
5-3 Cyclic communication
This section describes the cyclic communication functions and how to use them.
What is cyclic communication?
Cyclic communication is a function that exchanges data with the EtherNet/IP device
in a cyclic manner (at a set cycle).
In cyclic communication, data can be exchanged when one device successfully
opens a logical communication line called a "connection" with the other device.
The side which opens the connection is called the scanner, and the side to be
opened is called the adaptor. (The DL-EP1 is an adaptor.)
Cyclic communication is started in the following procedures:
(1) The scanner requests the adaptor to open the connection.
(2) The adapter side checks compatibility.
(3) If no error occurs as a result the compatibility check, the adapter opens the
connection.
(* If an error is found during the compatibility check, the adapter does not open
the connection.)
"Checking the Device Compatibility" (Page 5-20)
Data is exchanged between the EtherNet/IP scanner, DL-EP1 and each sensor
amplifier as follows:
To carry out EtherNet/IP communication with a scanner which does not
support cyclic communication (Allen-Bradley SLC5/05 Series, etc.), use
"Message Communication" (Page 5-21).
(1) Request connection open
(3) Open connection
(2) Check compatibility
Output data
Data reflected in thescanner
Input data
The data output from thescanner is stored by theDL-EP1.
EtherNet/IP scanner DL-EP1 Sensor amplifier
IN area
OUT area
Cyclic communication
Data betweensensors isrefreshed
Cyclic communication
Data betweensensors isrefreshed
Reference
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
5-3 Cyclic communication
5-6
5
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IG S
erie
s
The following settings are required to execute cyclic communication with the DL-
EP1.
[DL-EP1]
The DL-EP1 does not require any setting.
[Scanner]
(1) Set the connection to be used.
(2) Set the devices used in cyclic communication.
Refer to the scanner manual for details on how to make the above settings.
(* No ladder program is required when cyclic communication is used.)
Cyclic communication can use the following functions:
(1) Read status
(2) Read output (Page 5-17)
Outputs that can be read: HIGH output, LOW output, GO output, edge check
output
(3) Read P.V. value (Page 5-18)
(4) Execute external input (Page 5-19)
Inputs that can be used: Zero shift, timing, reset, standard waveform registration,
laser emission stop
Configuring Cyclic Communication
Actions which can be completed with Cyclic Communication
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
5-3 Cyclic communication
5-7
5
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IG S
erie
s
EtherNet/IP requires that a connection must be opened from the scanner when cyclic
communication is started. There are various types of connections, and the type
usable by each device is defined in the EDS file.
The DL-EP1 can use the following connections:
• Each connection's trigger timing is executed cyclically. The connection
type supports both point-to-point and multicast.
• The details of each application type are as follows:
Exclusive Owner:This connection allows simultaneous setting of both data
transmission from the scanner to the DL-EP1 and data
transmission from the DL-EP1 to the scanner. This setting is
made not only when the scanner monitors the adaptor (DL-EP1)
data, but also when it issues external inputs and rewrites the
settings, etc. Multiple "Exclusive Owner" connections cannot be
opened to one adaptor (DL-EP1).
Input Only:This connection allows only data transmission from the DL-EP1
to the scanner. This setting is made when the scanner only
monitors adaptor (DL-EP1) data. Multiple scanners can open an
"Input Only" connection simultaneously to one adaptor (DL-
EP1).
(* To simultaneously open connections from multiple scanners,
set the Connection Type to Multicast.
Usable Connections
NoConnection
NameInput/Output
Assembly Instance
Size(Byte)
RPI Range (in 0.5 ms)
Application Type
1
Monitor Data
And External
Input*1
DL-EP1 to
scanner64H (100) 168
0.5 ms to
10000 ms
Exclusive
OwnerScanner to
DL-EP165H (101) 10
2Monitor Data
(Input Only)*1
DL-EP1 to
scanner64H (100) 168
0.5 ms to
10000 msInput Only
Scanner to
DL-EP1FEH (254) 0
Reference
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
5-3 Cyclic communication
5-8
5
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IG S
erie
s
The data from the DL-EP1 is assigned to the EtherNet/IP scanner's IN area.
The data such as 16-bit data extending over multiple bytes is stored into
an area which starts with an even address in order from the lowest-order
byte.
Example)
Assignment to IN Area (DL-EP1 to Scanner)
DL-EP1 data
Scanner IN area
Address 0Address 1
Address 167
Monitor Data(Assembly Instance: 100)
1-byte (8-bit) data
Reference
16-bit dataAddress 40 to 41
16-bit dataAddress 42 to 43
12H 34H
56H 78H
High-order byte Low-order byte
High-order byte Low-order byte
56H43
78H42
12H41
34H40
32-bit dataAddress 48 to 51
12H51
34H50
56H49
78H48
12H 34H 56H 78H
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
5-3 Cyclic communication
5-9
5
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IG S
erie
s
Monitor Data (84 Words (168 Bytes)) Assembly Instance (Instance ID): 64H
This is the device map for the monitor data to be assigned to the IN area.
For details on each parameter, refer to "Parameter List" (Page 5-11).
For details on current value 0 and current value 1, refer to "Current Value 0/
Current Value 1" (Page 5-12).
Name Address(Byte) bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
Status
0 Reserved for systemDL-EP1
Error Status
1 Error StatusWarningStatus
Reserved for system
SensorError
Status
2 ID08 . . . . . ID01
3Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
SensorWarningStatus
4 ID08 . . . . . ID01
5Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
Current Value 0
OverRange
6 ID08 . . . . . ID01
7Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
Current Value 0UnderRange
8 ID08 . . . . . ID01
9Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
Current Value 0Invalid
10 ID08 . . . . . ID01
11Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
Current Value 1
OverRange
12 ID08 . . . . . ID01
13Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
Current Value 1UnderRange
14 ID08 . . . . . ID01
15Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
Current Value 1Invalid
16 ID08 . . . . . ID01
17Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
Output 1 (HIGH)
18 ID08 . . . . . ID01
19Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
Output 2 (LOW)
20 ID08 . . . . . ID01
21Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
Output 3 (GO)
22 ID08 . . . . . ID01
23Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
Output 4 (Edge check)
24 ID08 . . . . . ID01
25Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
Output 5(Unassigned)
26 ID08 . . . . . ID01
27Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
5-3 Cyclic communication
5-10
5
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IG S
erie
s
External Input
Response 1(Zero shift)
28 ID08 . . . . . ID01
29Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
External Input
Response 2(Timing)
30 ID08 . . . . . ID01
31Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
External Input
Response 3(Preset)
32 ID08 . . . . . ID01
33Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
External Input
Response 4(Standard waveform)
34 ID08 . . . . . ID01
35Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
External Input
Response 5(Laser
emission stop)
36 ID08 . . . . . ID01
37Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
ErrorID Number
40Current Error ID Number (16-bit unsigned integer)
41
ErrorCode
42Current Error Code (16-bit unsigned integer)
43
WarningID Number
44Current Warning ID Number (16-bit unsigned integer)
45
Warning Code
46Current Warning Code (16-bit unsigned integer)
47
Current Value 0
(P.V. value)
48
ID Number 1 (Current Value 0) (32-bit signed integer)49
50
51
: :
104
ID Number 15 (Current Value 0) (32-bit signed integer)105
106
107
Current Value 1
(Unassigned)
108
ID Number 1 (Current Value 1) (32-bit signed integer)109
110
111
: :
164
ID Number 15 (Current Value 1) (32-bit signed integer)165
166
167
Name Address(Byte) bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
5-3 Cyclic communication
5-11
5
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IG S
erie
s
Parameter List
Item Description
DL-EP1 Error
Status
The error status of the DL-EP1 is output.
ON: An error occurred.
OFF: No error occurred.
Warning Status (Unassigned)
Error Status
The error status of the DL-EP1 or the error statuses of all the connected sensor
amplifiers are output.
When ON, a value is stored in "Error ID Number" and "Error Code". When OFF, 0
is stored in "Error ID Number" and "Error Code".
ON: An error occurred in the DL-EP1 or in any of the connected sensor
amplifiers.
OFF: No error occurred in the DL-EP1 or in the connected sensor amplifiers.
Sensor Error Status
The target ID number bit of the sensor amplifier where the error occurred is
output.
ON: An error occurred in the sensor amplifier with the target ID number.
OFF: No error occurred in the sensor amplifier with the target ID number.
Sensor Warning
Status(Unassigned)
Current Value n
Over Range
(n: 0 to 1)
The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number
is compared with the measurement upper limit and the comparison result is
output.
ON: The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID
number is greater than the measurement upper limit.
OFF: The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID
number is less than the measurement upper limit.
(* The current value 1 does not exist in the IG Series.)
Current Value n
Under Range
(n: 0 to 1)
The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number
is compared with the measurement lower limit and the comparison result is
output.
ON: The current value of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is less
than the measurement lower limit.
OFF: The current value of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is
greater than the measurement lower limit.
(* The current value 1 does not exist in the IG Series.)
Current Value n
Invalid
(n: 0 to 1)
The status of current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID
number is output.
ON: The current value of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is
invalid.
OFF: The current value of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is
valid (normal).
(* The current value 1 does not exist in the IG Series.)
Output n (n: 1 to 5)
The ON/OFF status of output n (n: 1 to 5) of the sensor amplifier with the target
ID number is output.
Output 1: HIGH output
Output 2: LOW output
Output 3: GO output
Output 4: Edge check output
Output 5: (Unassigned)
ON: Output n is output.
OFF: Output n is not output.
External Input
Response
n (n: 1 to 5)
An external input response is output when the corresponding external input
request n (n: 1 to 5) is made via communication.
The ID number of an unexisting external input is also output.
ON: The external input request was made (ON).
OFF: The external input request was not made (OFF).
For details, refer to "Entering an external input to a sensor amplifier"
(Page 5-18).
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
5-3 Cyclic communication
5-12
5
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IG S
erie
s
Current Value 0/Current Value 1
Error ID Number
If "Error Status" in ON, the ID number of the DL-EP1 where the error occurred and
the ID numbers of sensor amplifiers connected to the DL-EP1 are stored (the ID
number of the DL-EP1 is 0). If no error has occurred, 0 is stored. If an error occurs
in multiple IDs, the ID number of the DL-EP1 or sensor amplifier where the highest
priority error occurred is stored.
Error priority:
(1) DL-EP1 error
(2) Sensor amplifier errors (the error with the smallest error code has the
highest priority)*
* If the same error code occurs in multiple sensor amplifiers, the error
with the smallest ID number has the highest priority.
Error Code
If "Error Status" is ON, the error code is stored. If no error has occurred, 0 is
stored. If an error occurs in multiple IDs, the error code of the DL-EP1 or sensor
amplifier where the highest priority error occurred is stored.
Error priority:
(1) DL-EP1 error
(2) Sensor amplifier errors (the error with the smallest error code has the
highest priority)*
* If the same error code occurs in multiple sensor amplifiers, the error
with the smallest ID number has the highest priority.
"Error code list" (Page 5-13)
Warning ID
Number(Unassigned)
Warning Code (Unassigned)
Current Value n
(n: 0 to 1)
The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier is stored. The current value
0 always exists without reference to sensor amplifier models. Whether the
current value 1 exists depends on sensor amplifier models. If the current value
1 does not exist, 0 is stored. The contents displayed in the current value n (n: 0
to 1) depend on the use conditions.
(* The current value 1 does not exist in the IG Series.)
"Current Value 0/Current Value 1" (Page 5-12)
Item Description
Name Model Conditions Function
Current Value 0Main unit/
expansion unit
-P.V. value
Current Value 1Main unit/
expansion unit- (Unassigned)
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
5-3 Cyclic communication
5-13
5
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IG S
erie
s
Error code list
The following error codes may occur in the DL-EP1 and sensor amplifiers.
DL-EP1
ErrorID
NumberCode Description Cause Actions
0
0 No error - -
51Unassigned ID
error
The main unit assigned no ID
within 10 seconds after the
DL-EP1 had been started.
• Check if the number of
connected sensor
amplifiers exceeds the
maximum number of
sensor amplifiers that can
be connected to the main
unit.
"Connectable Sensor
Amplifiers" (Page 9-2)
• Check the connection with
the sensor amplifiers and
then turn the power on
again.
If this error cannot be
recovered, contact your
nearest KEYENCE office.
52Start-time
communication error
Communication between
sensor amplifiers ended
abnormally before ID
assignment completion.
Check the connection with
the sensor amplifiers and
then turn the power on again.
If this error cannot be
recovered, contact your
nearest KEYENCE office.
53
Unsupported
sensor amplifier
connection error
A sensor amplifier not
supported by the DL-EP1 is
connected.
Check the model of the
connected sensor amplifier
and remove the sensor
amplifier if it is not supported
by the DL-EP1.
54 Mixed model error
Sensor amplifiers outside the
specifications have a mixed
connection.
Check if the models are
mixable.
"Mixed Connection of
Sensor amplifiers" (Page 9-3)
55Start-time
communication error
ID number assignment is
successful but
communication failed during
the subsequent initial
communication.
Check the connection with
the sensor amplifiers and
then turn the power on again.
If this error cannot be
recovered, contact your
nearest KEYENCE office.
56Current limitation
error
The number of connected
sensor amplifiers exceeds
the allowable range.
Use sensor amplifiers within
the allowable range.
57
Communication
error between
sensor amplifiers
An error occurred during
communication between
sensor amplifiers.
Check if there is a noise
source around the DL-EP1.
If the sensor communication
indicator is flashing red, turn
the power on again.
70IP address
duplicate error
The IP address is the same
as another device.
Check the IP address
setting.
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
5-3 Cyclic communication
5-14
5
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IG S
erie
s
IG Series
0
100 System error The IP address is incorrect.
Contact your nearest
KEYENCE office.
101 System errorA default gateway setting
error occurred.
102 System error
An attempt to read data in
EEPROM such as the MAC
address has failed.
103 System errorAn attempt to start the
protocol stack has failed.
104 System errorAn attempt to access
FlashROM has failed.
150 System errorThe number of held IDs is
incorrect.
151 System errorThe number of sensors is
incorrect.
152 System error An initial read error occurred.
ErrorID
NumberCode Description Cause Actions
01H to
0AH
(Each
ID
number)
01H
Sensor amplifier
error 1 of each ID
number
Overcurrent error
Refer to the IG Series User's
Manual.
02H
Sensor amplifier
error 2 of each ID
number
EEPROM error
03H
Sensor amplifier
error 3 of each ID
number
Head error
04H
Sensor amplifier
error 4 of each ID
numbe
T/R reverse connection error
05H
Sensor amplifier
error 5 of each ID
number
Receiver EEPROM error
06H
Sensor amplifier
error 6 of each ID
number
Receiver error
07H
Sensor amplifier
error 7 of each ID
number
Transmitter error
08H
Sensor amplifier
error 8 of each ID
number
Transmitter laser error
09H
Sensor amplifier
error 9 of each ID
number
Model mismatch error
0AH
Sensor amplifier
error 10 of each ID
number
Head error
(Standard Waveform)
ErrorID
NumberCode Description Cause Actions
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
5-3 Cyclic communication
5-15
5
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IG S
erie
s
Warning code list
No warning code occurs in the DL-EP1 and in the IG Series sensor amplifiers
connected to the DL-EP1.
The data to the sensor amplifier is assigned to the OUT area of the EtherNet/IP
scanner.
External Input (5 Words (10 Bytes)) assembly instance (Instance ID): 65H
01H to
0AH
(Each ID number)
0BH
Sensor amplifier
error 11 of each ID
number
Standard waveform error 1-4
Refer to the IG Series User's Manual.
0CH
Sensor amplifier
error 12 of each ID
number
Communication error
0DH
Sensor amplifier
error 13 of each ID
number
Additional setting error
0EH
Sensor amplifier
error 14 of each ID
number
Calculation error
ErrorID
NumberCode Description Cause Actions
Assignment to OUT Area (Scanner to DL-EP1)
DL-EP1 data
Scanner's OUT area
Address 0Address 1
Address 9
External Input(Assembly Instance: 101)
1-byte (8-bit) data
Name Address(Byte)
bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
External
Input
Request 1
(Zero shift)
0 ID08 . . . . . ID01
1Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
External
Input
Request 2
(Timing)
2 ID08 . . . . . ID01
3Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
External
Input
Request 3
(Reset)
4 ID08 . . . . . ID01
5Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
5-3 Cyclic communication
5-16
5
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IG S
erie
s
Parameter List
External
Input
Request 4
(standard
waveform)
6 ID08 . . . . . ID01
7Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
External
Input
Request 5
(Laser
emission
stop)
8 ID08 . . . . . ID01
9Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
Name Address(Byte) bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
Name Function Operation
External
Input
Request 1
Zero shift
ON: Executes zero shift. Executing zero shift turns on external input
response 1.
OFF: Turns off external input response 1.
External
Input
Request 2
Timing
execution
ON: Turns on timing. Turning on timing also turns on external input
response 2.
OFF: Turns off timing. Turning off timing also turns off external input
response 2.
External
Input
Request 3
Reset Request
ON: Executes reset. Executing reset turns on external input
response 3.
OFF: Turns off external input response 3.
External
Input
Request 4
Registering the
standard
waveform
ON: Registers the standard waveform (gain adjustment). Registering
the standard waveform (gain adjustment) turns on external input
response 4.
OFF: Turns off external input response 4.
External
Input
Request 5
Laser emission
stop
ON: Stops laser emission. Stopping laser emission turns on external
input response 5.
OFF: Emits laser. Emitting laser turns off external input response 5.
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
5-3 Cyclic communication
5-17
5
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IG S
erie
s
The following describes how the scanner cyclically communicates with the DL-EP1
(cyclic communication).
"Reading an output from a sensor amplifier" (Page 5-17)
"Entering an external input to a sensor amplifier" (Page 5-18)
"Reading comparator values (P.V. values) from sensor amplifiers" (Page 5-19)
For the message communication method, refer to "Message communication"
(Page 5-4).
Reading an output from a sensor amplifier
Available outputs: HIGH, LOW, GO, and edge check
Device assignments: "Monitor Data (84 Words (168 Bytes)) Assembly Instance
(Instance ID): 64H" (Page 5-9)
This example shows how to read the HIGH output from the sensor amplifier ID01.
(1)The output from the sensor amplifier entered into the IN area via cyclic
communication.
Communication Methods
PLCOutput of sensor amplifierIN area [18] Bit0
Sensor amplifier (1)Output
HIGH output of ID 01
10
ONOFF
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
5-3 Cyclic communication
5-18
5
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IG S
erie
s
Entering an external input to a sensor amplifier
Available external inputs: Zero shift, timing, reset, standard waveform, laser emission
stop
Device assignments: "External Input (5 Words (10 Bytes)) assembly instance
(Instance ID): 65H" (Page 5-15)
This example shows how to enter a TIMING input to the sensor amplifier ID01.
(1)The device value in the OUT area to which an external input request was
assigned is linked via cyclic communication and the external input of the sensor
amplifier is turned on or off.
(2)You can check the input status of the sensor amplifier with the external input
response.
If the external input or input signal line from cyclic communication is ON,the sensor amplifier recognizes that the external input is ON and executestiming input or laser transmission stop input.
PLC (1)External Input requestOUT area [0]Bit0
(2)External Input responseIN area [30]Bit0
Sensor amplifierExternal InputTiming input 2 to ID 01
10
ONOFF
10
Point
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
5-3 Cyclic communication
5-19
5
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IG S
erie
s
Reading comparator values (P.V. values) from sensor amplifiers
Comparator values (P.V. values) are read from the IN area to which the ID number of
each sensor amplifier is assigned.
Device assignments: "Monitor Data (84 Words (168 Bytes)) Assembly Instance
(Instance ID): 64H" (Page 5-9)
This example shows how to read the comparator values from the sensor amplifiers
ID01, ID02, and ID03.
(1)When the comparator value of a sensor amplifier is updated, the new comparator
value is entered into the IN area via cyclic communication.
* If the comparator value is correct, the parameter range is -99.997 to +99.998. If
the current value is over range, under range, or invalid, the previous value is
retained without updating the current value.
(2)The properties of the comparator value (Current Value n Over Range (each bit of
IN area [6]), Current Value n Under Range (each bit of IN area [8]), and Current
Value n Invalid (each bit of IN area [10]) are entered. If the comparator value of a
sensor amplifier is "over", "under," or "invalid," the bit corresponding to the ID
number of that sensor amplifier is set to 1.
* For the IG Series, the comparator value is stored in the current value 0.
PLC (2)Comparator value propertyEach bit of IN [6, 8,10]
Comparator value of ID 01 1234 4567 6789
IN area [48 to 51]
Comparator value of ID 02 2345 5678 7890
IN area [52 to 55]
Comparator value of ID 03 3456 8901
IN area [56 to 59]
Sensor amplifierComparator value of ID 01 1234 4567 6789
Comparator value of ID 02 2345 5678 7890
Comparator value of ID 03 3456 8901
(1)
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
5-3 Cyclic communication
5-20
5
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IG S
erie
s
Compatibility check is a function executed when the scanner communicates with the
DL-EP1. This function checks if the device set with the scanner matches the DL-EP1
to prevent communicating with the wrong device. This function is executed when a
connection is opened.
When using scanners of other manufacturers
For how to use the scanners of other manufacturers, refer to the manual of each
scanner.
Checking the Device Compatibility
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 5-21
5
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IG S
erie
s
5-4 Message Communication
This section describes the message communication functions and how to use them.
What is Message communication (Explicit messaging)?
Message communication is a function that performs communication by issuing
commands using the objects and services (Service Codes) prepared for each
EtherNet/IP device. Message communication is used for applications which do not
require the punctuality of cyclic communication, such as reading and writing adaptor
settings.
The objects and service codes which can be used with message communication
include those which are specified as a standard and those which are unique to the
device. You can use the objects and services unique to the DL-EP1to monitor data,
to read and write parameters, and to perform operations such as reset.
The DL-EP1 message communication function supports CIP-defined
UCMM (unconnected) and Class 3 (connected) message communication.
Scanner DL-EP1 Sensor amplifier
Send
Receive
Receive
Send
(1) Message communication command
(3) Message communication response
(2) Interpret and execute command
Reference
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
5-4 Message Communication
5-22
5
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IG S
erie
s
The following settings are required to execute message communication with the DL-
EP1.
[DL-EP1]
The DL-EP1 does not require any setting.
[Scanner]
Set the applicable service, Class ID, Instance ID, Attribute ID, and service data, and
send the commands used for message communication. "Objects and Services"
(Page 5-25)
Refer to the scanner manual for details on the setting methods and applicable
commands.
The following lists the contents that can be executed by message communication
when the objects (DL Object) and services unique to the DL-EP1 are used.
(1) Reading data from a sensor amplifier
(2) Writing data to a sensor amplifier
(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier
(4) Locking sensor amplifier operations
(5) Reading the number of decimal places from a sensor amplifier
(1) Reading data from a sensor amplifier
Message communication reads parameters from the DL-EP1 and the sensor
amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.
"(1) Reading parameters from a sensor amplifier" (Page 5-52)
Configuring Message Communication
Actions which can be Completed with Message Communication
Command
Response:12345
IG Comparator values (P. V. values): 12345
DL-EP1Scanner
<Details of command>Service code: 0EHClass ID: 67HInstance ID: 01HAttribute ID: 0325H (805)
IG
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
5-4 Message Communication
5-23
5
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IG S
erie
s
(2) Writing data to a sensor amplifier
Message communication writes parameters to the DL-EP1 and the sensor
amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.
"(2) Writing parameters to a sensor amplifier" (Page 5-53)
(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier
Message communication issues operation commands such as preset to the DL-
EP1 and the sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.
"(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier" (Page 5-54)
(4) Locking sensor amplifier operations
Message communication locks operations by keys on the sensor amplifier
connected to the DL-EP1.
* If a key is locked, message communication cannot switch a bank.
"(4) Locking sensor amplifier operations" (Page 5-57)
Command:500
Response
IG Auto hold trigger level: 100→500
DL-EP1Scanner
<Details of command>Service code: 10HClass ID: 67HInstance ID: 01HAttribute ID: 0389H(905)Service data: 500
IG
Command
Response
Zero shift execution by IG
DL-EP1Scanner
<Details of command>Service code: 4BHClass ID: 67HInstance ID: 01HAttribute ID: 0301H(769)
IG
Command
Response
Changes using thesensor amplifier keys are locked.
DL-EP1Scanner
<Details of command>Service code: 4CHClass ID: 67HInstance ID: 00HService data: 01H
IG
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
5-4 Message Communication
5-24
5
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IG S
erie
s
(5) Reading the number of decimal places from a sensor amplifier
Message communication reads the number of decimal places of settings read
from the sensor amplifier.
"(5) Reading the number of decimal places in the parameter from a sensor
amplifier" (Page 5-58)
For the IG Series, if the current value is 12.53 mm, data is stored as
follows:
Data: 12530
Number of decimal places: 3
Perform calculation from the read data and the number of decimal places.
Command
Response
DL-EP1Scanner
<Details of command>Service code: 4CHClass ID: 67HInstance ID: 01HAttribute ID: 0325H(805)
IG
Reads the number of decimal places of the IG comparator value (P.V. value).
Reference
12530 12.530 12.53mmNumber of decimal places
3 2 1
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
5-4 Message Communication
5-25
5
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IG S
erie
s
Message communication uses objects and services to send and receive data.
Executing a service (1) for a DL-EP1 object enables data read (2), parameter
change (3), specified operation execution (4), and read of the number of decimal
places (5), etc.
Taking DL Object as an example, one instance is provided for each of the sensor
amplifiers connected to the DL-EP1. Reading the attributes corresponding to the
comparator values (P.V. values) of the respective instances using a service makes it
possible to read the comparator values (P.V. values) of the sensor amplifiers
corresponding to the respective instances.
Objects and Services
Parameter change(3)
Operation command execution(4)
Read of the number of decimal places(5)
DL-EP1 or sensor amplifier connected to DL-EP1
Object(1)
(2)
Service
Data output
ID: 0324H Output
Attribute
ID: 0325H P.V. value
ID: 0326H R.V. value
DL Object(Class ID: 67H)
DL-EP1Instance ID: 00H
ID number 1 sensorInstance ID: 01H
ID number 2 sensorInstance ID: 02H
:
:
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
5-4 Message Communication
5-26
5
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IG S
erie
s
• In EtherNet/IP (CIP), the method called "object modeling" is used to
express a device. The device is handled as a group of objects. Objects
abstractly express the configuration elements in the device. A class is a
group of objects expressing the configuration elements of the same
type. An instance actually expresses a specific object contained in a
class. Each instance in the class has the same attribute group, but each
uses a unique attribute value.
• To execute a service for the DL-EP1, send a command from the scanner.
The DL-EP1 then returns the service execution results as a response. A
command requires a service, class ID (Class ID), instance ID (Instance
ID), and attribute ID (Attribute ID)*. When a parameter is written, the
command also requires a setting (service data).
* Some of the commands to be used may not require the above items.
"Basic Format and Processing Flow of Message Communication"
(Page 5-28)
Reference
Command Response
・Service
・Class ID
・Instance ID
・Attribute ID*
・Service data*
・General Status
・Additional Status*
・Service response data*
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
5-4 Message Communication
5-27
5
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IG S
erie
s
The following describes the objects usable by the DL-EP1.
Objects Usable by DL-EP1
Command
Response
DLObject
MessageRouterObject
ConnectionManagerObject
AssemblyObject
IdentityObject
TCP/IPInterfaceObject
EthernetLink
Object
EtherNet/IP unit
Object Name Class ID Description ReferencePage
DL Object 67H
This object provides the statuses of the DL-EP1 and
the sensor amplifiers connected to the DL-EP1 and
writes and reads parameters. This object is unique to
the DL-EP1.
5-31
Identity Object 01HThis object provides identification information,
general information and a reset service, etc.9-22
Message Router
Object02H
This object provides connection points for message
communication.9-25
Assembly Object 04H
This object provides access to the devices via cyclic
communication. This object can be used to send data
to the devices that do not support cyclic
communication.
9-26
Connection
Manager Object06H
This object is used for connection-type
communication.9-28
TCP/IP Interface
ObjectF5H
This object provides the structure for setting the TCP/
IP network interface. You can set an IP address,
subnet mask and gateway, etc., in this object.
9-30
Ethernet Link Object F6H This object provides Ethernet status information. 9-34
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
5-4 Message Communication
5-28
5
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IG S
erie
s
The EtherNet/IP scanner and the DL-EP1 exchange Explicit messages for
communication. The following provides a basic example of the command format of
Explicit messages to be sent and the response format returned from the DL-EP1 to
the scanner.
Commands
• Command format
*1 For details on usable services, refer to "DL Object (Class ID:67H)" (Page 5-
31) or "Objects Usable by DL-EP1" (Page 9-20).
Responses
• Response format
Basic Format and Processing Flow of Message Communication
Item Description
Service code*1 Designates the service code to be used (Service Code).
Class ID Designates a class ID (Class ID) tailored to the service*1 to be used.
Instance IDDesignates an instance ID (Instance ID) tailored to the service*1 to be
used.
Attribute IDDesignates an attribute ID (Attribute ID) tailored to the service*1 to be
used.
Service Data Designates service data (Service Data) tailored to the service*1 to be used.
Item Description
General statusReturns a general status in respect to the command (General Status). 00H
is returned when the command ends normally.
Additional status Returns the additional status (Additional Status).
Service response
data
Returns service response data Service Response Data) in respect to the
command.
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
5-4 Message Communication
5-29
5
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IG S
erie
s
Command processing order and error response
Check whether each ID is within the supported range in the following order:
Supplement for object processing
• Get_Attribute_Single and Get_Attributes_All are executed, ignoring send service
data.
• The service (Get_Attributes_All, Reset) that does not designate an attribute ID is
executed, ignoring Attribute ID.
• If Set_Attribute_Single is designated for an attribute which cannot be written (Set),
"0EH" (Attribute not settable) is returned as the general status.
• If Set_Attribute_Single for the writable attribute is designated and the writing size
is less than the attribute size, the general status "13H" (Not enough data) is
returned. If the writing size is greater than the attribute size, the service is
executed, ignoring the excessive data.
Class ID check
Yes
No
Instance ID check
Yes
No
Service check
Yes
No
Attribute ID check
Executes supported service process
Yes
No
Path Destination Unknown (05H)returned as general status
Path Destination Unknown (05H)returned as general status
Service not Supported (08H)returned as general status
Attribute not Supported (14H)returned as general status
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
5-4 Message Communication
5-30
5
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IG S
erie
s
Reading the attribute ID
Example) Excerpt from DL Object attribute ID
Data Type
The data type is defined in the EtherNet/IP specifications as follows:
Reading the DL Object Table
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
Instance ID
Attribute ID
Name Description Attribute Data Type
00H74H
(116)
Output
1
Stores the HIGH output (output 1) status of each
sensor amplifier. When HIGH is output, the bit
corresponding to the ID number of the sensor
amplifier is set to ON.
Bit 0 to bit 3 ID number 1 to ID number 4
Bit 4 to bit 15: Reserved for system
R WORD
Item Description
(1) Instance ID Represents the instance ID in hexadecimal notation.
(2) Attribute ID
Represents the attribute ID in hexadecimal (decimal) notation.
(* The parameter number 500 is the calculation function (attribute
ID0381H(897).)
(3) Name Represents the attribute name.
(4) DescriptionDescribes the attribute and represents the data to be read and the range of
parameters that can be set.
(5) Attribute
Represents the direction of services for the attribute ID.
R (Read): The parameter read service (Get_Attribute_Single,
Get_Attributes_All) can be used to read the attribute value.
W (Write): The parameter write service (Set_Attribute_Single) can be used
to write the attribute value.
(6) Data type Represents the attribute data type.
Data Type DescriptionRange
Minimum Maximum
INT Signed 16-bit integer -32768 32767
UINT Unsigned 16-bit integer 0 65535
DINT Signed 32-bit integer -2147483648 2147483647
WORD Bit string: 16 bits - -
DWORD Bit string: 32 bits - -
STRING
Character string
(2-byte length information +
1-byte array per character)
- -
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
5-4 Message Communication
5-31
5
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IG S
erie
s
The DL Object provides the DL-EP1 connection status and device write/read. This
object is unique to the DL-EP1.
Services
*1 This service cannot be used in the DL-EP1 (instance ID:00H).*2 This service cannot be used in the sensor amplifier (instance ID: 01H to 0FH)
connected to the DL-EP1.
*3 In the DL-EP1 (instance ID: 00H), this service can be used as the attribute ID 90H to 9EH and A0H to AEH.
DL Object (Class ID:67H)
Service Code Service Name Description
0EHParameter
read
Reads parameters from the DL-EP1 and the sensor amplifier
connected to the DL-EP1. For examples of using this service,
refer to "(1) Reading parameters from a sensor amplifier"
(Page 5-52).
10HParameter
write
Writes parameters to the DL-EP1 and the sensor amplifier
connected to the DL-EP1. For examples of using this service,
refer to "(2) Writing parameters to a sensor amplifier"
(Page 5-53).
4BH*1 Operation
command
Requests processing such as zero shift and tuning from the
sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1. The contents of
processing that can be requested differ per sensor amplifier.
Set the contents of processing with the attribute ID in the
object.
refer to "Attribute IDs supported by the instance service
4BH (operation command)" (Page 5-55). For examples of
using this service, refer to
"(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier"
(Page 5-54).
4CHBatch lock
setting*2
Collectively performs lock or unlock for all the connected
sensor amplifiers. Even if a lock setting that is not supported
by sensor amplifiers is designated, locks all the sensor
amplifiers without interrupting processing. Then, error code
09H is returned as a response.
Setting 0: Not lock
Setting 1: Key lock
"Lock setting" (Page 5-32)
For examples of using this service, refer to "(4) Locking
sensor amplifier operations" (Page 5-57).
* If a key is locked, message communication cannot switch
the bank.
4DH
Acquisition of the
number of decimal
places *3
Acquires the number of decimal places of the designated
parameter. For examples of using this service, refer to "(5)
Reading the number of decimal places in the parameter from
a sensor amplifier" (Page 5-58).
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
5-4 Message Communication
5-32
5
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IG S
erie
s
• Lock setting
Responses
The responses made when each service is used are as follows:
(1) Parameter read: : Service code 0EH
(2) Parameter write: : Service code 10H
(3) Operation command: : Service code 4BH
(4) Batch lock setting: : Service code 4CH
(5) Read of number of decimal places: : Service code 4DH
Setting Description
0 Does not execute lock.
1Executes key lock (inhibition of operations other than basic screen display
switching and [RESET] button).
GeneralStatus
Command TypeDescription
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
00H Normal end
05H The instance ID is out of range.
08H - - -The designated instance ID does not support this service or
cannot be executed.
09H - - - - The written data is out of range.
0CH - - -
• Parameter write was executed for the function controlled
by cyclic communication.
• An attempt to execute the operation command has failed.
Check if the sensor amplifier can execute the operation
command.
0EH - - - -
• An attempt was made to write data to the attribute ID that
cannot be written or to the attribute ID that is in the
unwritable status.
• The written data is out of range.
10H - - - -
An attempt was made to read data from the attribute ID that
cannot be read or from the attribute ID that is in the
unreadable status.
13H - -The service data size is less than the defined size.
The defined data size is stored in the additional status.
14H - The attribute ID is out of range.
16H -The sensor amplifier corresponding to the designated
instance ID is not connected.
1FH
• This service is supported by the designated instance ID
but cannot be used by the designated attribute ID.
(Additional status: C350H)
• In the current mode, the designated setting cannot be
written into the parameter.
(Additional status: C351H)
• The DL-EP1 is now initializing communication. (Additional
status: C352H)
FEH System error. Contact your nearest KEYENCE office.
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
5-4 Message Communication
5-33
5
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IG S
erie
s
Attributes
Instance ID
Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
00H
64H
(100)Status
Indicates the status of this unit and connected
sensor amplifier.
Bit0: DL-EP1 Error Status
Bit 1 to bit 13: Reserved for system
Bit14: Warning Status
Bit15: Error Status
R WORD
65H
(101)
Sensor Error
Status
Indicates the error status of the connected
senosr amplifiers. If an error occurs, the bit of the
corresponding ID number of amplifier is turned
to ON.
Bit 0 to bit 3: ID number 1 to ID number 4
Bit 4 to bit 15: Reserved for system
R WORD
66H
(102)
Warning
Status(Unassigned) R WORD
67H
(103)Reserved for system
68H
(104)
Current
Value 0
Property
Indicates the status of current value 0 of each
amplifier. If the current value 0 is “0ver Range",
“Under Range", or "Invalid", the bit
corresponding to the ID number is turned ON.
Bit 0 to bit 3: ID number 1 to ID number 4
Bit 4 to bit 15: Reserved for system
R WORD
69H
(105)
Current
Value 1
Property
(Unassigned) R WORD
6AH
(106) to
6BH
(107)
Reserved for system
6CH
(108)
Error ID
Number
Indicates the ID number of the unit having error.
Parameter range: 0 to 4 (initial value: 0)R UINT
6DH
(109)Error Code
Indicates the error code that is happening.
Parameter range: 0 to 65535 (initial value: 0)R UINT
6EH
(110)
Warning ID
Number(Unassigned) R UINT
6FH
(111)
Warning
Code(Unassigned) R UINT
70H
(112) to
73H
(115)
Reserved for system
74H
(116)
Output1
(HIGH)
Indicates the HIGH output (output 1) status of
each amplifier. When HIGH is output, the bit
corresponding to the ID number of the sensor
amplifier is turned ON.
Bit 0 to bit 3: ID number 1 to ID number 4
Bit 4 to bit 15: Reserved for system
R WORD
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
5-4 Message Communication
5-34
5
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IG S
erie
s
00H
75H
(117)
Output2
(LOW)
Indicates the LOW output (output 2) status of
each amplifier. When LOW is output, the bit
corresponding to the ID number of the sensor
amplifier is turned ON.
Bit 0 to bit 3: ID number 1 to ID number 4
Bit 4 to bit 15: Reserved for system
R WORD
76H
(118)
Output3
(GO)
Indicates the GO output (output 3) status of each
amplifier. When GO is output, the bit
corresponding to the ID number of the sensor
amplifier is turned ON.
Bit 0 to bit 3: ID number 1 to ID number 4
Bit 4 to bit 15: Reserved for system
R WORD
77H
(119)
Output4
(edge check)
Indicates the status of HH output (output 4) *1 of
each amplifier. When HH is output, the bit
corresponding to the ID number of the sensor
amplifier is turned ON.
Bit 0 to bit 3: ID number 1 to ID number 4
Bit 4 to bit 15: Reserved for system
R WORD
78H
(120)
Output5
(Unassigned)(Unassigned) R WORD
79H
(121) to
89H
(137)
Reserved for system
8AH
(138)
Current
Value 0
Invalid
When the current value 0 of each amplifier is
invalid, the bit of corresponding ID number is
turned ON.
Bit 0 to bit 3: ID number 1 to ID number 4
Bit 4 to bit 15: Reserved for system
R WORD
8BH
(139)
Current
Value 0
Under Range
When the current value 0 of each amplifier is less
than the lower limit of the detection range, the bit
of the corresponding ID number is turned ON.
Bit 0 to bit 3: ID number 1 to ID number 4
Bit 4 to bit 15: Reserved for system
R WORD
8CH
(140)
Current
Value 0
Over Range
When the current value 0 of each amplifier is
higher than the upper limit of the detection range,
the bit of corresponding ID number is turned ON.
Bit 0 to bit 3: ID number 1 to ID number 4
Bit 4 to bit 15: Reserved for system
R WORD
8DH
(141)
Current
Value 1
Invalid
(Unassigned) R WORD
8EH
(142)
Current
Value 1
Under Range
(Unassigned) R WORD
8FH
(143)
Current
Value 1 Over
Range
(Unassigned) R WORD
90H
(144)
Current
Value 0 (ID
Number 1)
Indicates the current value 0 of the sensor of ID
number 1.
Parameter range:
-2147483648 to 2147483647 (initial value: 0)
R DINT
Instance ID
Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
5-4 Message Communication
5-35
5
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IG S
erie
s
00H
91H
(145)
to 92H
(146)
:
93H
(147)
Current
Value 0 (ID
Number 4)
Indicates the current value 0 of the sensor of ID
number 4.
Parameter range:
-2147483648 to 2147483647 (initial value: 0)
R WORD
94H
(148)
to 9EH
(158)
Current
Value 0 (ID
Number 1) to
(ID Number
15)
(Unassigned) R DINT
9FH
(159)Reserved for system
A0H
(160)
to AEH
(174)
Current
Value 1 (ID
Number 1) to
(ID Number
15)
(Unassigned) R DINT
AFH
(175)Reserved for system
B0H
(176)
Sensor
Status Mask
Setting
Set up the condition to determine if the sensor
error or warning is a recoverable DL-EP1 error
(MS LED blinks in red). If mask is selected, MS
LED does not blink in red when a sensor error or
warning occurs.
Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)
0: Not mask
1: Mask
R/W UINT
B1H
(177)
Sensor
Connected
Number
Indicates the number of connected sensor
amplifiers.
Parameter range: 0 to 15 (initial value: 0)
R UINT
B2H
(178)
to C7H
(199)
Reserved for system
0300H
(768)
Error Code
(ID number
0)
Indicates the error code of ID number 0.
Parameter range: 0 to 65535 (initial value: 0)R UINT
0301H
(769)
to
0303H
(771)
:
0304H
(772)
Error Code
(ID number
4)
Indicates the current value 0 of the sensor of ID
number 4.
Parameter range:
0 to 65535 (initial value: 0)
R UINT
Instance ID
Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
5-4 Message Communication
5-36
5
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IG S
erie
s
For details on current value 0 and current value 1, refer to "Current
Value 0/Current Value 1" (Page 5-12).
00H
0305H
(773)
to
030FH
(783)
Error Code
(ID number
5) to (ID
number 15)
(Unassigned) R UINT
0310H
(784)
to
04FFH
(1279)
Reserved for system
Instance ID
Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
Reference
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
5-4 Message Communication
5-37
5
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IG S
erie
s
Attributes for IG Series
Designate the ID number (01H to 04H) of a sensor amplifier as the instance ID.
Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
Group1
0320H
(800)
Group1
Entry count
Indicates the number of items (entries) that can
be set in Group 1.
Parameter range: 29
R DINT
0321H
(801)
Sensor
amplifier
error state*1
Indicates the error status of the sensor amplifier.
Bit0 : Overcurrent error
Bit1 : EEPROM error
Bit2 : Head error
Bit3 : T/R reverse connection error
Bit4 : Receiver EEPROM error
Bit5 : Receiver error
Bit6 : Transmitter error
Bit7 : Transmitter laser error
Bit8 : Model mismatch error
Bit9 : Head error (standard waveform)
Bit10 : Standard waveform error 1-4
Bit11 : Communication error
Bit12 : Additional setting error
Bit13 : Calculation error
R DWORD
0322H
(802)
to
0323H
(803)
Reserved for system
0324H
(804)
Judgment /
Edge check
output*2
Indicates the judgement/edge check output.
Parameter range: 00H to 0FH
Bit0: HIGH judgement output
Bit1: LOW judgement output
Bit2: GO judgement output
Bit3: Edge check output
R DWORD
0325H
(805)P.V. value*3, *4, *5
Indicates the comparator value (P.V. value).
Parameter range:
-199.9999 to 199.9999 (initial value: 0.0000)
R DINT
0326H
(806)R.V. value*4, *5
Indicates R.V. value.
Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000R DINT
0327H
(807)
Peak hold
value*4, *5, *6 *29
Indicates the peak hold value.
Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000R DINT
0328H
(808)
Bottom hold
value*4, *5, *6 *29
Indicates the bottom hold value.
Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000R DINT
0329H
(809)
Calculation
value
(CALC value)
*4, *5, *7
Indicates the calculation value (CALC value).
Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000R DINT
032AH
(810)
Analog
output value*7, *8, *9
Indicates the analog output value.
Parameter range: -5.000 to +5,000R DINT
032BH
(811)
to
032CH
(812)
(Reserved for system)
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
5-4 Message Communication
5-38
5
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IG S
erie
s
Group1
032DH
(813)
Number of
edges*10Indicates the number of edges.
Parameter range: 0 to 99R DINT
032EH
(814)
Optical axis
alignment
state
Indicates the optical axis alignment state.
Parameter range: 0 to 1
0: Optical axis alignment NG
1: Optical axis alignment OK
R DINT
032FH
(815)
to
0332H
(818)
(Reserved for system)
0333H
(819)
Abnormal
setting*11
Indicates the abnormal setting.
Parameter range: 0 to 1
0: Normal setting
1: Abnormal setting
R DINT
0334H
(820)(Reserved for system)
0335H
(821)
EEPROM
writing
result*12
Indicates the EEPROM writing result.
Parameter range: 0 to 2
0: Writing
1: Normal end
2: Writing failure
R DINT
0336H
(822)
Zero shift
execution
result*13
Indicates the zero shift and zero shift reset
execution result.
Parameter range: 0 to 2
0: Executing
1: Normal end
2: Execution impossible
R DINT
0337H
(823)
Reset
request
result
Indicates the reset request results.
Parameter range: 0 to 2
0: Executing
1: Normal end
2: Execution impossible
R DINT
0338H
(824)
System
parameter
current
state*14
Indicates the system parameter current state.
Parameter range:
Main unit : 0 to 9 (initial value: 0)
Expansion unit : 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)
R DINT
0339H
(825)(Reserved for system)
033AH
(826)
Waveform
registration
result
Indicates the waveform registration result.
Parameter range: 0 to 7
0: Executing request
1: Normal end
2: Standard waveform error 1
3: Standard waveform error 2
4: Standard waveform error 3
5: Receiver EEPROM error
6: Standard waveform error 4
7: Errors other than the above
R DINT
033BH
(827)(Reserved for system)
Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
5-4 Message Communication
5-39
5
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IG S
erie
s
Group1
033CH
(828)
Tolerance/
2point
turning
result*15
Indicates the tolerance/2point tuning result.
Parameter range: 0 to 2
0: Executing request
1: Normal end
2: Execution impossible
R DINT
033DH
(829)
Calibration
execution
result*16
Indicates the calibration execution result.
Parameter range: 0 to 4
0: Executing
1: Normal end
2: Span value abnormal termination
3: Offset abnormal termination
4: Span value/Offset value abnormal
R DINT
033EH
(830)
to
033FH
(831)
(Reserved for system)
Group2
0340H
(832)
Group2 Entry
count
Indicates the group 2 entry count.
Parameter range: 24R DINT
0341H
(833)
HIGH
setting value
(BANK 0)*17
Indicates the HIGH setting value (BANK 0).
Parameter range:
-99.999 to 99.999 (initial value: 8,000)
R/W DINT
0342H
(834)
LOW
setting value
(BANK 0)*17
Indicates the LOW setting value (BANK 0).
Parameter range:
-99.999 to 99.999 (initial value: 2,000)
R/W DINT
0343H
(835)
Shift
target value
(BANK 0)*17
Indicates the shift target value (BANK 0).
Parameter range:
-99.999 to 99.999 (initial value: 0.000)
R/W DINT
0344H
(836)
Sensitivity
setting (BANK
0)
Indicates the sensitivity setting (BANK 0).
Parameter range: 0 to 3 (initial value: 1)
0: Low sensitivity mode
1: Standard mode
2: High sensitivity mode
3: User
R/W DINT
0345H
(837)
User binarize
level
(BANK 0)
Indicates the user binarize level (BANK 0).
Parameter range: 10 to 90 (initial value: 25)R/W DINT
0346H
(838)
User filter
value
(BANK 0)
Indicates the user filter value (BANK 0).
Parameter range: 3 to 50 (initial value: 9)R/W DINT
0347H
(839)
HIGH
setting value
(BANK 1)*17
Indicates the HIGH setting value (BANK 1).
Parameter range:
-99.999 to 99.999 (initial value: 8,000)
R/W DINT
0348H
(840)
LOW
setting value
(BANK 1)*17
Indicates the LOW setting value (BANK 1).
Parameter range:
-99.999 to 99.999 (initial value: 2,000)
R/W DINT
0349H
(841)
Shift
target value
(BANK 1)*17
Indicates the shift target value (BANK 1).
Parameter range:
-99.999 to 99.999 (initial value: 0.000)
R/W DINT
Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
5-4 Message Communication
5-40
5
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IG S
erie
s
Group2
034AH
(842)
Sensitivity
setting
(BANK 1)
Indicates the sensitivity setting (BANK 1).
Parameter range: 0 to 3 (initial value: 1)
0: Low sensitivity mode
1: Standard mode
2: High sensitivity mode
3: User
R/W DINT
034BH
(843)
User binarize
level
(BANK 1)
Indicates the user binarize level (BANK 1).
Parameter range: 10 to 90 (initial value: 25)R/W DINT
034CH
(844)
User filter
value
(BANK 1)
Indicates the user filter value (BANK 1).
Parameter range: 3 to 50 (initial value: 9)R/W DINT
034DH
(845)
HIGH
setting value
(BANK 2)*17
Indicates the HIGH setting value (BANK 2).
Parameter range:
-99.999 to 99.999 (initial value: 8,000)
R/W DINT
034EH
(846)
LOW
setting value
(BANK 2)*17
Indicates the LOW setting value (BANK 2).
Parameter range:
-99.999 to 99.999 (initial value: 2,000)
R/W DINT
034FH
(847)
Shift
target value
(BANK 2)*17
Indicates the shift target value (BANK 2).
Parameter range:
-99.999 to 99.999 (initial value: 0.000)
R/W DINT
0350H
(848)
Sensitivity
setting
(BANK 2)
Indicates the sensitivity setting (BANK 2).
Parameter range: 0 to 3 (initial value: 1)
0: Low sensitivity mode
1: Standard mode
2: High sensitivity mode
3: User
R/W DINT
0351H
(849)
User binarize
level (BANK
2)
Indicates the user binarize level (BANK 2).
Parameter range: 10 to 90 (initial value: 25)R/W DINT
0352H
(850)
User filter
value
(BANK 2)
Indicates the user filter value (BANK 2).
Parameter range: 3 to 50 (initial value: 9)R/W DINT
0353H
(851)
HIGH
setting value
(BANK 3)*17
Indicates the HIGH setting value (BANK 3).
Parameter range:
-99.999 to 99.999 (initial value: 8,000)
R/W DINT
0354H
(852)
LOW
setting value
(BANK 3)*17
Indicates the LOW setting value (BANK 3).
Parameter range:
-99.999 to 99.999 (initial value: 2,000)
R/W DINT
0355H
(853)
Shift
target value
(BANK 3)*17
Indicates the shift target value (BANK 3).
Parameter range:
-99.999 to 99.999 (initial value:0.000)
R/W DINT
0356H
(854)
Sensitivity
setting
(BANK 3)
Indicates the sensitivity setting (BANK 3).
Parameter range: 0 to 3 (initial value: 1)
0: Low sensitivity mode
1: Standard mode
2: High sensitivity mode
3: User
R/W DINT
0357H
(855)
User binarize
level
(BANK 3)
Indicates the user binarize level (BANK 3).
Parameter range: 10 to 90 (initial value: 25)R/W DINT
Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
5-4 Message Communication
5-41
5
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IG S
erie
s
Group2
0358H
(856)
User filter
value
(BANK 3)
Indicates the user filter value (BANK 3).
Parameter range: 3 to 50 (initial value: 9)R/W DINT
0359H
(857)
to
035FH
(863)
(Reserved for system)
Group3
0360H
(864)
Group3 Entry
count
Indicates the group 3 entry count.
Parameter range: 31R DINT
0361H
(865)Key lock
Indicates the key lock.
Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)
0: Not key locked state
1: Key locked state
R/W DINT
0362H
(866)Bank function*18
Reads the currently operating bank.
Parameter range:
0 to 3 (currently operating bank)
R DINT
Rewrites the operating bank.
Parameter range: 0 to 3
0: Rewrites the operating bank with bank 0.
1: Rewrites the operating bank with bank 1.
2: Rewrites the operating bank with bank 2.
3: Rewrites the operating bank with bank 3.
W DINT
0363H
(867)
Timing input
request*19, *20
Indicates the timing input request.
Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)
0: Timing input OFF
1: Timing input ON
R/W DINT
0364H
(868)
(Laser
emission stop
request*19, *20
Indicates the laser emission stop request.
Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)
0: Laser emission
1: Laser emission stop
R/W DINT
0365H
(869)
to
0367H
(863)
(Reserved for system)
0368H
(872)
Sub display's
screen*21
Indicates the sub display's screen.
Parameter range: 0 to 5 (initial value: 0)
0: R.V. value screen
1: Analog output screen
2: HIGH setting value screen
3: LOW setting value screen
4: Shift target value screen
5: Calculated value display screen
R/W DINT
0369H
(873)
System
parameter*14, *22
Indicates the system parameter.
Parameter range:
Main unit : 0 to 9 (initial value: 0)
Expansion unit : 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)
R/W DINT
036AH
(874)
Tolerance
setting
width*23
Indicates the tolerance setting width.
Parameter range:
0.000 to 99.999 (initial value: 0.100)
R/W DINT
Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
5-4 Message Communication
5-42
5
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IG S
erie
s
Group3
036BH
(875)
Calibration
function
Indicates the calibration function.
Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)
0: Standard
1: User setting
R/W DINT
036CH
(876)
Calibration
function
SET1
Indicates the calibration function SET1.
Parameter range:
-99.999 to 99.999 (initial value: 0.000)
R/W DINT
036DH
(877)
Calibration
function
SET2
Indicates the calibration function SET2.
Parameter range:
-99.999 to 99.999 (initial value: 5,000)
R/W DINT
036EH
(878) to
0373H
(883)
(Reserved for system)
0374H
(884)
Edge
number 1
(BANK 0)*24
Indicates specified edges interval measurement
mode: Edge number 1 (BANK 0).
Parameter range: -100 to 100 (initial value: 1)
R/W DINT
0375H
(885)
Edge
number 2
(BANK 0)*24
Indicates specified edges interval measurement
mode: Edge number 2 (BANK 0).
Parameter range: -100 to 100 (initial value: 2)
R/W DINT
0376H
(886)
Number of
the pins
(BANK 0)
Indicates pin interval judgment mode or pin
diameter judgment mode: Number of the pins
(BANK 0).
Parameter range: 2 to 14 (initial value: 2)
R/W DINT
0377H
(887)
Edge
number 1
(BANK 1)*24
Indicates specified edges interval measurement
mode: Edge number 1 (BANK 1).
Parameter range: -100 to 100 (initial value: 1)
R/W DINT
0378H
(888)
Edge
number 2
(BANK 1)*24
Indicates specified edges interval measurement
mode: Edge number 2 (BANK 1).
Parameter range: -100 to 100 (initial value: 2)
R/W DINT
0379H
(889)
Number of the
pins
(BANK 1)
Indicates pin interval judgment mode or pin
diameter judgment mode: Number of the pins
(BANK 1).
Parameter range: 2 to 14 (initial value: 2)
R/W DINT
037AH
(890)
Edge
number 1
(BANK 2)*24
Indicates specified edges interval measurement
mode: Edge number 1 (BANK 2).
Parameter range: -100 to 100 (initial value: 1)
R/W DINT
037BH
(891)
Edge
number 2
(BANK 2)*24
Indicates specified edges interval measurement
mode: Edge number 2 (BANK 2).
Parameter range: -100 to 100 (initial value: 2)
R/W DINT
037CH
(892)
Number of the
pins
(BANK 2)
Indicates pin interval judgment mode or pin
diameter judgment mode: Number of the pins
(BANK 2).
Parameter range: 2 to 14 (initial value: 2)
R/W DINT
037DH
(893)
Edge
number 1
(BANK 3)*24
Indicates specified edges interval measurement
mode: Edge number 1 (BANK 3).
Parameter range: -100 to 100 (initial value: 1)
R/W DINT
037EH
(894)
Edge
number 2
(BANK 3)*24
Indicates specified edges interval measurement
mode: Edge number 2 (BANK 3).
Parameter range: -100 to 100 (initial value: 2)
R/W DINT
Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
5-4 Message Communication
5-43
5
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IG S
erie
s
Group3037FH
(895)
Number of the
pins
(BANK 3)
Indicates pin interval judgment mode or pin
diameter judgment mode:
Number of the pins (BANK 3).
Parameter range: 2 to 14 (initial value: 2)
R/W DINT
Group4
0380H
(896)
Group4 Entry
count
Indicates the group 4 entry count.
Parameter range: 31R DINT
0381H
(897)
Calculation
function*7
Indicates the calculation function.
Parameter range: 0 to 3 (initial value: 0)
0: 0: Not use.
1: Addition mode
2: Subtraction mode
3: 2 heads mode
R/W DINT
0382H
(898)
Measurement
mode
Indicates measurement mode.
Parameter range: 0 to 7 (initial value: 0)
0: Edge control/positioning
1: Outer diameter/width
2: Inner diameter/opening
3: Glass edge
4: Pin position
5: Pin interval
6: Pin diameter
7: Specified edges interval
R/W DINT
0383H
(899)
Measurement
direction
Indicates the measurement direction.
Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)
0: Top
1: Bottom
R/W DINT
0384H
(900)(Reserved for system)
0385H
(901) Averaging*25
Indicates averaging.
Parameter range: 0 to 13 (initial value: 5)
0: hsp
1: 1
2: 2
3: 4
4: 8
5: 16
6: 32
7: 64
8: 128
9: 256
10: 512
11: 1024
12: 2048
13: 4096
R/W DINT
0386H
(902)Output mode
Indicates output mode.
Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)
0: N.O.
1: N.C.
R/W DINT
0387H
(903)(Reserved for system)
Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
5-4 Message Communication
5-44
5
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IG S
erie
s
Group4
0388H
(904)
Hold
function
setting
Indicates the hold function setting.
Parameter range: 0 to 5 (initial value: 0)
0: Sample hold
1: Peak hold
2: Bottom hold
3: Peak-to-peak hold
4: Auto peak hold
5: Auto bottom hold
R/W DINT
0389H
(905)
Auto
hold
trigger
level
Indicates auto peak hold or auto bottom hold
trigger level.
Parameter range:
-99.999 to 99.999 (initial value: 0.100)
R/W DINT
038AH
(906)Timing input
Indicates timing input.
Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)
0: Level
1: Edge
R/W DINT
038BH
(907)Delay timer
Indicates the delay timer.
Parameter range: 0 to 3 (initial value: 0)
0: Delay timer off
1: On delay timer
2: Off delay timer
3: One shot timer
R/W DINT
038CH
(908)
Timer
value
Indicates the timing value. (The unit is ms.)
Parameter range: 1 to 9999 (initial value: 60)R/W DINT
038DH
(909) Hysteresis*23 Indicates the hysteresis.
Parameter range: 0 to 99.999 (initial value: 0.020)R/W DINT
038EH
(910)
Analog
output
scalingg*7
Indicates the analog output scaling.
Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)
0: Initial state
1: Free range
R/W DINT
038FH
(911)
Analog
output upper
limit*7
Indicates the analog output upper limit.
Parameter range:
-99.999 to 99.999 (initial value: 10,000)
R/W DINT
0390H
(912)
Analog
output lower
limit*7
Indicates the analog output lower limit.
Parameter range:
-99.999 to 99.999 (initial value: 0.000)
R/W DINT
0391H
(913)
External
input*26
Indicates external input.
Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)
0: Initial state
1: User setting
R/W DINT
0392H
(914)
External input
1*26
Indicates external input 1.
Parameter range: 0 to 4 (initial value: 0)
0: Zero shift input
1: Bank A input
2: Bank B input
3: Laser emission stop input
4: Not use
R/W DINT
Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
5-4 Message Communication
5-45
5
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IG S
erie
s
Group4
0393H
(915)
External input
2*26
Indicates external input 2.
Parameter range: 0 to 4 (initial value: 0)
0: Reset input
1: Bank A input
2: Bank B input
3: Laser emission stop input
4: Not use
R/W DINT
0394H
(916)
External input
3*26
Indicates external input 3.
Parameter range: 0 to 4 (initial value: 0)
0: Timing input
1: Bank A input
2: Bank B input
3: Laser emission stop input
4: Not use
R/W DINT
0395H
(917)
External input
4*26
Indicates external input 4.
Parameter range: 0 to 4 (initial value: 4)
0: Gain input (standard waveform input)
1: Bank A input
2: Bank B input
3: Laser emission stop input
4: Not use
R/W DINT
0396H
(918)(Reserved for system)
0397H
(919)
Saving the
standard
waveform
Indicates saving the standard waveform
function.
Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)
0: OFF
1: ON
R/W DINT
0398H
(920)
Saving zero
shift value
function
Indicates the saving zero shift value function.
Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)
0: OFF
1: ON
R/W DINT
0399H
(921)
Interference
prevention*7
Indicates the interference prevention function.
Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)
0: OFF
1: ON
R/W DINT
039AH
(922)
Display
digit*27
Indicates the display digit.
Parameter range: 1 to 4 (initial value: 2)
1: 0.001
2: 0.01
3: 0.1
4: 1
R/W DINT
039BH
(923)
Power save
function
Indicates the power save function.
Parameter range: 0 to 2 (initial value: 0)
0: OFF
1: Half
2: All
R/W DINT
039CH
(924)
Position
monitor
Indicates the position monitor.
Parameter range: 0 to 3 (initial value: 0)
0: Initial state
1: OK/NG display mode
2: Red OFF
3: OFF
R/W DINT
Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
5-4 Message Communication
5-46
5
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IG S
erie
s
Group4
039DH
(925)Display color
Indicates the display color.
Parameter range: 0 to 2 (initial value: 0)
0: GO green
1: GO red
2: Always red
R/W DINT
039EH
(926)
Edge
check
function
Indicates the edge check function.
Parameter range: 0 to 2 (initial value: 0)
0: OFF
1: Setting A
2: Setting B
R/W DINT
039FH
(927)
Edge
check func.
number of
edges
Indicates the edge check function number of
edges.
Parameter range: 0 to 99 (initial value: 1)
R/W DINT
Group5
03A0H
(928)
Group5
Entry count
Indicates the group 5 entry count.
Parameter range: 28R DINT
03A1H
(929)
P.V. of pin
diameter/
interval 1
*4, *28
Indicates P.V. of pin diameter 1 or pin interval 1.
Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000R DINT
03A2H
(930)
P.V. of pin
diameter/
interval 2*4, *28
Indicates P.V. of pin diameter 2 or pin interval 2.
Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000R DINT
03A3H
(931)
P.V. of pin
diameter/
interval 3*4, *28
Indicates P.V. of pin diameter 3 or pin interval 3.
Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000R DINT
03A4H
(932)
P.V. of pin
diameter/
interval 4*4, *28
Indicates P.V. of pin diameter 4 or pin interval 4.
Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000R DINT
03A5H
(933)
P.V. of pin
diameter/
interval 5*4, *28
Indicates P.V. of pin diameter 5 or pin interval 5.
Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000R DINT
03A6H
(934)
P.V. of pin
diameter/
interval 6*4, *28
Indicates P.V. of pin diameter 6 or pin interval 6.
Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000R DINT
03A7H
(935)
P.V. of pin
diameter/
interval 7*4, *28
Indicates P.V. of pin diameter 7 or pin interval 7.
Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000R DINT
03A8H
(936)
P.V. of pin
diameter/
interval 8*4, *28
Indicates P.V. of pin diameter 8 or pin interval 8.
Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000R DINT
03A9H
(937)
P.V. of pin
diameter/
interval 9*4, *28
Indicates P.V. of pin diameter 9 or pin interval 9.
Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000R DINT
03AAH
(938)
P.V. of pin
diameter/
interval 10*4, *28
Indicates P.V. of pin diameter 10 or pin interval
10.
Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000
R DINT
Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
5-4 Message Communication
5-47
5
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IG S
erie
s
Group5
03ABH
(939)
P.V. of pin
diameter/
interval 11*4, *28
Indicates P.V. of pin diameter 11 or pin interval
11.
Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000
R DINT
03ACH
(940)
P.V. of pin
diameter/
interval 12*4, *28
Indicates P.V. of pin diameter 12 or pin interval
12.
Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000
R DINT
03ADH
(941)
P.V. of pin
diameter/
interval 13*4, *28
Indicates P.V. of pin diameter 13 or pin interval
13.
Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000
R DINT
03AEH
(942)
R.V. of pin
diameter 14*4, *28
Indicates the comparator value (P.V. value) of pin
diameter 14..
Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000
R DINT
03AFH
(943)
R.V. of pin
diameter/
interval 1*4, *28
Indicates R.V. of pin diameter 1 or pin interval 1.
Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000R DINT
03B0H
(944)
R.V. of pin
diameter/
interval 2*4, *28
Indicates R.V. of pin diameter 2 or pin interval 2.
Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000R DINT
03B1H
(945)
R.V. of pin
diameter/
interval 3*4, *28
Indicates R.V. of pin diameter 3 or pin interval 3.
Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000R DINT
03B2H
(946)
R.V. of pin
diameter/
interval 4*4, *28
Indicates R.V. of pin diameter 4 or pin interval 4.
Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000R DINT
03B3H
(947)
R.V. of pin
diameter/
interval 5*4, *28
Indicates R.V. of pin diameter 5 or pin interval 5.
Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000R DINT
03B4H
(948)
R.V. of pin
diameter/
interval 6*4, *28
Indicates R.V. of pin diameter 6 or pin interval 6.
Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000R DINT
03B5H
(949)
R.V. of pin
diameter/
interval 7*4, *28
Indicates R.V. of pin diameter 7 or pin interval 7.
Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000R DINT
03B6H
(950)
R.V. of pin
diameter/
interval 8*4, *28
Indicates R.V. of pin diameter 8 or pin interval 8.
Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000R DINT
03B7H
(951)
R.V. of pin
diameter/
interval 9*4, *28
Indicates R.V. of pin diameter 9 or pin interval 9.
Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000R DINT
03B8H
(952)
R.V. of pin
diameter/
interval 10*4, *28
Indicates R.V. of pin diameter 10 or pin interval
10.
Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000
R DINT
Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
5-4 Message Communication
5-48
5
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IG S
erie
s
Group5
03B9H
(953)
R.V. of pin
diameter/
interval 11*4, *28
Indicates R.V. of pin diameter 11 or pin interval
11.
Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000
R DINT
03BAH
(954)
R.V. of pin
diameter/
interval 12*4, *28
Indicates R.V. of pin diameter 12 or pin interval
12.
Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000
R DINT
03BBH
(955)
R.V. of pin
diameter/
interval 13*4, *28
Indicates R.V. of pin diameter 13 or pin interval
13.
Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000
R DINT
03BCH
(956)
R.V. of pin
diameter
14*4, *28
Indicates R.V. of pin diameter 14.
Parameter range: -99.999 to 100,000R DINT
03BDH
(957)
to
03BFH
(959)
(Reserved for system)
Group6
03C0H
(960)
Group6
Entry count
Indicates the group 6 entry count.
Parameter range: 11R DINT
03C1H
(961)Product code
Indicates the product code.
Parameter range:
Main unit : 4016
Expansion unit : 4017
R DINT
03C2H
(962)Revision
Indicates the revision.
Parameter range:0101H to FFFFH (initial value:
0101H)
R DINT
03C3H
(963)
T connector
sensor head
Indicates the T connector sensor head.
Parameter range: 0 to 9 (initial value: 0)
0: IG-028 transmitter
1: IG-010 transmitter
9: Detection impossible
R DINT
03C4H
(964)
R connector
sensor head
Indicates the R connector sensor head.
Parameter range: 0 to 9 (initial value: 0)
0: IG-028 transmitter
1: IG-010 transmitter
9: Detection impossible
R DINT
03C5H
(965)
to
03C7H
(967)
Reserved for system
03C8H
(968)
Product
name
Indicates the product name.
Main unit : "IG-1000/1500"
Expansion unit : "IG-1050/1550"
R STRING
03C9H
(969)
to
03D6H
(982)
Reserved for system
03D7H
(983)Series code
Indicates the series code.
Main unit : 4016
Expansion unit : 4017
R DINT
Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
5-4 Message Communication
5-49
5
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IG S
erie
s
*1 You can check the error contents of the sensor amplifier according to the ON/
OFF status of each bit.
OFF(0): No error occurred. ON(1): An error occurred.
Two or more errors may simultaneously occur. For details on each error, refer to
"IG Series User's Manual".
*2 You can check the detailed output status according to the ON/OFF status of
each bit.
*3 Use this attribute in combination with the comparator value property or
comparator value information (invalid/over/under).
*4 If the comparator value is correct, the parameter range is -99.997 to +99.998.
If this value is Over Range, +99.999 is stored.
If this value is Under Range, -99.999 is stored.
If this value is Invalid "----", -99.998 is stored.
If this value is Error, +100,000 is stored.
*5 If data is read from the main unit for which the calculation function is set to 2
heads mode, the read range varies with -999.99 to +999.99.
*6 This attribute can be used only when the detection mode of the sensor
amplifier is peak-to-peak hold.
Using this for discriminating the outer diameter of a cylinder makes it possible
to read the peak and bottom values during the measurement period.
*7 If this attribute is used in the expansion unit, a read error occurs.
*8 If the sensor amplifier is in Error Status, the analog voltage output becomes
+5.500 and the analog current output becomes +3.00.
*9 If the analog output is OFF in the main unit, a read error occurs.
*10 If the number of edges is greater than or equal to 100, 99 is read.
*11 If a write for which a combination of inhibited functions is set is executed,
abnormal setting (1) occurs. For details on each error, refer to "IG Series User's
Manual".
(Example) If settings for using the calculation function are changed when
measurement mode is pin interval or pin diameter
*12 The results of "initial reset request" and "system parameter set request" for the
operation command are also included in this item.
*13 The execution result for the lastly requested item of "zero shift execution
request" or "zero shift request execution request" is read.
Group6
03D8H
(984)Series version
Indicates the series version.
Parameter range: 1R DINT
03D9H
(985)Device type
Indicates the device type.
Parameter range: 0R DINT
03DAH
(986)
to
03DFH
(991)
Reserved for system
Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
5-4 Message Communication
5-50
5
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IG S
erie
s
*14 You can check the system parameter of the sensor amplifier by reading
"system parameter current state". The system parameter sets a judgement
output, edge check output polarity, and analog output.
Designate the system parameter set when the operation command executes
"system parameter set request" as "system parameter".
A read or write value is designated by ON/OFF of each of the bits to be
converted to a binary number.
When the read data is "6":
"6" is converted to "0110" in binary representation.
For this reason, the sensor amplifier that read data is set to "NPN
output" and "analog output 1 to 5 V".
*15 Of "tolerance tuning request", "two-point tuning HIGH side 2nd poiont
confirmation", and "two-point tuning LOW side 2nd point confirmation" for the
operation command, the execution result for the lastly requested item is read.
*16 If calibration is executed when measurement mode is pin interval or pin
diameter, the calibration execution result becomes "span value/offset value
abnormal".
*17 If data is read from the main unit for which the calculation function is set to 2
heads mode, the read range varies with -999.99 to +999.99. Also, if calculation
function mode is changed to 2 heads mode from modes other than 2 heads
mode, these setting values change to 10 times.
*18 If the sensor amplifier is in the key locked state, data cannot be written. If an
attempt is made to write data, a write error occurs.
*19 If the monitor data/external input connection is already established in cyclic
communication, a write error occurs.
*20 This attribute operates as OFF only when timing input OFF(0) is written and
external input is OFF in wiring.
*21 If an attempt is made to write 1 or 5, a write error occurs in the expansion unit.
*22 This is reflected in operation when the system parameter set request is
executed.
*23 If data is read from the main unit for which the calculation function is set to 2
heads mode, the read range varies with 0.00 to 99.99.
*24 For -100, "bottom" is set. For +100, "top" is set.
If an attempt is made to write 0, a write error occurs.
Bit Setting
00: NPN output
1: PNP output
3, 2, 1
000: Analog output OFF
001: 0 to 5V
010: -5 to +5V
011: 1 to 5V
100: 4 to 20mA
(Fixed to 000 for expansion unit)
Reference
0110 0
Bits 3, 2, 1: 1 to 5 V Bit 0: NPN output
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
5-4 Message Communication
5-51
5
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IG S
erie
s
*25 If "pin interval" or "pin diameter" is set as measurement mode, hsp(0) and
512(10) to 4096(13) cannot be written. If hsp(0) is written, 1(1) is written. If
512(10) to 4096(13) are written, 256(9) is written.
When using the calculation function, do not write any data to the expansion
unit 1. Changing averaging of the main unit that is using the calculation
function automatically changes averaging of the expansion unit 1.
*26 To reflect the written settings in the sensor amplifier, you must write user setting
(1) in "external input" or set external input setting to "user setting" in button
operation of the sensor amplifier.
*27 If the calculation function is set to 2 heads mode, the valid value range is 2 to 4
(if 1 is written, a setting error occurs).
*28 If measurement mode is pin interval, the pin interval is read. If measurement
mode is pin diameter, the pin diameter is read.
Pin diameter (interval) 1 represents the first pin diameter (interval) counted
from the top side.
If this data is read when measurement mode is other than pin interval or pin
diameter, a read error occurs.
*29 If this value is read during sample hold, a read error occurs.
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
5-4 Message Communication
5-52
5
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IG S
erie
s
The following describes how to perform message communication with a DL Object.
(1) Reading parameters from a sensor amplifier
(2) Writing parameters to a sensor amplifier
(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier
(4) Locking sensor amplifier operations
(5) Reading the number of decimal places from a sensor amplifier
(1) Reading parameters from a sensor amplifier
Message communication reads each parameter from the DL-EP1 and the sensor
amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.
Service code 0EH is used.
The following settings are required to use this object.
• Service Code
• Class ID
• Instance ID
• Attribute ID
• Commands
• Responses (when successful)
Using DL Object
Item Description Data Example
Service CodeDesignates "Parameter read (0EH)" (fixed
value).0EH
Class ID Designates DL Object(67H) (fixed value). 67H
Instance ID Designates the ID number. 0AH
Attribute IDDesignates the attribute ID to be read from
"Attribute".0324H(804)
Service Data There is no service data. -
Item Description Data Example
General status
A status (00H) is returned that indicates
normal completion of message
communication.
00H
Service response
data
The settings of the read parameter are
returned.0000H
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
5-4 Message Communication
5-53
5
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IG S
erie
s
• Responses (when unsuccessful)
For details on the attribute ID, settings, general status, and additional status of each
parameter, refer to "DL Object (Class ID:67H)" (Page 5-31) and "Attributes"
(Page 5-33).
(2) Writing parameters to a sensor amplifier
Message communication writes parameters to the DL-EP1 and the sensor amplifierconnected to the DL-EP1.Service code 10H is used.The following settings are required to use this object.• Service Code• Class ID• Instance ID• Attribute ID• Service Data
• Commands
• Responses (when successful)
Item Description Data Example
General status A general status for the service is returned 16H
Additional status An additional status is returned. -
Service response
dataThere is no service response data. -
Item Description Data Example
Service CodeDesignates "Parameter write (10H)" (fixed value).
10H
Class ID Designates DL Object(67H) (fixed value). 67H
Instance ID Designates the ID number. 05H
Attribute IDDesignates the attribute ID to be written from "Attribute".
0347H(839)
Service Data Writes the setting. 0064H
Item Description Data Example
General status
A status (00H) is returned that indicates normal completion of message communication. (The written parameters are reflected in the sensor amplifier at the status (00H) return timing.)
00H
Service response data
There is no service response data. -
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
5-4 Message Communication
5-54
5
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IG S
erie
s
• Responses (when unsuccessful)
For details on the attribute ID, settings, general status, and additional status of eachparameter, refer to "DL Object (Class ID:67H)" (Page 5-31) and "Attributes"(Page 5-33).
(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier
Message communication issues operation commands such as error clear to the
sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.
Service code 4BH is used.
The following settings are required to use this object.
• Service Code
• Class ID
• Instance ID
• Attribute ID
Before executing the operation command, check that the sensor amplifiercan execute the operation command. You can check whether the sensoramplifier can execute the operation command from the read results ofattributes for IG Series (zero shift result, zero shift reset execution result,reset request result, system parameter current state, standard waveformrequest result, tolerance/2point tuning result, calibration execution result). Ifthe read results are normal end (1), it indicates that the sensor amplifiercan execute the operation command. Also, check that the executedoperation command ends normally.
Item Description Data Example
General status A general status for the service is returned 0EH
Additional status An additional status is returned. -
Service response data
There is no service response data. -
Point
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
5-4 Message Communication
5-55
5
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IG S
erie
s
• Attribute IDs supported by the instance service 4BH (operation command)
The contents of processing performed by the instance service 4BH (operation
command) depend on the attribute ID to be selected.
The table below details the attribute IDs that can be selected.
Attribute ID Name Description
0301H(769)
Zero shift execution request
Executes zero shift.Turning off the sensor amplifier after executing zero shift restores the state before the zero shift function is used. If the shift state is retained even after the sensor amplifier is turned off, set the saving zero shift value function to ON.
0302H(770)
Zero shift reset execution request
Resets the zero shift value.
0303H(771)
Reset request Executes reset.
0305H(773)
Initial reset request
Initializes all the settings other than the calibration, standard waveform registration, and system parameters of the sensor amplifier.All parameters are stored in nonvolatile memory (EEPROM) approx. 3 minutes after the initial reset request is executed. After the initial reset request has been executed, "EEPROM write result" of the attribute for IG Series becomes normal end (1).
0306H(774)
System parameter set request
Changes the contents of the system parameter (judgement output, edge check output polarity, and analog output) to the contents written in "system parameter" of the setting/status command parameter.Change the contents tailored to the connected devices and wiring. If the contents are changed by mistake, the devices connected to the sensor amplifier may go down.
039AH(778)
Standard waveform registration request
Registers the standard waveform.Turning off the sensor amplifier after registering the standard waveform restores the state before the standard waveform is registered. If the standard waveform registration is retained even after the sensor amplifier is turned off, set the saving standard waveform to ON.
030EH(782)
Tolerance tuning request
Executes tolerance tuning.Set the tolerance setting width using the attribute for IG Series "tolerance setting width".
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
5-4 Message Communication
5-56
5
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IG S
erie
s
• Commands
030FH(783)
Two-point tuning HIGH side 1st point confirmation operation request
Executes two-point tuning.For details on the two-point tuning execution procedure, refer to "IG Series User's Manual".
0310H(784)
Two-point tuning HIGH side 2nd point confirmation operation request (determine HIGH setting value.)
0311H(785)
Two-point tuning LOW side 1st point confirmation operation request
0312H(786)
Two-point tuning LOW side 2nd point confirmation operation request(determine LOW setting value)
0313H(787)
Calibration SET 1 confirmation operation request
Executes calibration.Set the R.V. value that you want to display using the attribute for IG Series "Calibration function SET1" or "Calibration function SET2". For details on the two-point tuning execution procedure, refer to "IG Series User's Manual".
0314H(788)
Calibration SET 2 confirmation operation request(Perform calibration.)
Item Description Data Example
Service CodeDesignates the "operation command (4BH)"
(fixed value).4BH
Class ID Designates DL Object (67H)(fixed value). 67H
Instance IDDesignates the ID number. The ID number
(00H) of the DL-EP1 cannot be designated.08H
Attribute ID
Designates the attribute ID to be designated
from "Attribute". "(3) Issuing operation
commands to a sensor amplifier" "Attribute
IDs supported by the instance service 4BH
(operation command)" (Page 5-55)
0301H(769)
Service Data There is no service data. -
Attribute ID Name Description
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
5-4 Message Communication
5-57
5
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IG S
erie
s
• Responses (when successful)
• Responses (when unsuccessful)
For details on the attribute ID, settings, general status, and additional status of each
parameter, refer to "DL Object (Class ID:67H)" (Page 5-31) and "Attributes"
(Page 5-33).
(4) Locking sensor amplifier operations
Message communication executes batch key lock for the sensor amplifier connected
to the DL-EP1.
Service code 4CH is used.
The following settings are required to use this object.
• Service Code
• Class ID
• Instance ID
• Attribute ID
• Service Data
• Commands
Item Description Data Example
General status
A status (00H) is returned that indicates
normal completion of message
communication.
00H
Service response
dataThere is no service response data. -
Item Description Data Example
General status A general status for the service is returned 08H
Additional status An additional status is returned. -
Service response
dataThere is no service response data. -
Item Description Data Example
Service CodeDesignates the "batch lock setting (4CH)"
(fixed value).4CH
Class ID Designates DL Object (67H)(fixed value). 67H
Instance IDDesignates ID number 0 (00H) for issuing a
command to the DL-EP1 (fixed value).00H
Attribute ID There is no data. -
Service Data Designates the batch lock setting. 0001H
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
5-4 Message Communication
5-58
5
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IG S
erie
s
• Responses (when successful)
• Responses (when unsuccessful)
• If a sensor amplifier that does not support key lock is connected to theDL-EP1, the error code 09H is returned (the settings of the sensoramplifier are not changed).
• If the device is key locked, message communication cannot switch thebank.
(5) Reading the number of decimal places in the parameter from a sensor
amplifier
Message communication reads the number of decimal places in the parameter from
the sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.
Service code 4DH is used.
The following settings are required to use this object.
• Service Code
• Class ID
• Instance ID
• Attribute ID
• Commands
Item Description Data Example
General statusMessage communication has ended
normally.00H
Service response
dataThere is no service response data. -
Item Description Data Example
General status A general status for the service is returned 08H
Additional status An additional status is returned. -
Service response
dataThere is no service response data. -
Point
Item Description Data Example
Service Code Designates parameter read (fixed value). 4DH
Class ID Designates DL Object (67H)(fixed value). 67H
Instance ID Designates the ID number. 01H
Attribute IDDesignates the attribute ID to be read from
"Attribute".
03A1H
(929)
Service Data There is no service data. -
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
5-4 Message Communication
5-59
5
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IG S
erie
s
• Responses (when successful)
• Responses (when unsuccessful)
For details on the attribute ID, settings, general status, and additional status of each
parameter, refer to "DL Object (Class ID:67H)" (Page 5-31) and "Attributes"
(Page 5-33).
Item Description Data Example
General statusMessage communication has ended
normally.00H
Service response
dataThe read decimal point position is returned. 04H
Item Description Data Example
General status A general status for the service is returned 14H
Additional status An additional status is returned. -
Service response
dataThere is no service response data. -
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
5-60
MEMO
5
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IG S
erie
s
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 6-1
6Communicating with
IB Series
This chapter describes the configuration of memory that
communicates with the EtherNet/IP compatible network unit
and a communication timing chart.
6-1 What is EtherNet/IP?.......................................... 6-2
6-2 DL-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication Function ... 6-3
6-3 Cyclic communication......................................... 6-5
6-4 Message Communication................................. 6-22
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -6-2
6
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IB S
erie
s
6-1 What is EtherNet/IP?
EtherNet/IP is an industrial communication network with open specifications. The
specifications are managed by ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendor Association, Inc.).
Industrial protocol has been combined with the Ethernet and standardized as Ether-
Net/IP (Industrial Protocol).
Communication is realized by combining the protocols known as Common Industrial
Protocol (CIP) with TCP/IP and Ethernet. This allows regular Ethernet to be used
together with the network.
Before starting EtherNet/IP communication, one of the devices must open a
communication line called a "connection" with the other device. The side which
opens the connection is called the "scanner", and the side to be opened is called the
"adaptor". (The DL-EP1 is an adaptor.)
EtherNet/IP includes cyclic communication (Implicit messaging) which sends and
receives data periodically. Message communication (Explicit messaging) which
sends and receives commands and responses at a time specified by the user.
Cyclic communication enables you to set RPI (Requested Packet Interval) according
to the priority of the data to be exchanged, allowing the entire communication load to
be adjusted for data exchange.
Message communication enables you to exchange the required commands and
responses at the required timing. Message communication is used for applications
which do not require the punctuality of cyclic communication, such as reading and
writing adaptor settings.
What is EtherNet/IP?
Scanner
Adaptor Adaptor Adaptor
High speed(Communication cycle: 10 ms)
Regular speed(Communication cycle: 100 ms)
Low speed (Communication cycle: 1000 ms)
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 6-3
6
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IB S
erie
s
6-2 DL-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication Function
This section describes the EtherNet/IP functions supported by the DL-EP1.
The DL-EP1 functions as an EtherNet/IP adaptor, and supports both cyclic and
message EtherNet/IP communications.
The EtherNet/IP scanner can use the following functions:
Output
Comparator Value
・・・・・・Error information
External input
Setting value
Output
Comparator Value
・・・・・・Error information
External input
Setting value
IN area
OUT area
Output
Current value
Error information
External input
EtherNet/IP scanner DL-EP1
Sensor amplifier
Message communication
Output
Comparator Value
・・・・・・Error information
IN area
OUT areaDirect read/write of various parameters
Cyclic communicationExternal input
Setting value
Cyclic communication
Overview of Communication Methods
Function of sensor amplifier
Communication Methods
Cyclic communication(Page 6-5)
Message Communication(Page 6-22)
Read status
Read output
Read current value
Execute external input
Change bank number
X
Rewrite setting value
Motion command
Read current value, setting, and
status
Read number of decimal places
Rewrite setting value
Lock all
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
6-2 DL-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication Function
6-4
6
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IB S
erie
s
Cyclic communication
This function sends and receives data between the scanner and DL-EP1 at the set
RPI (Requested Packet Interval). The function can exchange data such as the
sensor amplifier's output signals and comparator values and error status without
ladder programs.
Configurations such as RPI and data size for cyclic communication are seton the scanner side.In a network which has many connected devices, including EtherNet/IPdevices, a delay or packet loss could occur if a large load is constantly ortemporarily applied on the network. Verify the settings carefully beforeoperation.
Message communication
Message communication can be used for applications which do not require a
punctuality like cyclic communication.
In message communication, various parameters, including data which can be
exchanged with cyclic communication, can be read and written. Functions specific
to sensors such as the sensor amplifier preset function can also be executed.
PLC EtherNet/IP scanner
RPI=3 (ms)* RPI=0.5 (ms)*
RPI=5 (ms)*
RPI=10 (ms)*
Various EtherNet/IP adaptors
Ethernet
* RPI (Requested Packet Interval) can be set individually for each connection.
Point
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 6-5
6
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IB S
erie
s
6-3 Cyclic communication
This section describes the cyclic communication functions and how to use them.
What is cyclic communication?
Cyclic communication is a function that exchanges data with the EtherNet/IP device
in a cyclic manner (at a set cycle).
In cyclic communication, data can be exchanged when one device successfully
opens a logical communication line called a "connection" with the other device.
The side which opens the connection is called the scanner, and the side to be
opened is called the adaptor. (The DL-EP1 is an adaptor.)
Cyclic communication is started in the following procedures:
(1) The scanner requests the adaptor to open the connection.
(2) The adapter side checks compatibility.
(3) If no error occurs as a result the compatibility check, the adapter opens the
connection.
(* If an error is found during the compatibility check, the adapter does not open
the connection.)
"Checking the Device Compatibility" (Page 6-21)
Data is exchanged between the EtherNet/IP scanner, DL-EP1 and each sensor
amplifier as follows:
To carry out EtherNet/IP communication with a scanner which does not
support cyclic communication (Allen-Bradley SLC5/05 Series, etc.), use
"Message Communication" (Page 6-22).
(1) Request connection open
(3) Open connection
(2) Check compatibility
Output data
Data reflected in thescanner
Input data
The data output from thescanner is stored by theDL-EP1.
EtherNet/IP scanner DL-EP1 Sensor amplifier
IN area
OUT area
Cyclic communication
Data betweensensors isrefreshed
Cyclic communication
Data betweensensors isrefreshed
Reference
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
6-3 Cyclic communication
6-6
6
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IB S
erie
s
The following settings are required to execute cyclic communication with the DL-
EP1.
[DL-EP1]
The DL-EP1 does not require any setting.
[Scanner]
(1) Set the connection to be used.
(2) Set the devices used in cyclic communication.
Refer to the scanner manual for details on how to make the above settings.
(* No ladder program is required when cyclic communication is used.)
Cyclic communication can use the following functions:
(1) Read status
(2) Read output (Page 6-18)
Outputs that can be read: HIGH output, LOW output, GO output, check output
(3) Read P.V. value (Page 6-19)
(4) Execute external input (Page 6-20)
Inputs that can be used: External input 1, external input 2, external input 3,
external input 4
Configuring Cyclic Communication
Actions which can be completed with Cyclic Communication
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
6-3 Cyclic communication
6-7
6
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IB S
erie
s
EtherNet/IP requires that a connection must be opened from the scanner when cyclic
communication is started. There are various types of connections, and the type
usable by each device is defined in the EDS file.
The DL-EP1 can use the following connections:
• Each connection's trigger timing is executed cyclically. The connection
type supports both point-to-point and multicast.
• The details of each application type are as follows:
Exclusive Owner:This connection allows simultaneous setting of both data
transmission from the scanner to the DL-EP1 and data
transmission from the DL-EP1 to the scanner. This setting is
made not only when the scanner monitors the adaptor (DL-EP1)
data, but also when it issues external inputs and rewrites the
settings, etc. Multiple "Exclusive Owner" connections cannot be
opened to one adaptor (DL-EP1).
Input Only:This connection allows only data transmission from the DL-EP1
to the scanner. This setting is made when the scanner only
monitors adaptor (DL-EP1) data. Multiple scanners can open an
"Input Only" connection simultaneously to one adaptor (DL-
EP1).
(* To simultaneously open connections from multiple scanners,
set the Connection Type to Multicast.)
Usable Connections
NoConnection
NameInput/Output
Assembly Instance
Size(Byte)
RPI Range (in 0.5 ms)
Application Type
1
Monitor Data
And External
Input
DL-EP1 to
scanner64H (100) 168
0.5 ms to
10000 ms
Exclusive
OwnerScanner to
DL-EP165H (101) 10
2Monitor Data
(Input Only)
DL-EP1 to
scanner64H (100) 168
0.5 ms to
10000 msInput Only
Scanner to
DL-EP1FEH (254) 0
Reference
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
6-3 Cyclic communication
6-8
6
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IB S
erie
s
The data from the DL-EP1 is assigned to the EtherNet/IP scanner's IN area.
The data such as 16-bit data extending over multiple bytes is stored into
an area which starts with an even address in order from the lowest-order
byte.
Example)
Assignment to IN Area (DL-EP1 to Scanner)
DL-EP1 data
Scanner IN area
Address 0Address 1
Address 167
Monitor Data(Assembly Instance: 100)
1-byte (8-bit) data
Reference
16-bit dataAddress 40 to 41
16-bit dataAddress 42 to 43
12H 34H
56H 78H
High-order byte Low-order byte
High-order byte Low-order byte
56H43
78H42
12H41
34H40
32-bit dataAddress 48 to 51
12H51
34H50
56H49
78H48
12H 34H 56H 78H
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
6-3 Cyclic communication
6-9
6
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IB S
erie
s
Monitor Data (84 Words (168 Bytes)) Assembly Instance (Instance ID): 64H
This is the device map for the monitor data to be assigned to the IN area.
For details on each parameter, refer to "Parameter List" (Page 6-11).
For details on current value 0 and current value 1, refer to "Current Value 0/
Current Value 1" (Page 6-12).
Name Address(Byte) bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
Status
0 Reserved for systemDL-EP1
Error Status
1 Error StatusWarningStatus
Reserved for system
Sensor Error Status
2 ID08 . . . . . ID01
3Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
Sensor Warning Status
4 ID08 . . . . . ID01
5Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
Current Value 0
Over Range
6 ID08 . . . . . ID01
7Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
Current Value 0 Under Range
8 ID08 . . . . . ID01
9Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
Current Value 0 Invalid
10 ID08 . . . . . ID01
11Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
Current Value 1
Over Range (Unassigned)
12 ID08 . . . . . ID01
13Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
Current Value 1 Under Range
(Unassigned)
14 ID08 . . . . . ID01
15Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
Current Value 1 Invalid
(Unassigned)
16 ID08 . . . . . ID01
17Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
Output 1 (HIGH)
18 ID08 . . . . . ID01
19Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
Output 2 (LOW)
20 ID08 . . . . . ID01
21Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
Output 3 (GO)
22 ID08 . . . . . ID01
23Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
Output 4 (Check output)
24 ID08 . . . . . ID01
25Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
Output 5(Unassigned)
26 ID08 . . . . . ID01
27Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
6-3 Cyclic communication
6-10
6
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IB S
erie
s
External Input
Response 1 (External input 1)
28 ID08 . . . . . ID01
29Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
External Input
Response 2 (External input 2)
30 ID08 . . . . . ID01
31Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
External Input
Response 3 (External input 3)
32 ID08 . . . . . ID01
33Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
External Input
Response 4 (External input 4)
34 ID08 . . . . . ID01
35Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
External Input
Response 5(Unassigned)
36 ID08 . . . . . ID01
37Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
Error ID Number
40Current Error ID Number (16-bit unsigned integer)
41
Error Code42
Current Error Code (16-bit unsigned integer)43
Warning ID Number
44Current Warning ID Number (16-bit unsigned integer)
45
Warning Code
46Current Warning Code (16-bit unsigned integer)
47
Current Value 0
(Comparator Value (P.V.))
48
ID Number 1 (Current Value 0) (32-bit signed integer)49
50
51
: :
104
ID Number 15 (Current Value 0) (32-bit signed integer)105
106
107
Current Value 1
(Unassigned)
108
ID Number 1 (Current Value 1) (32-bit signed integer)109
110
111
: :
164
ID Number 15 (Current Value 1) (32-bit signed integer)165
166
167
Name Address(Byte) bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
6-3 Cyclic communication
6-11
6
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IB S
erie
s
Parameter List
Item Description
DL-EP1 Error
Status
The error status of the DL-EP1 is output.
ON: An error occurred.
OFF: No error occurred.
Warning Status
The warning statuses of all the connected sensor amplifiers are output.
When ON, a value is stored in "Warning ID Number" and "Warning Code".
When OFF, 0 is stored in "Warning ID Number" and "Warning Code".
ON: A warning occurred in any of the connected sensor amplifiers.
OFF: No warning occurred in the connected sensor amplifiers.
Error Status
The error status of the DL-EP1 or the error statuses of all the connected sensor
amplifiers are output.
When ON, a value is stored in "Error ID Number" and "Error Code". When OFF, 0
is stored in "Error ID Number" and "Error Code".
ON: An error occurred in the DL-EP1 or in any of the connected sensor
amplifiers.
OFF: No error occurred in the DL-EP1 or in the connected sensor amplifiers.
Sensor Error Status
The target ID number bit of the sensor amplifier where the error occurred is
output.
ON: An error occurred in the sensor amplifier with the target ID number.
OFF: No error occurred in the sensor amplifier with the target ID number.
Sensor Warning
Status
The bit of target ID number of the sensor amplifier where the warning occurred
is output.
ON: A warning occurred in the sensor amplifier with the target ID number.
OFF: No warning occurred in the sensor amplifier with the target ID number.
Current Value n
Over Range
(n: 0 to 1)
The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number
is compared with the measurement upper limit and the comparison result is
output.
ON: The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID
number is greater than the measurement upper limit.
OFF: The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID
number is less than the measurement upper limit.
(* The current value 1 does not exist in the IB Series.)
Current Value n
Under Range
(n: 0 to 1)
The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number
is compared with the measurement lower limit and the comparison result is
output.
ON: The current value of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is less
than the measurement lower limit.
OFF: The current value of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is
greater than the measurement lower limit.
(* The current value 1 does not exist in the IB Series.)
Current Value n
Invalid
(n: 0 to 1)
The status of current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID
number is output.
ON: The current value of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is
invalid.
OFF: The current value of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is
valid (normal).
(* The current value 1 does not exist in the IB Series.)
Output n (n: 1 to 5)
The ON/OFF status of output n (n: 1 to 5) of the sensor amplifier with the target
ID number is output.
Output 1: HIGH output
Output 2: LOW output
Output 3: GO output
Output 4: Check output
Output 5: (Unassigned)
ON: Output n is output.
OFF: Output n is not output.
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
6-3 Cyclic communication
6-12
6
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IB S
erie
s
Current Value 0/Current Value 1
External Input
Response
n (n: 1 to 5)
An external input response is output when the corresponding external input
request n (n: 1 to 5) is made via communication.
The ID number of an unexisting external input is also output.
ON: The external input request was made (ON).
OFF: The external input request was not made (OFF).
For details, refer to "Entering an external input to a sensor amplifier"
(Page 6-19).
Error ID Number
If "Error Status" in ON, the ID number of the DL-EP1 where the error occurred and
the ID numbers of sensor amplifiers connected to the DL-EP1 are stored (the ID
number of the DL-EP1 is 0). If no error has occurred, 0 is stored. If an error occurs
in multiple IDs, the ID number of the DL-EP1 or sensor amplifier where the highest
priority error occurred is stored.
Error priority:
(1) DL-EP1 error
(2) Sensor amplifier errors (the error with the smallest error code has the
highest priority)*
* If the same error code occurs in multiple sensor amplifiers, the error
with the smallest ID number has the highest priority.
Error Code
If "Error Status" is ON, the error code is stored. If no error has occurred, 0 is
stored. If an error occurs in multiple IDs, the error code of the DL-EP1 or sensor
amplifier where the highest priority error occurred is stored.
Error priority:
(1) DL-EP1 error
(2) Sensor amplifier errors (the error with the smallest error code has the
highest priority)*
* If the same error code occurs in multiple sensor amplifiers, the error
with the smallest ID number has the highest priority.
"Error code list" (Page 6-13)
Warning ID
Number
When "Warning Status" is ON, the ID number of the sensor amplifier where the
warning occurred is stored. If no warning has occurred, 0 is stored. If a warning
occurs in multiple IDs, the smallest ID number is stored. (Priority: 0>1> to > 4)
Warning Code
If "Warning Status" is ON, the warning code is stored. If no warning has
occurred, 0 is stored. If two or more warnings occur in one sensor amplifier, the
smallest warning code is stored.
Current Value n
(n: 0 to 1)
The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier is stored. The current value
0 always exists without reference to sensor amplifier models. Whether the
current value 1 exists depends on sensor amplifier models. If the current value
1 does not exist, 0 is stored. The contents displayed in the current value n (n: 0
to 1) depend on the use conditions.
(* The current value 1 does not exist in the IB Series.)
"Current Value 0/Current Value 1" (Page 6-12)
Item Description
Name Model Conditions Function
Current Value 0Main unit/
expansion unit- Comparator value (P.V.)
Current Value 1Main unit/
expansion unit- (Unassigned)
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
6-3 Cyclic communication
6-13
6
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IB S
erie
s
Error code list
The following error codes may occur in the DL-EP1 and sensor amplifiers.
DL-EP1
ErrorID
NumberCode Description Cause Actions
0
0 No error - -
51Unassigned ID
error
The main unit assigned no ID
within 10 seconds after the
DL-EP1 had been started.
• Check if the number of
connected sensor
amplifiers exceeds the
maximum number of
sensor amplifiers that can
be connected to the main
unit.
"Connectable Sensor
Amplifiers" (Page 9-2)
• Check the connection with
the sensor amplifiers and
then turn the power on
again.
If this error cannot be
recovered, contact your
nearest KEYENCE office.
52Start-time
communication error
Communication between
sensor amplifiers ended
abnormally before ID
assignment completion.
Check the connection with
the sensor amplifiers and
then turn the power on again.
If this error cannot be
recovered, contact your
nearest KEYENCE office.
53
Unsupported
sensor amplifier
connection error
A sensor amplifier not
supported by the DL-EP1 is
connected.
Check the model of the
connected sensor amplifier
and remove the sensor
amplifier if it is not supported
by the DL-EP1.
54 Mixed model error
Sensor amplifiers outside the
specifications have a mixed
connection.
Check if the models are
mixable.
"Mixed Connection of
Sensor amplifiers" (Page 9-3)
55Start-time
communication error
ID number assignment is
successful but
communication failed during
the subsequent initial
communication.
Check the connection with
the sensor amplifiers and
then turn the power on again.
If this error cannot be
recovered, contact your
nearest KEYENCE office.
56Current limitation
error
The number of connected
sensor amplifiers exceeds
the allowable range.
Use sensor amplifiers within
the allowable range.
57
Communication
error between
sensor amplifiers
An error occurred during
communication between
sensor amplifiers.
Check if there is a noise
source around the DL-EP1.
If the sensor communication
indicator is flashing red, turn
the power on again.
70IP address
duplicate error
The IP address is the same
as another device.
Check the IP address
setting.
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
6-3 Cyclic communication
6-14
6
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IB S
erie
s
0
100 System error The IP address is incorrect.
Contact your nearest
KEYENCE office.
101 System errorA default gateway setting
error occurred.
102 System error
An attempt to read data in
EEPROM such as the MAC
address has failed.
103 System errorAn attempt to start the
protocol stack has failed.
104 System errorAn attempt to access
FlashROM has failed.
150 System errorThe number of held IDs is
incorrect.
151 System errorThe number of sensors is
incorrect.
152 System error An initial read error occurred.
ErrorID
NumberCode Description Cause Actions
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
6-3 Cyclic communication
6-15
6
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IB S
erie
s
IB Series
Warning code list
The following warning codes occur in the DL-EP1 and sensor amplifiers.
IB Series
ErrorID
NumberCode Description Cause Actions
01H to
04H
(Each
ID
number)
01H
Sensor amplifier
error 1 of each ID
number
Overcurrent error (ErC)
Refer to the IB Series User's
Manual.
02H
Sensor amplifier
error 2 of each ID
number
EEPROM error (ErE)
03H
Sensor amplifier
error 3 of each ID
number
Head error (transmitter/
receiver) (ErH/tr)
04H
Sensor amplifier
error 4 of each ID
numbe
T/R reverse connection error
(alternate flashing of ErH/tr
and ErH/rt)
05H
Sensor amplifier
error 5 of each ID
number
Transmitter internal error
(ErH/t. int)
06H
Sensor amplifier
error 6 of each ID
number
Receiver error (ErH/r)
07H
Sensor amplifier
error 7 of each ID
number
Transmitter error (ErH/t)
08H
Sensor amplifier
error 8 of each ID
number
Transmitter laser error (ErH/
LASEr)
09H
Sensor amplifier
error 9 of each ID
number
Model mismatch error
(ErH/RAnGE)
0AH
Sensor amplifier
error 10 of each ID
number
Ref. light quantity registration
error
(ErG/dArk, ErG/inF)
0BH
Sensor amplifier
error 11 of each ID
number
Adjust error
(Er.AdJ/dArk, Er.AdJ/ovEr,
Er.AdJ/inF)
0CH
Sensor amplifier
error 12 of each ID
number
Communication error
between sensor amplifiers
(Er.coM)
Warning ID
Number (HEX)
Code Description Cause Actions
01H to 04H(Each ID number)
01H
Sensor amplifier
warning 1 of each
ID number
Check output stateRefer to the IB Series User's
Manual.
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
6-3 Cyclic communication
6-16
6
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IB S
erie
s
The data to the sensor amplifier is assigned to the OUT area of the EtherNet/IP
scanner.
External Input (5 Words (10 Bytes)) assembly instance (Instance ID): 65H
* External inputs 1 to 4 are assigned any function and used. For details on the
functions to be assigned, refer to "IB User's Manual".
Assignment to OUT Area (Scanner to DL-EP1)
DL-EP1 data
Scanner's OUT area
Address 0Address 1
Address 9
External Input(Assembly Instance: 101)
1-byte (8-bit) data
Name Address(Byte) bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
External
Input
Request 1
(External
Input 1)
0 ID08 . . . . . ID01
1Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
External
Input
Request 2
(External
Input 2)
2 ID08 . . . . . ID01
3Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
External
Input
Request 3
(External
Input 3)
4 ID08 . . . . . ID01
5Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
External
Input
Request 4
(External
Input 4)
6 ID08 . . . . . ID01
7Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
External
Input
Request 5
(Unassigned)
8 ID08 . . . . . ID01
9Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
6-3 Cyclic communication
6-17
6
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IB S
erie
s
Parameter List
Name Function Operation
External
Input
Request 1
External input 1
ON: Turns on timing external input 1. Turning on external input 1
also turns on external input response 1.
OFF: Turns off external input 1. Turning off external input 1 also
turns off external input response 1.
External
Input
Request 2
External input 2
ON: Turns on timing external input 2. Turning on external input 2
also turns on external input response 2.
OFF: Turns off external input 2. Turning off external input 2 also
turns off external input response 2.
External
Input
Request 3
External input 3
ON: Turns on timing external input 3. Turning on external input 3
also turns on external input response 3.
OFF: Turns off external input 3. Turning off external input 3 also
turns off external input response 3.
External
Input
Request 4
External input 4
ON: Turns on timing external input 4. Turning on external input 4
also turns on external input response 4.
OFF: Turns off external input 4. Turning off external input 4 also
turns off external input response 4.
External
Input
Request 5
(Unassigned) (Unassigned)
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
6-3 Cyclic communication
6-18
6
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IB S
erie
s
The following describes how the scanner cyclically communicates with the DL-EP1
(cyclic communication).
"Reading an output from a sensor amplifier" (Page 6-18)
"Entering an external input to a sensor amplifier" (Page 6-19)
"Reading comparator values (P.V. values) from sensor amplifiers" (Page 6-20)
For the message communication method, refer to "Message communication"
(Page 6-4).
Reading an output from a sensor amplifier
Available outputs: HIGH, LOW, GO, and check output
Device assignments: "Monitor Data (84 Words (168 Bytes)) Assembly Instance
(Instance ID): 64H" (Page 6-9)
This example shows how to read the HIGH output from the sensor amplifier ID01.
(1)The output from the sensor amplifier entered into the IN area via cyclic
communication.
Communication Methods
PLCOutput of sensor amplifierIN area [18] Bit0
Sensor amplifier (1)Output
HIGH output of ID 01
10
ONOFF
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
6-3 Cyclic communication
6-19
6
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IB S
erie
s
Entering an external input to a sensor amplifier
Available external inputs: External input 1, External input 2, External input 3, External
input 4
Device assignments: "External Input (5 Words (10 Bytes)) assembly instance
(Instance ID): 65H" (Page 6-16)
This example shows how to enter external input 2 to the sensor amplifier ID01.
(1)The device value in the OUT area to which an external input request was
assigned is linked via cyclic communication and the external input of the sensor
amplifier is turned on or off.
(2)You can check the input status of the sensor amplifier with the external input
response.
• If the external input or sensor amplifier input signal line from cycliccommunication is ON, the sensor amplifier recognizes that the externalinput is ON and executes input operation (OR operation). For example, ifthe external input or sensor amplifier input signal line from cycliccommunication is ON when laser transmission stop input is assigned toexternal input n, laser transmission stop input is executed.
• To use bank switching, set "bank switching method" to "external inputswitching".
PLC (1)External Input requestOUT area [2]Bit0
(2)External Input responseIN area [30]Bit0
Sensor amplifierExternal InputExternal input 2 to ID 01
10
ONOFF
10
Point
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
6-3 Cyclic communication
6-20
6
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IB S
erie
s
Reading comparator values (P.V. values) from sensor amplifiers
Comparator values (P.V. values) are read from the IN area to which the ID number of
each sensor amplifier is assigned.
Device assignments: "Monitor Data (84 Words (168 Bytes)) Assembly Instance
(Instance ID): 64H" (Page 6-9)
This example shows how to read the comparator values from the sensor amplifiers
ID01, ID02, and ID03.
(1)When the comparator value of a sensor amplifier is updated, the new comparator
value is entered into the IN area via cyclic communication.
* If the value is correct and measurement mode is % mode, the parameter range
is -999.97 to +999.98. If the value is correct and measurement mode is
dimension mode, the parameter range is -99.997 to +99.998.
If the current value is over range, under range, or invalid, the previous value is
retained without updating the current value.
(2)The properties of the comparator value (Current Value n Over Range (each bit of
IN area [6]), Current Value n Under Range (each bit of IN area [8]), and Current
Value n Invalid (each bit of IN area [10]) are entered. If the comparator value of a
sensor amplifier is "over", "under," or "invalid," the bit corresponding to the ID
number of that sensor amplifier is set to 1.
* For the IB Series, the comparator value is stored in the current value 0.
PLC (2)Comparator value propertyEach bit of IN [6, 8,10]
Comparator value of ID 01 1234 4567 6789
IN area [48 to 51]
Comparator value of ID 02 2345 5678 7890
IN area [52 to 55]
Comparator value of ID 03 3456 8901
IN area [56 to 59]
Sensor amplifierComparator value of ID 01 1234 4567 6789
Comparator value of ID 02 2345 5678 7890
Comparator value of ID 03 3456 8901
(1)
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
6-3 Cyclic communication
6-21
6
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IB S
erie
s
Compatibility check is a function executed when the scanner communicates with the
DL-EP1. This function checks if the device set with the scanner matches the DL-EP1
to prevent communicating with the wrong device. This function is executed when a
connection is opened.
When using scanners of other manufacturers
For how to use the scanners of other manufacturers, refer to the manual of each
scanner.
Checking the Device Compatibility
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -6-22
6
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IB S
erie
s
6-4 Message Communication
This section describes the message communication functions and how to use them.
What is Message communication (Explicit messaging)?
Message communication is a function that performs communication by issuing
commands using the objects and services (Service Codes) prepared for each
EtherNet/IP device. Message communication is used for applications which do not
require the punctuality of cyclic communication, such as reading and writing adaptor
settings.
The objects and service codes which can be used with message communication
include those which are specified as a standard and those which are unique to the
device. You can use the objects and services unique to the DL-EP1to monitor data,
to read and write parameters, and to perform operations such as reset.
The DL-EP1 message communication function supports CIP-defined
UCMM (unconnected) and Class 3 (connected) message communication.
Scanner DL-EP1 Sensor amplifier
Send
Receive
Receive
Send
(1) Message communication command
(3) Message communication response
(2) Interpret and execute command
Reference
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
6-4 Message Communication
6-23
6
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IB S
erie
s
The following settings are required to execute message communication with the DL-
EP1.
[DL-EP1]
The DL-EP1 does not require any setting.
[Scanner]
Set the applicable service, Class ID, Instance ID, Attribute ID, and service data, and
send the commands used for message communication. "Objects and Services"
(Page 6-26)
Refer to the scanner manual for details on the setting methods and applicable
commands.
The following lists the contents that can be executed by message communication
when the objects (DL Object) and services unique to the DL-EP1 are used.
(1) Reading data from a sensor amplifier
(2) Writing data to a sensor amplifier
(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier
(4) Locking sensor amplifier operations
(5) Reading the number of decimal places from a sensor amplifier
(1) Reading data from a sensor amplifier
Message communication reads parameters from the DL-EP1 and the sensor
amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.
"(1) Reading parameters from a sensor amplifier" (Page 6-53)
Configuring Message Communication
Actions which can be Completed with Message Communication
IB
Command
Response:1235
IB Comparator values (P. V. values): 1235
DL-EP1Scanner
<Details of command>Service code: 0EHClass ID: 67HInstance ID: 01HAttribute ID: 0325H (805)
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
6-4 Message Communication
6-24
6
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IB S
erie
s
(2) Writing data to a sensor amplifier
Message communication writes parameters to the DL-EP1 and the sensor
amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.
"(2) Writing parameters to a sensor amplifier" (Page 6-54)
(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier
Message communication issues operation commands such as preset to the DL-
EP1 and the sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.
"(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier" (Page 6-55)
(4) Locking sensor amplifier operations
Message communication locks operations by keys on the sensor amplifier
connected to the DL-EP1.
* If a key is locked, message communication cannot switch a bank.
"(4) Locking sensor amplifier operations" (Page 6-59)
IB
Command:500
Response
IB auto hold trigger level: 100→500
DL-EP1Scanner
<Details of command>Service code: 10HClass ID: 67HInstance ID: 01HAttribute ID: 0389H(905)Service data: 500
IB
Command
Response
External input 1execution by IB
DL-EP1Scanner
<Details of command>Service code: 4BHClass ID: 67HInstance ID: 01HAttribute ID: 0301H(769)
IB
Command
Response
Changes using thesensor amplifier keys are locked.
DL-EP1Scanner
<Details of command>Service code: 4CHClass ID: 67HInstance ID: 00HService data: 01H
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
6-4 Message Communication
6-25
6
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IB S
erie
s
(5) Reading the number of decimal places from a sensor amplifier
Message communication reads the number of decimal places of settings read
from the sensor amplifier.
"(5) Reading the number of decimal places in the parameter from a sensor
amplifier" (Page 6-60)
For the IB Series, if measurement mode is "% mode" and the current value
is 12.50%, data is stored as follows:
Data: 1250
Number of decimal places: 2
Perform calculation from the read data and the number of decimal places.
IB
Command
Response
DL-EP1Scanner
<Details of command>Service code: 4CHClass ID: 67HInstance ID: 01HAttribute ID: 0325H(805)
Reads the number of decimal places of the IB comparator value (P.V. value).
Reference
1250 12.50 12.5%Number of decimal places
2 1
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
6-4 Message Communication
6-26
6
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IB S
erie
s
Message communication uses objects and services to send and receive data.
Executing a service (1) for a DL-EP1 object enables data read (2), parameter
change (3), specified operation execution (4), and read of the number of decimal
places (5), etc.
Taking DL Object as an example, one instance is provided for each of the sensor
amplifiers connected to the DL-EP1. Reading the attributes corresponding to the
comparator values (P.V. values) of the respective instances using a service makes it
possible to read the comparator values (P.V. values) of the sensor amplifiers
corresponding to the respective instances.
Objects and Services
Parameter change(3)
Operation command execution(4)
Read of the number of decimal places(5)
DL-EP1 or sensor amplifier connected to DL-EP1
Object(1)
(2)
Service
Data output
ID: 0324H Output
Attribute
ID: 0325H Current value (instantaneous flow rate)
ID: 0326H Raw value (R.V. value)
DL Object(Class ID: 67H)
DL-EP1Instance ID: 00H
ID number 1 sensorInstance ID: 01H
ID number 2 sensorInstance ID: 02H
:
:
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
6-4 Message Communication
6-27
6
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IB S
erie
s
• In EtherNet/IP (CIP), the method called "object modeling" is used to
express a device. The device is handled as a group of objects. Objects
abstractly express the configuration elements in the device. A class is a
group of objects expressing the configuration elements of the same
type. An instance actually expresses a specific object contained in a
class. Each instance in the class has the same attribute group, but each
uses a unique attribute value.
• To execute a service for the DL-EP1, send a command from the scanner.
The DL-EP1 then returns the service execution results as a response. A
command requires a service, class ID (Class ID), instance ID (Instance
ID), and attribute ID (Attribute ID)*. When a parameter is written, the
command also requires a setting (service data).
* Some of the commands to be used may not require the above items.
"Basic Format and Processing Flow of Message Communication"
(Page 6-29)
Reference
Command Response
・Service
・Class ID
・Instance ID
・Attribute ID*
・Service data*
・General Status
・Additional Status*
・Service response data*
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
6-4 Message Communication
6-28
6
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IB S
erie
s
The following describes the objects usable by the DL-EP1.
Objects Usable by DL-EP1
Command
Response
DLObject
MessageRouterObject
ConnectionManagerObject
AssemblyObject
IdentityObject
TCP/IPInterfaceObject
EthernetLink
Object
EtherNet/IP unit
Object Name Class ID Description ReferencePage
DL Object 67H
This object provides the statuses of the DL-EP1 and
the sensor amplifiers connected to the DL-EP1 and
writes and reads parameters. This object is unique to
the DL-EP1.
6-32
Identity Object 01HThis object provides identification information,
general information and a reset service, etc.9-22
Message Router
Object02H
This object provides connection points for message
communication.9-25
Assembly Object 04H
This object provides access to the devices via cyclic
communication. This object can be used to send data
to the devices that do not support cyclic
communication.
9-26
Connection
Manager Object06H
This object is used for connection-type
communication.9-28
TCP/IP Interface
ObjectF5H
This object provides the structure for setting the TCP/
IP network interface. You can set an IP address,
subnet mask and gateway, etc., in this object.
9-30
Ethernet Link Object F6H This object provides Ethernet status information. 9-34
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
6-4 Message Communication
6-29
6
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IB S
erie
s
The EtherNet/IP scanner and the DL-EP1 exchange Explicit messages for
communication. The following provides a basic example of the command format of
Explicit messages to be sent and the response format returned from the DL-EP1 to
the scanner.
Commands
• Command format
*1 For details on usable services, refer to "DL Object (Class ID:67H)" (Page 6-
32) or "Objects Usable by DL-EP1" (Page 9-20).
Responses
• Response format
Basic Format and Processing Flow of Message Communication
Item Description
Service code*1 Designates the service code to be used (Service Code).
Class ID Designates a class ID (Class ID) tailored to the service*1 to be used.
Instance IDDesignates an instance ID (Instance ID) tailored to the service*1 to be
used.
Attribute IDDesignates an attribute ID (Attribute ID) tailored to the service*1 to be
used.
Service Data Designates service data (Service Data) tailored to the service*1 to be used.
Item Description
General statusReturns a general status in respect to the command (General Status). 00H
is returned when the command ends normally.
Additional status Returns the additional status (Additional Status).
Service response
data
Returns service response data Service Response Data) in respect to the
command.
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
6-4 Message Communication
6-30
6
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IB S
erie
s
Command processing order and error response
Check whether each ID is within the supported range in the following order:
Supplement for object processing
• Get_Attribute_Single and Get_Attributes_All are executed, ignoring send service
data.
• The service (Get_Attributes_All, Reset) that does not designate an attribute ID is
executed, ignoring Attribute ID.
• If Set_Attribute_Single is designated for an attribute which cannot be written (Set),
"0EH" (Attribute not settable) is returned as the general status.
• If Set_Attribute_Single for the writable attribute is designated and the writing size
is less than the attribute size, the general status "13H" (Not enough data) is
returned. If the writing size is greater than the attribute size, the service is
executed, ignoring the excessive data.
Class ID check
Yes
No
Instance ID check
Yes
No
Service check
Yes
No
Attribute ID check
Executes supported service process
Yes
No
Path Destination Unknown (05H)returned as general status
Path Destination Unknown (05H)returned as general status
Service not Supported (08H)returned as general status
Attribute not Supported (14H)returned as general status
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
6-4 Message Communication
6-31
6
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IB S
erie
s
Reading the attribute ID
Example) Excerpt from DL Object attribute ID
Data Type
The data type is defined in the EtherNet/IP specifications as follows:
Reading the DL Object Table
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
Instance ID
Attribute ID
Name Description Attribute Data Type
00H74H
(116)
Output
1
Stores the HIGH output (output 1) status of each
sensor amplifier. When HIGH is output, the bit
corresponding to the ID number of the sensor
amplifier is set to ON.
Bit 0 to bit 3: ID number 1 to ID number 4
Bit 4 to bit 15: Reserved for system
R WORD
Item Description
(1) Instance ID Represents the instance ID in hexadecimal notation.
(2) Attribute ID
Represents the attribute ID in hexadecimal (decimal) notation.
(* The parameter number 500 is the calculation function (attribute ID0381H
(897).)
(3) Name Represents the attribute name.
(4) DescriptionDescribes the attribute and represents the data to be read and the range of
parameters that can be set.
(5) Attribute
Represents the direction of services for the attribute ID.
R (Read): The parameter read service (Get_Attribute_Single,
Get_Attributes_All) can be used to read the attribute value.
W (Write): The parameter write service (Set_Attribute_Single) can be used
to write the attribute value.
(6) Data type Represents the attribute data type.
Data Type DescriptionRange
Minimum Maximum
INT Signed 16-bit integer -32768 32767
UINT Unsigned 16-bit integer 0 65535
DINT Signed 32-bit integer -2147483648 2147483647
WORD Bit string: 16 bits - -
DWORD Bit string: 32 bits - -
STRING
Character string
(2-byte length information +
1-byte array per character)
- -
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
6-4 Message Communication
6-32
6
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IB S
erie
s
The DL Object provides the DL-EP1 connection status and device write/read. This
object is unique to the DL-EP1.
Services
*1 This service cannot be used in the DL-EP1 (instance ID:00H).
*2 This service cannot be used in the sensor amplifier (instance ID: 01H to 0FH) connected to the DL-EP1.
*3 In the DL-EP1 (instance ID: 00H), this service can be used as the attribute ID 90H to 9EH and A0H to AEH.
DL Object (Class ID:67H)
Service Code Service Name Description
0EHParameter
read
Reads parameters from the DL-EP1 and the sensor amplifier
connected to the DL-EP1. For examples of using this service,
refer to "(1) Reading parameters from a sensor amplifier"
(Page 6-53).
10HParameter
write
Writes parameters to the DL-EP1 and the sensor amplifier
connected to the DL-EP1. For examples of using this service,
refer to "(2) Writing parameters to a sensor amplifier"
(Page 6-54).
4BH*1 Operation
command
Requests processing such as zero shift and tuning from the
sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1. The contents of
processing that can be requested differ per sensor amplifier.
Set the contents of processing with the attribute ID in the
object.
Refer to "Attribute IDs supported by the instance service
4BH (operation command)" (Page 6-55). For examples of
using this service, refer to "(3) Issuing operation
commands to a sensor amplifier" (Page 6-55).
4CHBatch lock
setting*2
Collectively performs lock or unlock for all the connected
sensor amplifiers. Even if a lock setting that is not supported
by sensor amplifiers is designated, locks all the sensor
amplifiers without interrupting processing. Then, error code
09H is returned as a response.
Setting 0: Not lock
Setting 1: Key lock
"Lock setting" (Page 6-33)
For examples of using this service, refer to "(4) Locking
sensor amplifier operations" (Page 6-59).
4DH
Acquisition of the
number of decimal
places *3
Acquires the number of decimal places of the designated
parameter. For examples of using this service, refer to "(5)
Reading the number of decimal places in the parameter from
a sensor amplifier" (Page 6-60).
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
6-4 Message Communication
6-33
6
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IB S
erie
s
• Lock setting
Responses
The responses made when each service is used are as follows:
(1) Parameter read: : Service code 0EH
(2) Parameter write: : Service code 10H
(3) Operation command: : Service code 4BH
(4) Batch lock setting: : Service code 4CH
(5) Read of number of decimal places: : Service code 4DH
Setting Description
0 Does not execute lock.
1Executes key lock (inhibition of operations other than basic screen display
switching and [RESET] button).
GeneralStatus
Command TypeDescription
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
00H Normal end
05H The instance ID is out of range.
08H - - -The designated instance ID does not support this service or
cannot be executed.
09H - - - - The written data is out of range.
0CH - - -
• Parameter write was executed for the function controlled
by cyclic communication.
• An attempt to execute the operation command has failed.
Check if the sensor amplifier can execute the operation
command.
0EH - - - -
An attempt was made to write data to the attribute ID that
cannot be written or to the attribute ID that is in the unwritable
status.
10H - - - -
An attempt was made to read data from the attribute ID that
cannot be read or from the attribute ID that is in the
unreadable status.
13H - -The service data size is less than the defined size.
The defined data size is stored in the additional status.
14H - The attribute ID is out of range.
16H -The sensor amplifier corresponding to the designated
instance ID is not connected.
1FH
• This service is supported by the designated instance ID
but cannot be used by the designated attribute ID.
(Additional status: C350H)
• In the current mode, the designated setting cannot be
written into the parameter.
(Additional status: C351H)
• The DL-EP1 is now initializing communication. (Additional
status: C352H)
FEH System error. Contact your nearest KEYENCE office.
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
6-4 Message Communication
6-34
6
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IB S
erie
s
Attributes
Instance ID
Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
00H
64H
(100)Status
Indicates the status of this unit and connected
sensor amplifier.
Bit0: DL-EP1 Error Status
Bit 1 to bit 13: Reserved for system
Bit14: Warning Status
Bit15: Error Status
R WORD
65H
(101)
Sensor Error
Status
Indicates the error status of the connected
senosr amplifiers. If an error occurs, the bit of the
corresponding ID number of amplifier is turned
to ON.
Bit 0 to bit 3: ID number 1 to ID number 4
Bit 4 to bit 15: Reserved for system
R WORD
66H
(102)
Warning
Status
Indicates the warning status of each sensor
amplifier. If a warning occurs, the bit
corresponding to the ID number of the sensor
amplifier is set to ON.
Bit 0 to bit 3: ID number 1 to ID number 4
Bit 4 to bit 15: Reserved for system
R WORD
67H
(103)Reserved for system
68H
(104)
Current
Value 0
Property
Indicates the status of current value 0 of each
amplifier. If the current value 0 is “0ver Range",
“Under Range", or "Invalid", the bit
corresponding to the ID number is turned ON.
Bit 0 to bit 3: ID number 1 to ID number 4
Bit 4 to bit 15: Reserved for system
R WORD
69H
(105)
Current
Value 1
Property
(Unassigned) R WORD
6AH
(106) to
6BH
(107)
Reserved for system
6CH
(108)
Error ID
Number
Indicates the ID number of the unit having error.
Parameter range: 0 to 4R UINT
6DH
(109)Error Code
Indicates the error code that is happening.
Parameter range: 0 to 65535R UINT
6EH
(110)
Warning ID
Number
Indicates the ID number of the device where the
warning occurred.
Parameter range: 0 to 4
R UINT
6FH
(111)
Warning
Code
Indicates the warning code that has occurred.
Parameter range: 0 to 65535R UINT
70H
(112) to
73H
(115)
Reserved for system
74H
(116)
Output1
(HIGH)
Indicates the HIGH output (output 1) status of
each amplifier. When HIGH is output, the bit
corresponding to the ID number of the sensor
amplifier is turned ON.
Bit 0 to bit 3: ID number 1 to ID number 4
Bit 4 to bit 15: Reserved for system
R WORD
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
6-4 Message Communication
6-35
6
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IB S
erie
s
00H
75H
(117)
Output2
(LOW)
Indicates the LOW output (output 2) status of
each amplifier. When LOW is output, the bit
corresponding to the ID number of the sensor
amplifier is turned ON.
Bit 0 to bit 3: ID number 1 to ID number 4
Bit 4 to bit 15: Reserved for system
R WORD
76H
(118)
Output3
(GO)
Indicates the GO output (output 3) status of each
amplifier. When GO is output, the bit
corresponding to the ID number of the sensor
amplifier is turned ON.
Bit 0 to bit 3: ID number 1 to ID number 4
Bit 4 to bit 15: Reserved for system
R WORD
77H
(119)
Output4
(Check
Output)
Indicates the check output (output 4) status of
each sensor amplifier. When HH is output, the bit
corresponding to the ID number of the sensor
amplifier is turned ON.
Bit 0 to bit 3: ID number 1 to ID number 4
Bit 4 to bit 15: Reserved for system
R WORD
78H
(120)
Output5
(Unassigned)(Unassigned) R WORD
79H
(121) to
89H
(137)
Reserved for system
8AH
(138)
Current
Value 0
Invalid
When the current value 0 of each amplifier is
invalid, the bit of corresponding ID number is
turned ON.
Bit 0 to bit 3: ID number 1 to ID number 4
Bit 4 to bit 15: Reserved for system
R WORD
8BH
(139)
Current
Value 0
Under Range
When the current value 0 of each amplifier is less
than the lower limit of the detection range, the bit
of the corresponding ID number is turned ON.
Bit 0 to bit 3: ID number 1 to ID number 4
Bit 4 to bit 15: Reserved for system
R WORD
8CH
(140)
Current
Value 0
Over Range
When the current value 0 of each amplifier is
higher than the upper limit of the detection range,
the bit of corresponding ID number is turned ON.
Bit 0 to bit 3: ID number 1 to ID number 4
Bit 4 to bit 15: Reserved for system
R WORD
8DH
(141)
Current
Value 1
Invalid
(Unassigned) R WORD
8EH
(142)
Current
Value 1
Under Range
(Unassigned) R WORD
8FH
(143)
Current
Value 1 Over
Range
(Unassigned) R WORD
90H
(144)
Current
Value 0 (ID
Number 1)
Indicates the current value 0 of the sensor of ID
number 1.
Parameter range:
-2147483648 to 2147483647
R DINT
Instance ID
Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
6-4 Message Communication
6-36
6
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IB S
erie
s
00H
91H
(145)
to 92H
(146)
:
93H
(147)
Current
Value 0 (ID
Number 4)
Indicates the current value 0 of the sensor of ID
number 4.
Parameter range:
-2147483648 to 2147483647
R WORD
94H
(148)
to 9EH
(158)
Current
Value 0 (ID
Number 5) to
(ID Number
15)
(Unassigned) R DINT
9FH
(159)Reserved for system
A0H
(160)
to AEH
(174)
Current
Value 1 (ID
Number 1) to
(ID Number
15)
(Unassigned) R DINT
AFH
(175)Reserved for system
B0H
(176)
Sensor
Status Mask
Setting
Set up the condition to determine if the sensor
error or warning is a recoverable DL-EP1 error
(MS LED blinks in red). If mask is selected, MS
LED does not blink in red when a sensor error or
warning occurs.
Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)
0: Not mask
1: Mask
R/W UINT
B1H
(177)
Sensor
Connected
Number
Indicates the number of connected sensor
amplifiers.
Parameter range: 0 to 4
R UINT
B2H
(178)
to C7H
(199)
Reserved for system
0300H
(768)
Error Code
(ID number
0)
Indicates the error code of ID number 0.
Parameter range: 0 to 65535 R UINT
0301H
(769)
to
0303H
(771)
:
0304H
(772)
Error Code
(ID number
4)
Indicates the error code of ID number 4.
Parameter range: 0 to 65535R UINT
Instance ID
Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
6-4 Message Communication
6-37
6
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IB S
erie
s
For details on current value 0 and current value 1, refer to "Current
Value 0/Current Value 1" (Page 6-12).
00H
0305H
(773)
to
030FH
(783)
Error Code
(ID number
5) to (ID
number 15)
(Unassigned) R UINT
0310H
(784)
to
04FFH
(1279)
Reserved for system
Instance ID
Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
Reference
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
6-4 Message Communication
6-38
6
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IB S
erie
s
Attributes for IB Series
Designate the ID number (01H to 04H) of a sensor amplifier as the instance ID.
If the parameter range is data with a decimal point, read or write the data as aninteger, ignoring the decimal point. For example, if you want to write +1.235(dimension mode) in HIGH setting value (BANK0), write +1235.
Class Attribute ID
Name Description Attribute Data Type
Group1
0320H
(800)
Group1
Entry count
Indicates the group 1 entry count.
Parameter range: 29R DINT
0321H
(801)Error status *1
Reads the error status.
If an error occurs, the corresponding bit is set to
ON.
Bit 0: Overcurrent error (ErC)
Bit 1: EEPROM error (ErE)
Bit 2: Head error (transmitter/receiver)ErH/t r
Bit 3: T/R reverse connection error
(alternate flashing of ErH/rt and ErH/tr)
Bit 4: Transmitter internal error (ErH/t.int
Bit 5: Receiver error (ErH/r
Bit 6: Transmitter error (ErH/t
Bit 7: Transmitter laser error ErH/LASEr
Bit 8: Model mismatch error rH/rAnGE
Bit 9: Ref. light quantity registration error
(rG/dArK,ErG/inF)
Bit 10: Adjust error
(Er. AdJ/dArK, Er. AdJ/ovEr, Er. AdJ/inF)
Bit 11: Communication error between sensor
amplifiers Er.coM
R DWORD
0322H
(802)
Warning
Status
(Check
Output State)
Reads the warning status.
If a warning occurs, the corresponding bit is set
to ON.
Bit 0: 1 when the sensor amplifier is in the check
output state (check output is ON when
N.O. and OFF when N.C.)
R DWORD
0323H
(803)
Warning
function
operating
state (Check
Output
Function
Operation
Status)
Reads the warning function operation status.
If the warning function is in operation, the
corresponding bit is set to ON.
Bit 0: 1 when the check output function is ON
R DWORD
0324H
(804)
Judgement
output/Check
output
Reads the sensor output status.
If the output is ON, the corresponding bit is set to
ON.
Bit 0: HIGH
Bit 1: LOW
Bit 2: GO
Bit 3: Check output
R DWORD
0325H
(805)
Judgment
value (P.V.)*2
Read the comparator value (P.V.).
When measurement mode is % mode: -999.99 to
+999.99
When measurement mode is dimension mode:
-99.999 to +99.999
R DINT
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
6-4 Message Communication
6-39
6
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IB S
erie
s
Group1
0326H(806)
Internal measurement
value (R.V.)*2
Read the R.V. value.When measurement mode is % mode: -999.99 to +999.99When measurement mode is dimension mode: -99.999 to +99.999
R DINT
0327H(807)
Peak-hold value in hold
mode*2
• When the hold function is other than sampleholdReads the peak hold value during sampling.When measurement mode is % mode: -999.99 to +999.99When measurement mode is dimension mode: -99.999 to +99.999
• When the hold function is sample holdWhen measurement mode is % mode: -999.98When measurement mode is dimension mode: -99.998
R DINT
0328H(808)
Bottom-hold value in hold
mode*2
• When the hold function is other than sampleholdReads the bottom-hold value during sampling.When measurement mode is % mode: -999.99 to +999.99When measurement mode is dimension mode: -99.999 to +99.999
• When the hold function is sample holdWhen measurement mode is % mode: -999.98When measurement mode is dimension mode: -99.998
R DINT
0329H(809)
(Reserved for system)
032AH(810)
Analog output value
Reads the current analog output value. (Main unit only)Parameter range:Voltage: -5.000 to +5.000 (when an error occurs: +5.500)4 to 20 mA:+4.00 to +20.00 (when an error occurs: +3.00)OFF: Fixed at 0
R DINT
032BH(811)
Bank status
Reads the number of the currently operating bank.Check the number of bank where the sensor amplifier is actually operating from this attribute.Parameter range: 0 to 3
0: Bank 01: Bank 12: Bank 23: Bank 3
R DINT
032CH(812)
Timing status
Reads the timing status of the operating sensor amplifier.Check the timing status of the actually operating amplifier from this attribute.Parameter range: 0 to 10: Sampling now in progress1: Sampling not in progress
R DINT
032DH(813) to 0331H(817)
(Reserved for system)
Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
6-4 Message Communication
6-40
6
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IB S
erie
s
Group1
0332H
(818)
Laser
emission
stop status
Reads the transmission stop status of the
actually operating sensor amplifier. Check the
transmission stop status of the actually operating
amplifier from this attribute.
Parameter range: 0 to 1
0: Transmission now in progress
1: Transmission stop now in progress
(transmission stop input ON/laser errpr/head
error)
R DINT
0333H
(819)
Abnormal
setting*3
Reads the abnormal setting status.
Parameter range: 0 to 1
0: Normal setting
1: Abnormal setting
R DINT
0334H
(820)
External
input status
Reads the external input setting status.
When the external input line of the sensor
amplifier or the external input of cyclic
communication is ON, the corresponding bit is
set to ON.
The external input operates even if "Not use" is
selected in External Input 1-4 Function Selection.
Bit 0: External input 1
Bit 1: External input 2
Bit 2: External input 3
Bit 3: External input 4
R DWORD
0335H
(821)
EEPROM
writing
result*4
Reads the EEPROM writing result.
Parameter range: 0 to 2
0: Writing now
1: Normal end
2: Abnormal end
R DINT
0336H
(822)
Zero shift
execution
result*5
Reads the execution result of the zero shift or
zero shift reset.
Parameter range: 0 to 2
0: Zero shift or zero shift reset execution now in
progress
1: Normal end
2: Abnormal end (SHiFt Err)
R DINT
0337H
(823)
Reset
execution
result
Reads the reset execution result.
Parameter range: 0 to 2
0: Reset execution now in progress
1: Normal end
2: Abnormal end
R DINT
Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
6-4 Message Communication
6-41
6
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IB S
erie
s
Group1
0338H
(824)
System
parameter
current
state*6
Reads the system parameter current state.
Check the system parameter of the actually
operating amplifier from this attribute.
The bit corresponding to the current state is set
to ON.
Bit0:
0:NPN
1:PNP
Bits 1 to 3 (main unit only. The expansion unit is
fixed at 000.)
000: OFF
001: 0 to 5 V
010: -5 to 5 V
011: 1 to 5 V
100: 4 to 20 mA
R DINT
0339H
(825)(Reserved for system)
033AH
(826)
Ref. light
registration
result
Reads the Ref. light registration result.
Parameter range: 0 to 3
0: Ref. light registration now in progress
1: Normal end
2: Insufficient light reception error
3: Interfering light error
R DINT
033BH
(827)Adjust result
Reads the adjust/adjust reset execution result.
Parameter range: 0 to 4
0: Adjust/adjust reset execution now in progress
1: Normal end
2: Insufficient light quantity error
3: Interfering light error
4: Light quantity excess error
R DINT
033CH
(828)
Tuning
result*7
Reads the execution result of tolerance/two-point
tuning.
Parameter range: 0 to 2
0: Tolerance/two-point tuning execution now in
progress
1: Normal end
2: Abnormal end
R DINT
033DH
(829)
Correction
result*8
Reads the execution result of measured
correction/theoretical correction.
Parameter range: 0 to 2
0: Measured correction/theoretical correction
execution now in progress
1: Normal end
2: Abnormal end
R DINT
033EH
(830) to
033FH
(831)
(Reserved for system)
Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
6-4 Message Communication
6-42
6
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IB S
erie
s
Group2
0340H
(832)
Group2 Entry
count
Indicates the group 2 entry count.
Parameter range: 12R DINT
0341H
(833)
HIGH setting
value
(BANK 0)
Sets the HIGH setting value (BANK 0).
When measurement mode is % mode:
-999.99 to +999.99 (initial value: 20.00)
When measurement mode is dimension mode:
-99.999 to +99.999 (initial value: 2,000)
R/W DINT
0342H
(834)
LOW setting
value
(BANK 0)
Sets the LOW setting value (BANK 0).
When measurement mode is % mode:
-999.99 to +999.99 (initial value: 10.00)
When measurement mode is dimension mode:
-99.999 to +99.999 (initial value: 1,000)
R/W DINT
0343H
(835)
Shift
target value
(BANK 0)
Sets the shift target value (BANK 0).
When measurement mode is % mode:
-999.99 to +999.99 (initial value: 0.00)
When measurement mode is dimension mode:
-99.999 to +99.999 (initial value: 0.000)
R/W DINT
0344H
(836)
HIGH setting
value
(BANK 1)
Sets the HIGH setting value (BANK 1).
When measurement mode is % mode:
-999.99 to +999.99 (initial value: 20.00)
When measurement mode is dimension mode:
-99.999 to +99.999 (initial value: 2,000)
R/W DINT
0345H
(837)
LOW setting
value
(BANK 1)
Sets the LOW setting value (BANK 1).
When measurement mode is % mode:
-999.99 to +999.99 (initial value: 10.00)
When measurement mode is dimension mode:
-99.999 to +99.999 (initial value: 1,000)
R/W DINT
0346H
(838)
Shift
target value
(BANK 1)
Sets the shift target value (BANK 1).
When measurement mode is % mode:
-999.99 to +999.99 (initial value: 0.00)
When measurement mode is dimension mode:
-99.999 to +99.999 (initial value: 0.000)
R/W DINT
0347H
(839)
HIGH setting
value
(BANK 2)
Sets the HIGH setting value (BANK 2).
When measurement mode is % mode:
-999.99 to +999.99 (initial value: 20.00)
When measurement mode is dimension mode:
-99.999 to +99.999 (initial value: 2,000)
R/W DINT
0348H
(840)
LOW setting
value
(BANK 2)
Sets the LOW setting value (BANK 2).
When measurement mode is % mode:
-999.99 to +999.99 (initial value: 10.00)
When measurement mode is dimension mode:
-99.999 to +99.999 (initial value: 1,000)
R/W DINT
0349H
(841)
Shift
target value
(BANK 2)
Sets the shift target value (BANK 2).
When measurement mode is % mode:
-999.99 to +999.99 (initial value: 0.00)
When measurement mode is dimension mode:
-99.999 to +99.999 (initial value: 0.000)
R/W DINT
Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
6-4 Message Communication
6-43
6
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IB S
erie
s
Group2
034AH
(842)
HIGH setting
value
(BANK 3)
Sets the HIGH setting value (BANK 3).
When measurement mode is % mode:
-999.99 to +999.99 (initial value: 20.00)
When measurement mode is dimension mode:
-99.999 to +99.999 (initial value: 2,000)
R/W DINT
034BH
(843)
LOW setting
value
(BANK 3)
Sets the LOW setting value (BANK 3).
When measurement mode is % mode:
-999.99 to +999.99 (initial value: 10.00)
When measurement mode is dimension mode:
-99.999 to +99.999 (initial value: 1,000)
R/W DINT
034CH
(844)
Shift
target value
(BANK 3)
Sets the shift target value (BANK 3).
When measurement mode is % mode:
-999.99 to +999.99 (initial value: 0.00)
When measurement mode is dimension mode:
-99.999 to +99.999 (initial value: 0.000)
R/W DINT
034DH
(845) to
035FH
(863)
(Reserved for system)
Group3
0360H
(864)
Group3 Entry
count
Indicates the group 3 entry count.
Parameter range: 20R DINT
0361H
(865)Key lock setting
Sets key lock.
Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)
0: Unlock
1: Key lock
R/W DINT
0362H
(866)Bank setting
Reads the current attribute.
Check the number of the bank where the sensor
amplifier is operating from the bank status
(032BH811)).
Parameter range: 0 to 3
R DINT
Changes the operating bank.
To change the bank number using this attribute, set
"bank switching method (0396H(918))" to "button".
For "external input", this attribute is invalid.
Parameter range: 0 to 3
0: Rewrites the operating bank with bank 0.
1: Rewrites the operating bank with bank 1.
2: Rewrites the operating bank with bank 2.
3: Rewrites the operating bank with bank 3.
W DINT
0363H
(867)Timing input*9
Sets the timing input.
Check the timing input status of the operating
sensor amplifier according to the timing status
(032CH(812)).
The sensor amplifier operates based on OR of
the external input line and cyclic communication.
Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)
0: Timing input OFF
1: Timing input ON
R/W DINT
Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
6-4 Message Communication
6-44
6
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IB S
erie
s
Group3
0364H
(868)
Laser
emission
stop input*9
Sets the laser emission stop input status.
Check the emission stop input status of the
operating sensor amplifier from the transmission
stop status (0332H(818)).
The sensor amplifier operates based on OR of
the external input line and cyclic communication.
Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)
0: Emission stop input OFF
1: Emission stop input ON
R/W DINT
0365H
(869) to
0367H
(871)
(Reserved for system)
0368H
(872)
Sub display's
screen
Sets the sub display's screen.
Parameter range: 0 to 4 (initial value: 0)
0: r.v value
1: Analog value
2: HI setting value
3: LO setting value
4: Zero shift value
R/W DINT
0369H
(873)
System
parameter*6
Sets the system parameter.
Reflecting the system parameter setting requires
"system parameter set execution request
(0306H(774)) of the operation command after the
setting is written.
Check the system parameter of the operating
sensor amplifier from 0338(H824).
Bit0:
0:NPN
1:PNP
Bits 1 to 3 (main unit only. The expansion unit is
fixed at 000.)
000: OFF
001: 0 to 5 V
010: 5 to 5 V
011: -1 to 5 V
100: 4 to 20 mA
R/W DINT
036AH
(874)
Tol. tuning
setting width
Sets the tolerance setting width.
When measurement mode is % mode:
0.00 to 999.99 (initial value: 10.00)
When measurement mode is dimension mode:
0.000 to 99.999 (initial value: 1,000)
R/W DINT
036BH
(875)
Calibration
function*10, *11
Sets the correction method.
Parameter range: 0 to 2 (initial value: 0)
0: No correction
1: Measured correction
2: Theoretical correction (% mode only)
R/W DINT
Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
6-4 Message Communication
6-45
6
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IB S
erie
s
Group3
036CH
(876)
Meas./Logical
correct
target 1*10, *11, *12
Sets the 1st-point target value of the measured
correction or logical correction.
When measurement mode is % mode:
-999.99 to +999.99 (initial value: 0.00)
When measurement mode is dimension mode:
-99.999 to +99.999 (measured correction only)
(initial value: 0.000)
R/W DINT
036DH
(877)
Meas./Logical
correct
target 2*10, *11, *12
Sets the 2nd-point target value of the measured
correction or logical correction.
When measurement mode is % mode:
-999.99 to +999.99 (initial value: 100.00)
When measurement mode is dimension mode:
-99.999 to +99.999 (measured correction only)
(initial value: 10.000)
R/W DINT
036EH
(878) to
0372H
(882)
(Reserved for system)
0373H
(883)
Logical
correction
measured 1*11, *12
Sets the logical correction 1st-point
measurement value.
When measurement mode is % mode:
-999.99 to +999.99 (initial value: 0.00)
When measurement mode is dimension mode:
Unusable
R/W DINT
0374H
(884)
Logical
correction
measured 2*11, *12
Sets the logical correction 2nd-point
measurement value.
When measurement mode is % mode:
-999.99 to +999.99 (initial value: 100.00)
When measurement mode is dimension mode:
Unusable
R/W DINT
0375H
(885) to
037FH
(895)
(Reserved for system)
Group4
0380H
(896)
Group4
Entry count
Indicates the group 4 entry count.
Parameter range: 30R DINT
0381H
(897)(Reserved for system)
0382H
(898)
Measurement
mode15
Sets measurement mode.
Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)
0: % mode
1: Dimension mode
R/W DINT
0383H
(899)
Received/
Blocked light
mode
Sets light entrance/light shading amount mode.
Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)
0: Light entrance amount display
1: Light shading amount display
R/W DINT
0384H
(900)(Reserved for system)
Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
6-4 Message Communication
6-46
6
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IB S
erie
s
Group4
0385H
(901)
Averaging/
High-pass
filter
Sets the averaging/high-path filter.Parameter range: 0 to 19 (initial value: 5)
0 : 1 times
1 : Twice
2 : 4 times
3 : 8 times
4 : 16 times
5 : 64 times
6 : 256 times
7 : 1024 times
8 : 4096 times
9 : 16384 times
10 : 0.1Hz
11 : 0.2Hz
12 : 0.5Hz
13 : 1Hz
14 : 2Hz
15 : 5Hz
16 : 10Hz
17 : 20Hz
18 : 50Hz
19 : 100Hz
R/W DINT
0386H
(902)Output mode
Sets output mode.Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)0: N.O.1: N.C.
R/W DINT
0387H
(903)(Reserved for system)
0388H
(904)
Hold
function
setting
Sets the hold function.Parameter range: 0 to 5 (initial value: 0)0: Sample hold1: Peak hold2: Bottom hold3: Peak-to-peak hold4: Auto peak hold5: Auto bottom hold
R/W DINT
0389H
(905)
Auto hold
trigger level
Sets the auto peak hold trigger level or auto bottom hold trigger level.When measurement mode is % mode:-999.99 to +999.99 (initial value: 90.00)When measurement mode is dimension mode:-99.999 to +99.999 (initial value: 9,000)
R/W DINT
038AH
(906)
Timing input
setting
Sets the timing input.Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)0: Level1: Edge
R/W DINT
038BH
(907)Delay timer
Sets the delay timer.Parameter range: 0 to 3 (initial value: 0)0: OFF1: On delay2: Off delay3: One shot
R/W DINT
Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
6-4 Message Communication
6-47
6
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IB S
erie
s
Group4
038CH
(908)
Timer
duration
Sets the timer duration.
Parameter range: 1 to 9999 (initial value: 60)
1 to 9999
R/W DINT
038DH
(909)Hysteresis
Sets the hysteresis.
When measurement mode is % mode:
0.00 to 999.99 (initial value: 0.00)
When measurement mode is dimension mode:
0 to 99.999 (initial value: 0)
R/W DINT
038EH
(910)
Analog
output
scaling*13
Sets the analog output scaling. (Main unit only)
Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)
0: Initial state
1: Free range
R/W DINT
038FH
(911)
Analog
output upper
limit*13
Sets the analog output upper limit. (Main unit
only)
When measurement mode is % mode:
-999.99 to +999.99 (initial value: 100.00)
When measurement mode is dimension mode:
-99.999 to +99.999 (initial value: 10,000)
R/W DINT
0390H
(912)
Analog
output lower
limit*13
Sets the analog output lower limit. (Main unit
only)
When measurement mode is % mode:
-999.99 to +999.99 (initial value: 0.00)
When measurement mode is dimension mode:
-99.999 to +99.999 (initial value: 0)
R/W DINT
0391H
(913)
External
input setting *14
Sets whether to change external input 1 to 4
function assignment from the initial state.
Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)
0: Initial setting
1: User setting
R/W DINT
0392H
(914)
Ext. IN1
function
selection*14
Sets the function to be assigned to external input 1.
Parameter range: 0 to 4 (initial value: 0)
0: Zero shift input
1: Bank A input
2: Bank B input
3: Laser emission stop input
4: Not use
R/W DINT
0393H
(915)
Ext. IN2
function
selection*14
Sets the function to be assigned to external input 2.
Parameter range: 0 to 4 (initial value: 0)
0: Reset input
1: Bank A input
2: Bank B input
3: Laser emission stop input
4: Not use
R/W DINT
Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
6-4 Message Communication
6-48
6
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IB S
erie
s
Group4
0394H
(916)
Ext. IN3
function
selection*14
Sets the function to be assigned to external input 3.
Parameter range: 0 to 4 (initial value: 0)
0: Timing input
1: Bank A input
2: Bank B input
3: Laser emission stop input
4: Not use
R/W DINT
0395H
(917)
Ext. IN4
function
selection*14
Sets the function to be assigned to external input 4.
Parameter range: 0 to 4 (initial value: 4)
0: Adjust input
1: Bank A input
2: Bank B input
3: Laser emission stop input
4: Not use
R/W DINT
0396H
(918)
Bank
switching
method
Sets the bank switching method.
Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)
0: Button
1: External Input
R/W DINT
0397H
(919)(Reserved for system)
0398H
(920)
Save zero-
shift state
Sets whether to store the zero shift status.
Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)
0:OFF
1:ON
R/W DINT
0399H
(921)(Reserved for system)
039AH
(922)Display digit
Sets the display resolution.
When measurement mode is % mode:
0: Initial setting (dEFLt) (initial value)
1: (Reserved for system)
2: (Reserved for system)
3:0.01
4:0.1
5:1
When measurement mode is dimension mode:
0: Initial setting (dEFLt) (initial value)
1: (Reserved for system)
2:0.001
3:0.01
4:0.1
5:1
R/W DINT
039BH
(923)
Power
savefunction
Sets the power saving function.
Parameter range: 0 to 2 (initial value: 0)
0:OFF
1: Half
2: All
R/W DINT
039CH
(924)(Reserved for system)
Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
6-4 Message Communication
6-49
6
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IB S
erie
s
Group4
039DH
(925)
Judgment
indicator
color
Sets the display colors of judgement output
indicators.
Parameter range: 0 to 3 (initial value: 0)
0: Only GO is green (initial status)
1: Only GO is red
2: All P.V. values are green
3: All P.V. values are red
R/W DINT
039EH
(926)
P.V. value
display color
Sets P.V. value display colors.
Parameter range: 0 to 3 (initial value: 0)
0: Green when GO (initial status)
1: Red when GO
2: All P.V. values are green
3: All P.V. values are red
R/W DINT
039FH
(927)(Reserved for system)
Group5
03A0H
(928)
Group5
Entry count
Indicates the group 5 entry count.
Parameter range: 9R DINT
03A1H
(929)
Save adjust
state
Sets whether to store the adjust status.
Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)
0:OFF
1:ON
R/W DINT
03A2H
(930)Adjust level
Sets an adjust level.
Parameter range: 1 to 30 (initial value: 20)R/W DINT
03A3H
(931)
Auto
adjust
function
Sets whether to enable the auto adjust function.
Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)
0: Disable
1: Enable
R/W DINT
03A4H
(932)
Auto
adjust level
Sets an auto adjust level.
0.50 to 20.00 (initial value: 3.00)R/W DINT
03A5H
(933)
Check output
function
Sets whether to enable the check output
function.
Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)
0: OFF
1: ON
R/W DINT
03A6H
(934)
Check output
light level
Sets the light quantity level of the check output
function.
Parameter range: 1 to 30 (initial value: 10)
R/W DINT
03A7H
(935)
Error output
mode
Sets error output mode.
Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)
0: Normal mode (initial status)
1: Compatibility mode
R/W DINT
03A8H
(936)
Hysteresis
for trigger
level
Sets the trigger level hysteresis.
Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)
0: Initial state
1: User setting
R/W DINT
03A9H(937)
Hys. set value for trigger level
Sets the hysteresis setting value for trigger level.When measurement mode is % mode:0.00 to 999.99 (initial value: 1.00)When measurement mode is dimension mode:0.000 to 99.999 (initial value: 0.100)
R/W DINT
03AAH (938) to 03BFH (959)
(Reserved for system)
Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
6-4 Message Communication
6-50
6
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IB S
erie
s
*1 You can check the error contents of the sensor amplifier according to the
ON/OFF status of each bit.
OFF(0): No error occurred. ON(1): An error occurred.
Two or more errors may simultaneously occur. For details on each error, refer
to "IB Series User's Manual".
Group6
03C0H(960)
Group6 Entry
count
Indicates the group 6 entry count.Parameter range: 11
R DINT
03C1H(961)
Product code
Indicates the product code.
Main unit: 4020
Expansion unit: 4021
R DINT
03C2H(962)
RevisionIndicates the revision.Parameter range: 0101H
R DINT
03C3H(963)
Transmission SideHead Model
Indicates the model of the head connected to the sensor head connector (transmission side).Parameter range: 0 to 40: No head is connected or the R head is connected.1: IB-012: IB-053: IB-104: IB-30
R DINT
03C4H(964)
Light Receiving SideHead Model
Indicates the model of the head connected to the sensor head connector (light receiving side).Parameter range: 0 to 40: No head is connected or the T head is connected.1: IB-012: IB-053: IB-104: IB-30
R DINT
03C5H (965) to 03C7H (967)
(Reserved for system)
03C8H(968)
Product
name
Indicates the sensor product name.Main unit: "IB-1000/1500"Expansion unit: "IB-1050/1550"
R STRING
03C9H (969) to 03D6H (982)
(Reserved for system)
03D7H(983)
Series codeIndicates the series code.Main unit: 4020Expansion unit: 4021
R DINT
03D8H
(984)
Series
version
Indicates the series version.
Parameter range: 1R DINT
03D9H(985)
Device typeIndicates the device type.Parameter range: 0
R DINT
03DAH (986) to 03DFH (991)
(Reserved for system)
Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
6-4 Message Communication
6-51
6
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IB S
erie
s
*2 If the read data is any of the following, the meaning of this attribute differs
from the meaning of the comparator value.
When measurement mode is % mode:
+ 999.99: The value exceeds the upper limit of the display range.
-999.99: The value exceeds - 999.98 or the lower limit of the display range.
-999.98: The value is "-----" (comparator value invalid).
+1000.00: The sensor amplifier is in the error status.
When measurement mode is dimension mode:
+99.999: The value exceeds the upper limit of the display range.
-99.999: -99.998 or the lower limit of the display range.
-99.998: The value is "-----" (comparator value invalid).
+100,000: The sensor amplifier is in the error status.
*3 If a write for which a combination of inhibited functions is set is executed,
abnormal setting (1) occurs. For details on each function, refer to "IB Series
User's Manual".
*4 The results of "initial reset request" and "system parameter set request" for
the operation command are also included in this item.
*5 The execution result for the lastly requested item of "zero shift execution
request" or "zero shift request execution request" is read.
*6 You can check the system parameter of the sensor amplifier by reading
"system parameter current state". The system parameter sets a judgement
output, check output polarity, and analog output.
Designate the system parameter set when the operation command executes
"system parameter set request" as "system parameter".
A read or write value is designated by ON/OFF of each of the bits to be
converted to a binary number.
When the read data is "6":
"6" is converted to "0110" in binary representation.
For this reason, the sensor amplifier that read data is set to "NPN
output" and "analog output 1 to 5 V".
*7 Of "tolerance tuning request", "2-point tuning HIGH side 2nd", and "2-point
tuning LOW side 2nd" for the operation command, the execution result for
the lastly requested item is read.
Bit Setting
00: NPN output
1: PNP output
3, 2, 1
000: Analog output OFF
001: 0 to 5V
010: -5 to +5V
011: 1 to 5V
100: 4 to 20mA
(Fixed to 000 for expansion unit)
Reference
0110 0
Bits 3, 2, 1: 1 to 5 V Bit 0: NPN output
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
6-4 Message Communication
6-52
6
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IB S
erie
s
*8 The execution result for the lastly requested item of "measured correction" or
"logical correction" is read.
In the following cases, the execution result becomes "2: Abnormal end".
• The setting value is out of the parameter range.
• The 2nd-point correction execution is requested without the 1st-point
correction execution requested.
• Correction execution is requested when calibration function setting is "0:
Initial setting".
• Logical correction execution is requested when calibration function is
setting is "1: Measured correction".
• Measured correction execution is requested when calibration function
setting is "2: Logical correction".
• Logical correction execution is requested when measurement mode is
dimension mode.
*9 This attribute operates as OFF only when input OFF(0) is written and external
input is OFF in wiring and cyclic communication.
*10 To execute measured correction, set the calibration function (036BH(875)) to
"1. Measured correction".
When executing measured correction, set measured correction 1st-point
target value (036CH(876)) and measured correction 2nd-point target value
(036DH(877)) and then execute the measured correction execution request
(operation command , 0313(H787), 0314H(788)).
*11 To execute measured correction, set the calibration function (036BH(875)) to
"2. Measured correction".
When executing theoretical correction, set theoretical correction 1st target
value (036CH(876)), theoretical correction 2nd target value (036DH(877)),
theoretical correction 1st measurement value (0373H(883)), and theoretical
correction 2nd measurement value (0374H(884)) and then execute the
theoretical correction execution request (operation command (031AH(794),
031BH(795)).
*12 Executing other settings in the middle of the 1st- or 2nd-point target or
measurement value makes it impossible to complete calibration setting. Be
sure to set the 1st- and 2nd-point target or measurement values
continuously.
*13 If an attempt is made to write data to the expansion unit, a write error occurs.
*14 To reflect the settings written in external input 1 to 4 function selection
(0392H(914) to 0395H(917)) in the sensor amplifier, you must set external
input setting (0391H(913)) to 1 (user setting) or set external input setting to
"user setting" in button operation of the sensor amplifier.
*15 When a write is executed, the data communication time between the DL-EP1
and sensor amplifier becomes approx. 1 second. "Data Processing Time"
(Page 8-3)
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
6-4 Message Communication
6-53
6
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IB S
erie
s
The following describes how to perform message communication with a DL Object.
(1) Reading parameters from a sensor amplifier
(2) Writing parameters to a sensor amplifier
(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier
(4) Locking sensor amplifier operations
(5) Reading the number of decimal places from a sensor amplifier
(1) Reading parameters from a sensor amplifier
Message communication reads each parameter from the DL-EP1 and the sensor
amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.
Service code 0EH is used.
The following settings are required to use this object.
• Service Code
• Class ID
• Instance ID
• Attribute ID
• Commands
• Responses (when successful)
Using DL Object
Item Description Data Example
Service CodeDesignates "Parameter read (0EH)" (fixed
value).0EH
Class ID Designates DL Object(67H) (fixed value). 67H
Instance ID Designates the ID number. 0AH
Attribute IDDesignates the attribute ID to be read from
"Attribute".0324H(804)
Service Data There is no service data. -
Item Description Data Example
General status
A status (00H) is returned that indicates
normal completion of message
communication.
00H
Service response
data
The settings of the read parameter are
returned.0000H
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
6-4 Message Communication
6-54
6
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IB S
erie
s
• Responses (when unsuccessful)
For details on the attribute ID, settings, general status, and additional status of each
parameter, refer to "DL Object (Class ID:67H)" (Page 6-32) and "Attributes"
(Page 6-34).
(2) Writing parameters to a sensor amplifier
Message communication writes parameters to the DL-EP1 and the sensor amplifierconnected to the DL-EP1.Service code 10H is used.The following settings are required to use this object.• Service Code• Class ID• Instance ID• Attribute ID• Service Data
• Commands
• Responses (when successful)
Item Description Data Example
General status A general status for the service is returned 16H
Additional status An additional status is returned. -
Service response
dataThere is no service response data. -
Item Description Data Example
Service CodeDesignates "Parameter write (10H)" (fixed value).
10H
Class ID Designates DL Object(67H) (fixed value). 67H
Instance ID Designates the ID number. 05H
Attribute IDDesignates the attribute ID to be written from "Attribute".
0347H(839)
Service Data Writes the setting. 0064H
Item Description Data Example
General status
A status (00H) is returned that indicates normal completion of message communication. (The written parameters are reflected in the sensor amplifier at the status (00H) return timing.)
00H
Service response data
There is no service response data. -
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
6-4 Message Communication
6-55
6
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IB S
erie
s
• Responses (when unsuccessful)
For details on the attribute ID, settings, general status, and additional status of eachparameter, refer to "DL Object (Class ID:67H)" (Page 6-32) and "Attributes"(Page 6-34).
(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier
Message communication issues operation commands such as error clear to the
sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.
Service code 4BH is used.
The following settings are required to use this object.
• Service Code
• Class ID
• Instance ID
• Attribute ID
Before executing the operation command, check that the sensor amplifiercan execute the operation command. For details on the check method,refer to "IB Series User's Manual". Also, check that the executed operationcommand ends normally.
• Attribute IDs supported by the instance service 4BH (operation command)
The contents of processing performed by the instance service 4BH (operation
command) depend on the attribute ID to be selected.
The table below details the attribute IDs that can be selected.
Item Description Data Example
General status A general status for the service is returned 0EH
Additional status An additional status is returned. -
Service response data
There is no service response data. -
Attribute ID Name Description
0301H(769)
Zero shift request
Executes zero shift.
Turning off the sensor amplifier after executing zero shift restores the state before the zero shift function is used. If the shift state is retained
even after the sensor amplifier is turned off, set the saving zero shift value function to ON.
0302H(770)
Zero shift reset request Resets the zero shift value.
0303H(771)
Resets request Executes reset
Point
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
6-4 Message Communication
6-56
6
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IB S
erie
s
0304H(772)
Error clear requestClears the ref. light quantity registration error [ErG] and adjust error [ErAdJ].
0305H
(773)Initial reset request
Initializes all the settings other than the
calibration, ref. light quantity registration, and system parameters of the sensor amplifier.All parameters are stored in nonvolatile
memory (EEPROM) approx. 3 minutes after the initial reset request is executed. After the initial reset request has been executed, "EEPROM
write result" of the attribute for IB Series becomes normal end (1).
0306H
(774)
System parameter set
request
Changes the contents of the system parameter (settings of judgement output, check output
polarity, and analog output) to the contents written in "system parameter" of the attribute for the IB Series.
When executing the system parameter set, change the contents tailored to the connected devices and wiring. If the contents are
changed by mistake, the devices connected to the sensor amplifier may go down.
030AH(778)
Ref. light registration request
Registers the ref. light quantity.
030BH(779)
Adjust request
Executes the adjust function.
Turning off the sensor amplifier after executing the adjust function restores the state before the adjust function is executed. If the adjust value is
retained even after the sensor amplifier is turned off, set the adjust status storage function to ON.
030CH(780)
Adjust reset request Initializes the adjust value.
030EH(782)
Tolerance tuning request
Executes tolerance tuning.
Set the tolerance setting width using the attribute for IB Series "tolerance setting width".
030FH
(783)
2-point tuning HIGH
side 1st req
Executes 2-point tuning.
For details on the two-point tuning execution procedure, refer to "IB Series User's Manual".
0310H(784)
2-point tuning HIGH side 2nd req (Determine HIGH
setting value.)
0311H(785)
2-point tuning LOW side 1st req
0312H
(786)
2-point tuning LOW side 2nd req
(Determine LOW setting value)
Attribute ID Name Description
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
6-4 Message Communication
6-57
6
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IB S
erie
s
*2 To execute measured correction, set the calibration function (036BH(875)) to "1.
Measured correction".
When executing measured correction, set measured correction 1st-point target
value (036CH(876)) and measured correction 2nd-point target value036DH(877))
and then execute the measured correction execution request (operation
command , 0313H(787)), 0314H788.
*3 To execute measured correction, set the calibration function (036BH(875)) to "2.
Measured correction".
When executing logical correction, set logical correction 1st target value
(036CH(876)), logical correction 2nd target value (036DH(877)), logical
correction 1st measurement value (0373H(883)), and logical correction 2nd
measurement value (0374H(884)) and then execute the logical correction
execution request (operation command (031AH(794), 031BH(795)).
*4 Executing other settings in the middle of the 1st- or 2nd-point target or
measurement value makes it impossible to complete calibration setting. Be sure
to set the 1st- and 2nd-point target or measurement values continuously.
• Commands
0313H
(787)
Measured correction 1st req
(SET1 confirmationoperation)
Executes measured correction.Set the R.V. value that you want to display in
the attribute for the IB Series "Measured Correction/Theoretical Correction 1st Point Target Value" or "Measured Correction/
Theoretical Correction 2nd Point Target Value".For details on the measured correction execution procedure, refer to "IB Series User's
Manual".*2, *4
0314H(788)
Measured correction
2nd req(SET2 confirmationoperation)
031AH(794)
Logical correction 1st
req(SET1 confirmation operation)
Executes logical correction.
Set the R.V. value that you want to correct in the attribute for IB Series "logical correction 1st point measurement value" or "logical correction
2nd point measurement value".Set the R.V. value that you want to display in the attribute for the IB Series "Measured
Correction/Logical Correction 1st Point Target Value" or "Measured Correction/Theoretical
Correction 2nd Point Target Value".For details on the measured correction execution procedure, refer to "IB Series User's
Manual".*3, *4
031BH(795)
Logical correction 2nd
req(SET2 confirmation operation)
Item Description Data Example
Service CodeDesignates the "operation command (4BH)"
(fixed value).4BH
Class ID Designates DL Object (67H)(fixed value). 67H
Attribute ID Name Description
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
6-4 Message Communication
6-58
6
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IB S
erie
s
• Responses (when successful)
• Responses (when unsuccessful)
For details on the attribute ID, settings, general status, and additional status of each
parameter, refer to "DL Object (Class ID:67H)" (Page 6-32) and "Attributes"
(Page 6-34).
Instance IDDesignates the ID number. The ID number
(00H) of the DL-EP1 cannot be designated.08H
Attribute ID
Designates the attribute ID to be designated
from "Attribute". "(3) Issuing operation
commands to a sensor amplifier" "Attribute
IDs supported by the instance service 4BH
(operation command)" (Page 6-55)
0301H(769)
Service Data There is no service response data. -
Item Description Data Example
General status
A status (00H) is returned that indicates
normal completion of message
communication.
00H
Service response
dataThere is no service response data. -
Item Description Data Example
General status A general status for the service is returned 08H
Additional status An additional status is returned. -
Service response
dataThere is no service response data. -
Item Description Data Example
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
6-4 Message Communication
6-59
6
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IB S
erie
s
(4) Locking sensor amplifier operations
Message communication executes batch key lock for the sensor amplifier connected
to the DL-EP1.
Service code 4CH is used.
The following settings are required to use this object.
• Service Code
• Class ID
• Instance ID
• Attribute ID
• Service Data
• Commands
• Responses (when successful)
• Responses (when unsuccessful)
If a sensor amplifier that does not support key lock is connected to the DL-EP1, the error code 09H is returned (the settings of the sensor amplifier arenot changed).
Item Description Data Example
Service CodeDesignates the "batch lock setting (4CH)"
(fixed value).4CH
Class ID Designates DL Object (67H)(fixed value). 67H
Instance IDDesignates ID number 0 (00H) for issuing a
command to the DL-EP1 (fixed value).00H
Attribute ID There is no data. -
Service Data Designates the batch lock setting. 0001H
Item Description Data Example
General statusMessage communication has ended
normally.00H
Service response
dataThere is no service response data. -
Item Description Data Example
General status A general status for the service is returned 08H
Additional status An additional status is returned. -
Service response
dataThere is no service response data. -
Point
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
6-4 Message Communication
6-60
6
Co
mm
un
ica
ting
with
IB S
erie
s
(5) Reading the number of decimal places in the parameter from a sensor
amplifier
Message communication reads the number of decimal places in the parameter from
the sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.
Service code 4DH is used.
The following settings are required to use this object.
• Service Code
• Class ID
• Instance ID
• Attribute ID
• Commands
• Responses (when successful)
• Responses (when unsuccessful)
For details on the attribute ID, settings, general status, and additional status of each
parameter, refer to "DL Object (Class ID:67H)" (Page 6-32) and "Attributes"
(Page 6-34).
Item Description Data Example
Service Code Designates parameter read (fixed value). 4DH
Class ID Designates DL Object (67H)(fixed value). 67H
Instance ID Designates the ID number. 01H
Attribute IDDesignates the attribute ID to be read from
"Attribute".
03A1H
(929)
Service Data There is no service data. -
Item Description Data Example
General statusMessage communication has ended
normally.00H
Service response
dataThe read decimal point position is returned. 04H
Item Description Data Example
General status A general status for the service is returned 14H
Additional status An additional status is returned. -
Service response
dataThere is no service response data. -
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 7-1
7Communicating with
FD-MH Series
This chapter describes the configuration of memory that
communicates with the EtherNet/IP compatible network unit
and a communication timing chart.
7-1 What is EtherNet/IP?...........................................7-2
7-2 DL-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication Function ....7-3
7-3 Cyclic communication..........................................7-5
7-4 Message Communication..................................7-21
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -7-2
7
Co
mm
unic
atin
g w
ith F
D-M
H S
erie
s
7-1 What is EtherNet/IP?
EtherNet/IP is an industrial communication network with open specifications. The
specifications are managed by ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendor Association, Inc.).
Industrial protocol has been combined with the Ethernet and standardized as Ether-
Net/IP (Industrial Protocol).
Communication is realized by combining the protocols known as Common Industrial
Protocol (CIP) with TCP/IP and Ethernet. This allows regular Ethernet to be used
together with the network.
Before starting EtherNet/IP communication, one of the devices must open a
communication line called a "connection" with the other device. The side which
opens the connection is called the "scanner", and the side to be opened is called the
"adaptor". (The DL-EP1 is an adaptor.)
EtherNet/IP includes cyclic communication (Implicit messaging) which sends and
receives data periodically. Message communication (Explicit messaging) which
sends and receives commands and responses at a time specified by the user.
Cyclic communication enables you to set RPI (Requested Packet Interval) according
to the priority of the data to be exchanged, allowing the entire communication load to
be adjusted for data exchange.
Message communication enables you to exchange the required commands and
responses at the required timing. Message communication is used for applications
which do not require the punctuality of cyclic communication, such as reading and
writing adaptor settings.
What is EtherNet/IP?
Scanner
Adaptor Adaptor Adaptor
High speed(Communication cycle: 10 ms)
Regular speed(Communication cycle: 100 ms)
Low speed (Communication cycle: 1000 ms)
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 7-3
7
Co
mm
unic
atin
g w
ith F
D-M
H S
erie
s
7-2 DL-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication Function
This section describes the EtherNet/IP functions supported by the DL-EP1.
The DL-EP1 functions as an EtherNet/IP adaptor, and supports both cyclic and
message EtherNet/IP communications.
The EtherNet/IP scanner can use the following functions:
Output
Comparator Value
・・・・・・Error information
External input
Setting value
Output
Comparator Value
・・・・・・Error information
External input
Setting value
IN area
OUT area
Output
Current value
Error information
External input
EtherNet/IP scanner DL-EP1
Sensor amplifier
Message communication
Output
Comparator Value
・・・・・・Error information
IN area
OUT areaDirect read/write of various parameters
Cyclic communicationExternal input
Setting value
Cyclic communication
Overview of Communication Methods
Function of sensor amplifier
Communication Methods
Cyclic communication(Page 7-5)
Message Communication(Page 7-21)
Read status
Read output
Read current value
Execute external input
Change bank number
X
Rewrite setting value
Motion command
Read current value, setting,
and status
Read number of decimal
places
Rewrite setting value
Lock all
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
7-2 DL-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication Function
7-4
7
Co
mm
unic
atin
g w
ith F
D-M
H S
erie
s
Cyclic communication
This function sends and receives data between the scanner and DL-EP1 at the set
RPI (Requested Packet Interval). The function can exchange data such as the
sensor amplifier's output signals and comparator values and error status without
ladder programs.
Configurations such as RPI and data size for cyclic communication are seton the scanner side.In a network which has many connected devices, including EtherNet/IPdevices, a delay or packet loss could occur if a large load is constantly ortemporarily applied on the network. Verify the settings carefully beforeoperation.
Message communication
Message communication can be used for applications which do not require a
punctuality like cyclic communication.
In message communication, various parameters, including data which can be
exchanged with cyclic communication, can be read and written. Functions specific
to sensors such as the sensor amplifier preset function can also be executed.
PLC EtherNet/IP scanner
RPI=3 (ms)* RPI=0.5 (ms)*
RPI=5 (ms)*
RPI=10 (ms)*
Various EtherNet/IP adaptors
Ethernet
* RPI (Requested Packet Interval) can be set individually for each connection.
Point
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 7-5
7
Co
mm
unic
atin
g w
ith F
D-M
H S
erie
s
7-3 Cyclic communication
This section describes the cyclic communication functions and how to use them.
What is cyclic communication?
Cyclic communication is a function that exchanges data with the EtherNet/IP device
in a cyclic manner (at a set cycle).
In cyclic communication, data can be exchanged when one device successfully
opens a logical communication line called a "connection" with the other device.
The side which opens the connection is called the scanner, and the side to be
opened is called the adaptor. (The DL-EP1 is an adaptor.)
Cyclic communication is started in the following procedures:
(1) The scanner requests the adaptor to open the connection.
(2) The adapter side checks compatibility.
(3) If no error occurs as a result the compatibility check, the adapter opens the
connection.
(* If an error is found during the compatibility check, the adapter does not open
the connection.)
"Checking the Device Compatibility" (Page 7-20)
Data is exchanged between the EtherNet/IP scanner, DL-EP1 and each sensor
amplifier as follows:
To carry out EtherNet/IP communication with a scanner which does not
support cyclic communication (Allen-Bradley SLC5/05 Series, etc.), use
"Message Communication" (Page 7-21).
(1) Request connection open
(3) Open connection
(2) Check compatibility
Output data
Data reflected in thescanner
Input data
The data output from thescanner is stored by theDL-EP1.
EtherNet/IP scanner DL-EP1 Sensor amplifier
IN area
OUT area
Cyclic communication
Data betweensensors isrefreshed
Cyclic communication
Data betweensensors isrefreshed
Reference
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
7-3 Cyclic communication
7-6
7
Co
mm
unic
atin
g w
ith F
D-M
H S
erie
s
The following settings are required to execute cyclic communication with the DL-
EP1.
[DL-EP1]
The DL-EP1 does not require any setting.
[Scanner]
(1) Set the connection to be used.
(2) Set the devices used in cyclic communication.
Refer to the scanner manual for details on how to make the above settings.
(* No ladder program is required when cyclic communication is used.)
Cyclic communication can use the following functions:
(1) Read status
(2) Read output (Page 7-17)
Outputs that can be read: Output 1, output 2, output 3
(3) Read current value (instantaneous flow rate) (Page 7-18)
(4) Execute external input (Page 7-19)
Inputs that can be used: Integration reset, flow HOLD reset, temperature HOLD
reset
Configuring Cyclic Communication
Actions which can be completed with Cyclic Communication
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
7-3 Cyclic communication
7-7
7
Co
mm
unic
atin
g w
ith F
D-M
H S
erie
s
EtherNet/IP requires that a connection must be opened from the scanner when cyclic
communication is started. There are various types of connections, and the type
usable by each device is defined in the EDS file.
The DL-EP1 can use the following connections:
• Each connection's trigger timing is executed cyclically. The connection
type supports both point-to-point and multicast.
• The details of each application type are as follows:
Exclusive Owner:This connection allows simultaneous setting of both data
transmission from the scanner to the DL-EP1 and data
transmission from the DL-EP1 to the scanner. This setting is
made not only when the scanner monitors the adaptor (DL-EP1)
data, but also when it issues external inputs and rewrites the
settings, etc. Multiple "Exclusive Owner" connections cannot be
opened to one adaptor (DL-EP1).
Input Only:This connection allows only data transmission from the DL-EP1
to the scanner. This setting is made when the scanner only
monitors adaptor (DL-EP1) data. Multiple scanners can open an
"Input Only" connection simultaneously to one adaptor (DL-
EP1).
(* To simultaneously open connections from multiple scanners,
set the Connection Type to Multicast.
Usable Connections
NoConnection
NameInput/Output
Assembly Instance
Size(Byte)
RPI Range (in 0.5 ms)
Application Type
1
Monitor Data
And External
Input
DL-EP1 to
scanner64H (100) 168
0.5 ms to
10000 ms
Exclusive
OwnerScanner to
DL-EP165H (101) 10
2Monitor Data
(Input Only)
DL-EP1 to
scanner64H (100) 168
0.5 ms to
10000 msInput Only
Scanner to
DL-EP1FEH (254) 0
Reference
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
7-3 Cyclic communication
7-8
7
Co
mm
unic
atin
g w
ith F
D-M
H S
erie
s
The data from the DL-EP1 is assigned to the EtherNet/IP scanner's IN area.
The data such as 16-bit data extending over multiple bytes is stored into
an area which starts with an even address in order from the lowest-order
byte.
Example)
Assignment to IN Area (DL-EP1 to Scanner)
DL-EP1 data
Scanner IN area
Address 0Address 1
Address 167
Monitor Data(Assembly Instance: 100)
1-byte (8-bit) data
Reference
16-bit dataAddress 40 to 41
16-bit dataAddress 42 to 43
12H 34H
56H 78H
High-order byte Low-order byte
High-order byte Low-order byte
56H43
78H42
12H41
34H40
32-bit dataAddress 48 to 51
12H51
34H50
56H49
78H48
12H 34H 56H 78H
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
7-3 Cyclic communication
7-9
7
Co
mm
unic
atin
g w
ith F
D-M
H S
erie
s
Monitor Data (84 Words (168 Bytes)) Assembly Instance (Instance ID): 64H
This is the device map for the monitor data to be assigned to the IN area.
For details on each parameter, refer to "Parameter List" (Page 7-11).
For details on current value 0 and current value 1, refer to "Current Value 0/
Current Value 1" (Page 7-12).
Name Address(Byte) bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
Status
0 Reserved for systemDL-EP1
Error Status
1 Error StatusWarningStatus
Reserved for system
SensorError
Status
2 ID08 . . . . . ID01
3Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
SensorWarningStatus
4 ID08 . . . . . ID01
5Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
Current Value 0
OverRange
6 ID08 . . . . . ID01
7Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
Current Value 0UnderRange
8 ID08 . . . . . ID01
9Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
Current Value 0Invalid
10 ID08 . . . . . ID01
11Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
Current Value 1
OverRange
12 ID08 . . . . . ID01
13Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
Current Value 1UnderRange
14 ID08 . . . . . ID01
15Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
Current Value 1Invalid
16 ID08 . . . . . ID01
17Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
Output 1
18 ID08 . . . . . ID01
19Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
Output 2
20 ID08 . . . . . ID01
21Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
Output 3
22 ID08 . . . . . ID01
23Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
Output 4(Unassigned)
24 ID08 . . . . . ID01
25Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
Output 5(Unassigned)
26 ID08 . . . . . ID01
27Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
7-3 Cyclic communication
7-10
7
Co
mm
unic
atin
g w
ith F
D-M
H S
erie
s
External Input
Response 1(Integration
reset)
28 ID08 . . . . . ID01
29Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
External Input
Response 2(Flow HOLD
reset)
30 ID08 . . . . . ID01
31Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
External Input
Response 3(Unassigned)
32 ID08 . . . . . ID01
33Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
External Input
Response 4(Temperature HOLD reset)
34 ID08 . . . . . ID01
35Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
External Input
Response 5(Unassigned)
36 ID08 . . . . . ID01
37Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
ErrorID Number
40Current Error ID Number (16-bit unsigned integer)
41
ErrorCode
42Current Error Code (16-bit unsigned integer)
43
WarningID Number
44Current Warning ID Number (16-bit unsigned integer)
45
Warning Code
46Current Warning Code (16-bit unsigned integer)
47
Current Value 0
(Current value (Instantaneous
flow rate))
48
ID Number 1 (Current Value 0) (32-bit signed integer)49
50
51
: :
104
ID Number 15 (Current Value 0) (32-bit signed integer)105
106
107
Current Value 1
(Unassigned)
108
ID Number 1 (Current Value 1) (32-bit signed integer)109
110
111
: :
164
ID Number 15 (Current Value 1) (32-bit signed integer)165
166
167
Name Address(Byte) bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
7-3 Cyclic communication
7-11
7
Co
mm
unic
atin
g w
ith F
D-M
H S
erie
s
Parameter List
Item Description
DL-EP1 Error
Status
The error status of the DL-EP1 is output.
ON: An error occurred.
OFF: No error occurred.
Warning Status (Unassigned)
Error Status
The error status of the DL-EP1 or the error statuses of all the connected sensor
amplifiers are output.
When ON, a value is stored in "Error ID Number" and "Error Code". When OFF, 0
is stored in "Error ID Number" and "Error Code".
ON: An error occurred in the DL-EP1 or in any of the connected sensor
amplifiers.
OFF: No error occurred in the DL-EP1 or in the connected sensor amplifiers.
Sensor Error Status
The target ID number bit of the sensor amplifier where the error occurred is
output.
ON: An error occurred in the sensor amplifier with the target ID number.
OFF: No error occurred in the sensor amplifier with the target ID number.
Sensor Warning
Status(Unassigned)
Current Value n
Over Range
(n: 0 to 1)
The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number
is compared with the measurement upper limit and the comparison result is
output.
ON: The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID
number is greater than the measurement upper limit.
OFF: The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID
number is less than the measurement upper limit.
(* The current value 1 does not exist in the FD-MH Series.)
Current Value n
Under Range
(n: 0 to 1)
The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number
is compared with the measurement lower limit and the comparison result is
output.
ON: The current value of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is less
than the measurement lower limit.
OFF: The current value of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is
greater than the measurement lower limit.
(* The current value 1 does not exist in the FD-MH Series.)
Current Value n
Invalid
(n: 0 to 1)
The status of current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier with the target ID
number is output.
ON: The current value of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is
invalid.
OFF: The current value of the sensor amplifier with the target ID number is
valid (normal).
(* The current value 1 does not exist in the FD-MH Series.)
Output n (n: 1 to 5)
The ON/OFF status of output n (n: 1 to 5) of the sensor amplifier with the target
ID number is output.
Output 1: Output 1
Output 2: Output 2
Output 3: Output 3
Output 4: (Unassigned)
Output 5: (Unassigned)
ON: Output n is output.
OFF: Output n is not output.
External Input
Response
n (n: 1 to 5)
An external input response is output when the corresponding external input
request n (n: 1 to 5) is made via communication.
The ID number of an unexisting external input is also output.
ON: The external input request was made (ON).
OFF: The external input request was not made (OFF).
For details, refer to "Entering an external input to a sensor amplifier"
(Page 7-18).
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
7-3 Cyclic communication
7-12
7
Co
mm
unic
atin
g w
ith F
D-M
H S
erie
s
Current Value 0/Current Value 1
Error ID Number
If "Error Status" in ON, the ID number of the DL-EP1 where the error occurred and
the ID numbers of sensor amplifiers connected to the DL-EP1 are stored (the ID
number of the DL-EP1 is 0). If no error has occurred, 0 is stored. If an error occurs
in multiple IDs, the ID number of the DL-EP1 or sensor amplifier where the highest
priority error occurred is stored.
Error priority:
(1) DL-EP1 error
(2) Sensor amplifier errors (the error with the smallest error code has the
highest priority)*
* If the same error code occurs in multiple sensor amplifiers, the error
with the smallest ID number has the highest priority.
Error Code
If "Error Status" is ON, the error code is stored. If no error has occurred, 0 is
stored. If an error occurs in multiple IDs, the error code of the DL-EP1 or sensor
amplifier where the highest priority error occurred is stored.
Error priority:
(1) DL-EP1 error
(2) Sensor amplifier errors (the error with the smallest error code has the
highest priority)*
* If the same error code occurs in multiple sensor amplifiers, the error
with the smallest ID number has the highest priority.
"Error code list" (Page 7-13)
Warning ID
Number(Unassigned)
Warning Code (Unassigned)
Current Value n
(n: 0 to 1)
The current value n (n: 0 to 1) of the sensor amplifier is stored. The current value
0 always exists without reference to sensor amplifier models. Whether the
current value 1 exists depends on sensor amplifier models. If the current value
1 does not exist, 0 is stored. The contents displayed in the current value n (n: 0
to 1) depend on the use conditions.
(* The current value 1 does not exist in the FD-MH Series.)
"Current Value 0/Current Value 1" (Page 7-12)
Item Description
Name Model Conditions Function
Current Value 0Main unit/
expansion unit-
Current value
(instantaneous flow rate)
Current Value 1Main unit/
expansion unit- (Unassigned)
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
7-3 Cyclic communication
7-13
7
Co
mm
unic
atin
g w
ith F
D-M
H S
erie
s
Error code list
The following error codes may occur in the DL-EP1 and sensor amplifiers.
DL-EP1
ErrorID
NumberCode Description Cause Actions
0
0 No error - -
51Unassigned ID error
The main unit assigned no ID within 10 seconds after the DL-EP1 had been started.
• Check if the number of connected sensor amplifiers exceeds the maximum number of sensor amplifiers that can be connected to the main unit.
"Connectable Sensor Amplifiers" (Page 9-2)
• Check the connection with the sensor amplifiers and then turn the power on again.If this error cannot be recovered, contact your nearest KEYENCE office.
52Start-time communication error
Communication between sensor amplifiers ended abnormally before ID assignment completion.
Check the connection with the sensor amplifiers and then turn the power on again.If this error cannot be recovered, contact your nearest KEYENCE office.
53Unsupported sensor amplifier connection error
A sensor amplifier not supported by the DL-EP1 is connected.
Check the model of the connected sensor amplifier and remove the sensor amplifier if it is not supported by the DL-EP1.
54 Mixed model errorSensor amplifiers outside the specifications have a mixed connection.
Check if the models are mixable.
"Mixed Connection of Sensor amplifiers" (Page 9-3)
55Start-time communication error
ID number assignment is successful but communication failed during the subsequent initial communication.
Check the connection with the sensor amplifiers and then turn the power on again.If this error cannot be recovered, contact your nearest KEYENCE office.
56Current limitation error
The number of connected sensor amplifiers exceeds the allowable range.
Use sensor amplifiers within the allowable range.
57Communication error between sensor amplifiers
An error occurred during communication between sensor amplifiers.
Check if there is a noise source around the DL-EP1.If the sensor communication indicator is flashing red, turn the power on again.
70IP addressduplicate error
The IP address is the same as another device.
Check the IP address setting.
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
7-3 Cyclic communication
7-14
7
Co
mm
unic
atin
g w
ith F
D-M
H S
erie
s
FD-MH Series
0
100 System error The IP address is incorrect.
Contact your nearest KEYENCE office.
101 System errorA default gateway setting error occurred.
102 System errorAn attempt to read data in EEPROM such as the MAC address has failed.
103 System errorAn attempt to start the protocol stack has failed.
104 System errorAn attempt to access FlashROM has failed.
150 System errorThe number of held IDs is incorrect.
151 System errorThe number of sensors is incorrect.
152 System error An initial read error occurred.
ErrorID
NumberCode Description Cause Actions
01H to 0BH(Each ID number)
01HSensor amplifier error 1 of each ID number
Head error (ErS)
Refer to the FD-MH Series User's Manual.
02HSensor amplifier error 2 of each ID number
Head connection error (ErH)
03HSensor amplifier error 3 of each ID number
Overcurrent error (ErC)
04HSensor amplifier error 4 of each ID numbe
EEPROM error (ErE)
05HSensor amplifier error 5 of each ID number The instantaneous flow rate
remains unchanged (dry water).
06HSensor amplifier error 6 of each ID number
07HSensor amplifier error 7 of each ID number
Backflow error (rEv)
08HSensor amplifier error 8 of each ID number
(Not used)
09HSensor amplifier error 9 of each ID number
Temperature lower limit error
0AHSensor amplifier error 10 of each ID number
Temperature upper limit error
0BHSensor amplifier error 11 of each ID number
Temperature sensor connection error(Err tEMP)
ErrorID
NumberCode Description Cause Actions
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
7-3 Cyclic communication
7-15
7
Co
mm
unic
atin
g w
ith F
D-M
H S
erie
s
Warning code list
No warning code occurs in the DL-EP1 and in the FD-MH Series sensor amplifiers
connected to the DL-EP1.
The data to the sensor amplifier is assigned to the OUT area of the EtherNet/IP
scanner.
External Input (5 Words (10 Bytes)) assembly instance (Instance ID): 65H
Assignment to OUT Area (Scanner to DL-EP1)
DL-EP1 data
Scanner's OUT area
Address 0Address 1
Address 9
External Input(Assembly Instance: 101)
1-byte (8-bit) data
Name Address(Byte) bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
External
Input
Request 1
(Integration
Reset)
0 ID08 . . . . . ID01
1Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
External
Input
Request 2
(Flow HOLD
Reset)
2 ID08 . . . . . ID01
3Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
External
Input
Request 3
(Unassigned)
4 ID08 . . . . . ID01
5Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
External
Input
Request 4
(Temperature
HOLD Reset)
6 ID08 . . . . . ID01
7Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
External
Input
Request 5
(Unassigned)
8 ID08 . . . . . ID01
9Reserved for
systemID15 . . . . . ID09
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
7-3 Cyclic communication
7-16
7
Co
mm
unic
atin
g w
ith F
D-M
H S
erie
s
Parameter List
Name Function Operation
External
Input
Request 1
Integration reset
ON: Executes integration reset. Executing integration reset turns on
external input response 1.
OFF: Turns off external input response 1.
External
Input
Request 2
Flow HOLD
reset
ON: Executes flow HOLD reset. Executing flow HOLD reset turns on
external input response 2.
OFF: Turns off timing. Turning off timing also turns off external input
response 2.
External
Input
Request 3
(Unassigned) (Unassigned)
External
Input
Request 4
Temperature
HOLD reset
ON: Executes temperature HOLD reset. Executing temperature
HOLD reset turns on external input response 4.
OFF: Turns off external input response 4.
External
Input
Request 5
(Unassigned) (Unassigned)
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
7-3 Cyclic communication
7-17
7
Co
mm
unic
atin
g w
ith F
D-M
H S
erie
s
The following describes how the scanner cyclically communicates with the DL-EP1
(cyclic communication).
"Reading an output from a sensor amplifier" (Page 7-17)
"Entering an external input to a sensor amplifier" (Page 7-18)
"Reading the current value (instantaneous flow rate) of the sensor amplifier"
(Page 7-19)
For the message communication method, refer to "Message communication"
(Page 7-4).
Reading an output from a sensor amplifier
Available outputs: Output 1, output 2, output 3
Device assignments: "Monitor Data (84 Words (168 Bytes)) Assembly Instance
(Instance ID): 64H" (Page 7-9)
This example shows how to read the HIGH output from the sensor amplifier ID01.
(1)The output from the sensor amplifier entered into the IN area via cyclic
communication.
Communication Methods
PLCOutput of sensor amplifierIN area [18] Bit0
Sensor amplifier (1)Output
HIGH output of ID 01
10
ONOFF
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
7-3 Cyclic communication
7-18
7
Co
mm
unic
atin
g w
ith F
D-M
H S
erie
s
Entering an external input to a sensor amplifier
Available external inputs: Integration reset, flow HOLD reset, temperature HOLD reset
Device assignments: "External Input (5 Words (10 Bytes)) assembly instance
(Instance ID): 65H" (Page 7-15)
This example shows how to enter flow HOLD reset to the sensor amplifier ID01.
(1)The device value in the OUT area to which an external input request was
assigned is linked via cyclic communication and the external input of the sensor
amplifier is turned on or off.
(2)You can check the input status of the sensor amplifier with the external input
response.
PLC (1)External Input requestOUT area [2]Bit0
(2)External Input responseIN area [30]Bit0
Sensor amplifierExternal InputFlow HOLD reset to ID 01
10
ONOFF
10
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
7-3 Cyclic communication
7-19
7
Co
mm
unic
atin
g w
ith F
D-M
H S
erie
s
Reading the current value (instantaneous flow rate) of the sensor amplifier
The current value (instantaneous flow rate) is read from the IN area to which the ID
number of each sensor amplifier is assigned.
Device assignments: "Monitor Data (84 Words (168 Bytes)) Assembly Instance
(Instance ID): 64H" (Page 7-9)
This example shows how to read the current value from the sensor amplifiers ID01,
ID02, and ID03.
(1)When the current value of a sensor amplifier is updated, the new comparator
value is entered into the IN area via cyclic communication.
* If the current value is over range, under range, or invalid, the previous value is
retained without updating the current value.
(2)The property of the current value is entered. If the current value is "over (FFFF)" or
"invalid (----)", the bit corresponding to the ID number of the appropriate sensor
amplifier is set to 1.
* For the FD-MH Series, the current value (instantaneous flow rate) is stored in the
current value 0.
PLC (2)Comparator value propertyEach bit of IN [6, 8,10]
Comparator value of ID 01 1234 4567 6789
IN area [48 to 51]
Comparator value of ID 02 2345 5678 7890
IN area [52 to 55]
Comparator value of ID 03 3456 8901
IN area [56 to 59]
Sensor amplifierComparator value of ID 01 1234 4567 6789
Comparator value of ID 02 2345 5678 7890
Comparator value of ID 03 3456 8901
(1)
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
7-3 Cyclic communication
7-20
7
Co
mm
unic
atin
g w
ith F
D-M
H S
erie
s
Compatibility check is a function executed when the scanner communicates with the
DL-EP1. This function checks if the device set with the scanner matches the DL-EP1
to prevent communicating with the wrong device. This function is executed when a
connection is opened.
When using scanners of other manufacturers
For how to use the scanners of other manufacturers, refer to the manual of each
scanner.
Checking the Device Compatibility
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 7-21
7
Co
mm
unic
atin
g w
ith F
D-M
H S
erie
s
7-4 Message Communication
This section describes the message communication functions and how to use them.
What is Message communication (Explicit messaging)?
Message communication is a function that performs communication by issuing
commands using the objects and services (Service Codes) prepared for each
EtherNet/IP device. Message communication is used for applications which do not
require the punctuality of cyclic communication, such as reading and writing adaptor
settings.
The objects and service codes which can be used with message communication
include those which are specified as a standard and those which are unique to the
device. You can use the objects and services unique to the DL-EP1to monitor data,
to read and write parameters, and to perform operations such as reset.
The DL-EP1 message communication function supports CIP-defined
UCMM (unconnected) and Class 3 (connected) message communication.
Scanner DL-EP1 Sensor amplifier
Send
Receive
Receive
Send
(1) Message communication command
(3) Message communication response
(2) Interpret and execute command
Reference
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
7-4 Message Communication
7-22
7
Co
mm
unic
atin
g w
ith F
D-M
H S
erie
s
The following settings are required to execute message communication with the DL-
EP1.
[DL-EP1]
The DL-EP1 does not require any setting.
[Scanner]
Set the applicable service, Class ID, Instance ID, Attribute ID, and service data, and
send the commands used for message communication. "Objects and Services"
(Page 7-25)
Refer to the scanner manual for details on the setting methods and applicable
commands.
The following lists the contents that can be executed by message communication
when the objects (DL Object) and services unique to the DL-EP1 are used.
(1) Reading data from a sensor amplifier
(2) Writing data to a sensor amplifier
(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier
(4) Locking sensor amplifier operations
(5) Reading the number of decimal places from a sensor amplifier
(1) Reading data from a sensor amplifier
Message communication reads parameters from the DL-EP1 and the sensor
amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.
"(1) Reading parameters from a sensor amplifier" (Page 7-44)
Configuring Message Communication
Actions which can be Completed with Message Communication
FD-MH
Command
Response:1234
FD-MH Current values (instantaneous flow rate): 1234
DL-EP1Scanner
<Details of command>Service code: 0EHClass ID: 67HInstance ID: 01HAttribute ID: 0325H (805)
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
7-4 Message Communication
7-23
7
Co
mm
unic
atin
g w
ith F
D-M
H S
erie
s
(2) Writing data to a sensor amplifier
Message communication writes parameters to the DL-EP1 and the sensor
amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.
"(2) Writing parameters to a sensor amplifier" (Page 7-45)
(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier
Message communication issues operation commands such as integration reset to
the DL-EP1 and the sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.
"(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier" (Page 7-46)
(4) Locking sensor amplifier operations
Message communication locks operations by keys on the sensor amplifier
connected to the DL-EP1.
"(4) Locking sensor amplifier operations" (Page 7-48)
FD-MH
Command:1000
Response
FD-MHIntegrated flow rate setting value 1: 150→1000
DL-EP1Scanner
<Details of command>Service code: 10HClass ID: 67HInstance ID: 01HAttribute ID: 0345H(837)Service data: 1000
FD-MH
Command
Response
Integration reset execution by FD-MH
DL-EP1Scanner
<Details of command>Service code: 4BHClass ID: 67HInstance ID: 01HAttribute ID: 0302H(770)
FD-MH
Command
Response
Changes using thesensor amplifier keys are locked.
DL-EP1Scanner
<Details of command>Service code: 4CHClass ID: 67HInstance ID: 00HService data: 01H
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
7-4 Message Communication
7-24
7
Co
mm
unic
atin
g w
ith F
D-M
H S
erie
s
(5) Reading the number of decimal places from a sensor amplifier
Message communication reads the number of decimal places of settings read
from the sensor amplifier.
"(5) Reading the number of decimal places in the parameter from a sensor
amplifier" (Page 7-49)
For the FD-MH Series, if the current value is 12.53 l/min, data is stored as
follows:
Data: 1253
Number of decimal places: 2
Perform calculation from the read data and the number of decimal places.
FD-MH
Command
Response
DL-EP1Scanner
<Details of command>Service code: 4CHClass ID: 67HInstance ID: 01HAttribute ID: 0325H(805)
Reads the number of decimal places of the FD-MH current values (instantaneous flow rate)
Reference
1253 12.53 12.53 l/minNumber of decimal places
2 1
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
7-4 Message Communication
7-25
7
Co
mm
unic
atin
g w
ith F
D-M
H S
erie
s
Message communication uses objects and services to send and receive data.
Executing a service (1) for a DL-EP1 object enables data read (2), parameter
change (3), specified operation execution (4), and read of the number of decimal
places (5), etc.
Taking DL Object as an example, one instance is provided for each of the sensor
amplifiers connected to the DL-EP1. Reading the attributes corresponding to the
comparator values (P.V. values) of the respective instances using a service makes it
possible to read the comparator values (P.V. values) of the sensor amplifiers
corresponding to the respective instances.
Objects and Services
Parameter change(3)
Operation command execution(4)
Read of the number of decimal places(5)
DL-EP1 or sensor amplifier connected to DL-EP1
Object(1)
(2)
Service
Data output
ID: 0324H Output
Attribute
ID: 0325H Current value (instantaneous flow rate)
ID: 0326H Raw value (R.V. value)
DL Object(Class ID: 67H)
DL-EP1Instance ID: 00H
ID number 1 sensorInstance ID: 01H
ID number 2 sensorInstance ID: 02H
:
:
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
7-4 Message Communication
7-26
7
Co
mm
unic
atin
g w
ith F
D-M
H S
erie
s
• In EtherNet/IP (CIP), the method called "object modeling" is used to
express a device. The device is handled as a group of objects. Objects
abstractly express the configuration elements in the device. A class is a
group of objects expressing the configuration elements of the same
type. An instance actually expresses a specific object contained in a
class. Each instance in the class has the same attribute group, but each
uses a unique attribute value.
• To execute a service for the DL-EP1, send a command from the scanner.
The DL-EP1 then returns the service execution results as a response. A
command requires a service, class ID (Class ID), instance ID (Instance
ID), and attribute ID (Attribute ID)*. When a parameter is written, the
command also requires a setting (service data).
* Some of the commands to be used may not require the above items.
"Basic Format and Processing Flow of Message Communication"
(Page 7-28)
Reference
Command Response
・Service
・Class ID
・Instance ID
・Attribute ID*
・Service data*
・General Status
・Additional Status*
・Service response data*
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
7-4 Message Communication
7-27
7
Co
mm
unic
atin
g w
ith F
D-M
H S
erie
s
The following describes the objects usable by the DL-EP1.
Objects Usable by DL-EP1
Command
Response
DLObject
MessageRouterObject
ConnectionManagerObject
AssemblyObject
IdentityObject
TCP/IPInterfaceObject
EthernetLink
Object
EtherNet/IP unit
Object Name Class ID Description ReferencePage
DL Object 67H
This object provides the statuses of the DL-EP1 and
the sensor amplifiers connected to the DL-EP1 and
writes and reads parameters. This object is unique to
the DL-EP1.
7-31
Identity Object 01HThis object provides identification information,
general information and a reset service, etc.9-22
Message Router
Object02H
This object provides connection points for message
communication.9-25
Assembly Object 04H
This object provides access to the devices via cyclic
communication. This object can be used to send data
to the devices that do not support cyclic
communication.
9-26
Connection
Manager Object06H
This object is used for connection-type
communication.9-28
TCP/IP Interface
ObjectF5H
This object provides the structure for setting the TCP/
IP network interface. You can set an IP address,
subnet mask and gateway, etc., in this object.
9-30
Ethernet Link Object F6H This object provides Ethernet status information. 9-34
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
7-4 Message Communication
7-28
7
Co
mm
unic
atin
g w
ith F
D-M
H S
erie
s
The EtherNet/IP scanner and the DL-EP1 exchange Explicit messages for
communication. The following provides a basic example of the command format of
Explicit messages to be sent and the response format returned from the DL-EP1 to
the scanner.
Commands
• Command format
*1 For details on usable services, refer to "DL Object (Class ID:67H)" (Page 7-
31) or "Objects Usable by DL-EP1" (Page 9-20).
Responses
• Response format
Basic Format and Processing Flow of Message Communication
Item Description
Service code*1 Designates the service code to be used (Service Code).
Class ID Designates a class ID (Class ID) tailored to the service*1 to be used.
Instance IDDesignates an instance ID (Instance ID) tailored to the service*1 to be
used.
Attribute IDDesignates an attribute ID (Attribute ID) tailored to the service*1 to be
used.
Service Data Designates service data (Service Data) tailored to the service*1 to be used.
Item Description
General statusReturns a general status in respect to the command (General Status). 00H
is returned when the command ends normally.
Additional status Returns the additional status (Additional Status).
Service response
data
Returns service response data Service Response Data) in respect to the
command.
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
7-4 Message Communication
7-29
7
Co
mm
unic
atin
g w
ith F
D-M
H S
erie
s
Command processing order and error response
Check whether each ID is within the supported range in the following order:
Supplement for object processing
• Get_Attribute_Single and Get_Attributes_All are executed, ignoring send service
data.
• The service (Get_Attributes_All, Reset) that does not designate an attribute ID is
executed, ignoring Attribute ID.
• If Set_Attribute_Single is designated for an attribute which cannot be written (Set),
"0EH" (Attribute not settable) is returned as the general status.
• If Set_Attribute_Single for the writable attribute is designated and the writing size
is less than the attribute size, the general status "13H" (Not enough data) is
returned. If the writing size is greater than the attribute size, the service is
executed, ignoring the excessive data.
Class ID check
Yes
No
Instance ID check
Yes
No
Service check
Yes
No
Attribute ID check
Executes supported service process
Yes
No
Path Destination Unknown (05H)returned as general status
Path Destination Unknown (05H)returned as general status
Service not Supported (08H)returned as general status
Attribute not Supported (14H)returned as general status
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
7-4 Message Communication
7-30
7
Co
mm
unic
atin
g w
ith F
D-M
H S
erie
s
Reading the attribute ID
Example) Excerpt from DL Object attribute ID
Data Type
The data type is defined in the EtherNet/IP specifications as follows:
Reading the DL Object Table
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
Instance ID
Attribute ID
Name Description Attribute Data Type
00H74H
(116)
Output
1
Stores the HIGH output (output 1) status of each
sensor amplifier. When HIGH is output, the bit
corresponding to the ID number of the sensor
amplifier is set to ON.
Bit 0 to bit 9 ID number 1 to ID number 10
Bit10 to bit 15: Reserved for system
R WORD
Item Description
(1) Instance ID Represents the instance ID in hexadecimal notation.
(2) Attribute ID Represents the attribute ID in hexadecimal (decimal) notation.
(3) Name Represents the attribute name.
(4) DescriptionDescribes the attribute and represents the data to be read and the range of
parameters that can be set.
(5) Attribute
Represents the direction of services for the attribute ID.
R (Read): The parameter read service (Get_Attribute_Single,
Get_Attributes_All) can be used to read the attribute value.
W (Write): The parameter write service (Set_Attribute_Single) can be used
to write the attribute value.
(6) Data type Represents the attribute data type.
Data Type DescriptionRange
Minimum Maximum
INT Signed 16-bit integer -32768 32767
UINT Unsigned 16-bit integer 0 65535
DINT Signed 32-bit integer -2147483648 2147483647
WORD Bit string: 16 bits - -
DWORD Bit string: 32 bits - -
STRING
Character string
(2-byte length information +
1-byte array per character)
- -
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
7-4 Message Communication
7-31
7
Co
mm
unic
atin
g w
ith F
D-M
H S
erie
s
The DL Object provides the DL-EP1 connection status and device write/read. This
object is unique to the DL-EP1.
Services
*1 This service cannot be used in the DL-EP1 (instance ID:00H).
*2 This service cannot be used in the sensor amplifier (instance ID: 01H to 0AH) connected to the DL-EP1.
*3 In the DL-EP1 (instance ID: 00H), this service can be used as the attribute ID
90H to 9EH and A0H to AEH.
DL Object (Class ID:67H)
Service Code Service Name Description
0EHParameter
read
Reads parameters from the DL-EP1 and the sensor amplifier
connected to the DL-EP1. For examples of using this service,
refer to "(1) Reading parameters from a sensor amplifier"
(Page 7-44).
10HParameter
write
Writes parameters to the DL-EP1 and the sensor amplifier
connected to the DL-EP1. For examples of using this service,
refer to "(2) Writing parameters to a sensor amplifier"
(Page 7-45).
4BH*1 Operation
command
Requests processing such as zero shift and tuning from the
sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1. The contents of
processing that can be requested differ per sensor amplifier.
Set the contents of processing with the attribute ID in the
object.
refer to "Attribute IDs supported by the instance service
4BH (operation command)" (Page 7-46). For examples of
using this service, refer to
"(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier"
(Page 7-46).
4CHBatch lock
setting*2
Collectively performs lock or unlock for all the connected
sensor amplifiers. Even if a lock setting that is not supported
by sensor amplifiers is designated, locks all the sensor
amplifiers without interrupting processing. Then, error code
09H is returned as a response.
Setting 0: Not lock
Setting 1: Key lock
"Lock setting" (Page 7-32)
For examples of using this service, refer to "(4) Locking
sensor amplifier operations" (Page 7-48).
4DH
Acquisition of the
number of decimal
places *3
Acquires the number of decimal places of the designated
parameter. For examples of using this service, refer to "(5)
Reading the number of decimal places in the parameter from
a sensor amplifier" (Page 7-49).
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
7-4 Message Communication
7-32
7
Co
mm
unic
atin
g w
ith F
D-M
H S
erie
s
• Lock setting
Responses
The responses made when each service is used are as follows:
(1) Parameter read: : Service code 0EH
(2) Parameter write: : Service code 10H
(3) Operation command: : Service code 4BH
(4) Batch lock setting: : Service code 4CH
(5) Read of number of decimal places: : Service code 4DH
Setting Description
0 Does not execute lock.
1Executes key lock (inhibition of operations other than basic screen display
switching and [RESET] button).
GeneralStatus
Command TypeDescription
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
00H Normal end
05H The instance ID is out of range.
08H - - -The designated instance ID does not support this service or
cannot be executed.
09H - - - - The written data is out of range.
0CH - - -
• Parameter write was executed for the function controlled
by cyclic communication.
• An attempt to execute the operation command has failed.
Check if the sensor amplifier can execute the operation
command.
0EH - - - -
• An attempt was made to write data to the attribute ID that
cannot be written or to the attribute ID that is in the
unwritable status.
• The written data is out of range.
10H - - - -
An attempt was made to read data from the attribute ID that
cannot be read or from the attribute ID that is in the
unreadable status.
13H - -The service data size is less than the defined size.
The defined data size is stored in the additional status.
14H - The attribute ID is out of range.
16H -The sensor amplifier corresponding to the designated
instance ID is not connected.
1FH
• This service is supported by the designated instance ID
but cannot be used by the designated attribute ID.
(Additional status: C350H)
• In the current mode, the designated setting cannot be
written into the parameter.
(Additional status: C351H)
• The DL-EP1 is now initializing communication. (Additional
status: C352H)
FEH System error. Contact your nearest KEYENCE office.
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
7-4 Message Communication
7-33
7
Co
mm
unic
atin
g w
ith F
D-M
H S
erie
s
Attributes
Instance ID
Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
00H
64H
(100)Status
Indicates the status of this unit and connected
sensor amplifier.
bit0: DL-EP1 Error Status
Bit 1 to bit 13: Reserved for system
bit14: Warning Status
bit15: Error Status
R WORD
65H
(101)
Sensor Error
Status
Indicates the error status of the connected
senosr amplifiers. If an error occurs, the bit of the
corresponding ID number of amplifier is turned
to ON.
Bit 0 to bit 9: ID number 1 to ID number 10
Bit10 to bit 15: Reserved for system
R WORD
66H
(102)
Warning
Status(Unassigned) R WORD
67H
(103)Reserved for system
68H
(104)
Current
Value 0
Property
Indicates the status of current value 0 of each
amplifier. If the current value 0 is “0ver Range",
“Under Range", or "Invalid", the bit
corresponding to the ID number is turned ON.
Bit 0 to bit 9: ID number 1 to ID number 10
Bit10 to bit 15: Reserved for system
R WORD
69H
(105)
Current
Value 1
Property
(Unassigned) R WORD
6AH
(106) to
6BH
(107)
Reserved for system
6CH
(108)
Error ID
Number
Indicates the ID number of the unit having error.
Parameter range: 0 to 10 (initial value: 0)R UINT
6DH
(109)Error Code
Indicates the error code that is happening.
Parameter range: 0 to 65535 (initial value: 0)R UINT
6EH
(110)
Warning ID
Number(Unassigned) R UINT
6FH
(111)
Warning
Code(Unassigned) R UINT
70H
(112) to
73H
(115)
Reserved for system
74H
(116)Output1
Indicates the output 1 status of each sensor
amplifier. When output 1 is output, the bit
corresponding to the ID number of the sensor
amplifier is turned ON.
Bit 0 to bit 9: ID number 1 to ID number 10
Bit10 to bit 15: Reserved for system
R WORD
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
7-4 Message Communication
7-34
7
Co
mm
unic
atin
g w
ith F
D-M
H S
erie
s
00H
75H
(117)Output2
Indicates the output 2 status of each sensor
amplifier. When output 2 is output, the bit
corresponding to the ID number of the sensor
amplifier is turned ON.
Bit 0 to bit 9: ID number 1 to ID number 10
Bit10 to bit 15: Reserved for system
R WORD
76H
(118)Output3
Indicates the output 3 status of each sensor
amplifier. When output 3 is output, the bit
corresponding to the ID number of the sensor
amplifier is turned ON.
Bit 0 to bit 9: ID number 1 to ID number 10
Bit10 to bit 15: Reserved for system
R WORD
77H
(119)
Output4
(Unassigned)(Unassigned) R WORD
78H
(120)
Output5
(Unassigned)(Unassigned) R WORD
79H
(121) to
89H
(137)
Reserved for system
8AH
(138)
Current
Value 0
Invalid
When the current value 0 of each amplifier is
invalid, the bit of corresponding ID number is
turned ON.
Bit 0 to bit 9: ID number 1 to ID number 10
Bit10 to bit 15: Reserved for system
R WORD
8BH
(139)
Current
Value 0
Under Range
When the current value 0 of each amplifier is less
than the lower limit of the detection range, the bit
of the corresponding ID number is turned ON.
Bit 0 to bit 9: ID number 1 to ID number 10
Bit10 to bit 15: Reserved for system
R WORD
8CH
(140)
Current
Value 0
Over Range
When the current value 0 of each amplifier is
higher than the upper limit of the detection range,
the bit of corresponding ID number is turned ON.
Bit 0 to bit 9: ID number 1 to ID number 10
Bit10 to bit 15: Reserved for system
R WORD
8DH
(141)
Current
Value 1
Invalid
(Unassigned) R WORD
8EH
(142)
Current
Value 1
Under Range
(Unassigned) R WORD
8FH
(143)
Current
Value 1 Over
Range
(Unassigned) R WORD
90H
(144)
Current
Value 0
(ID01)
Indicates the current value 0 of the sensor of ID
number 1.
Parameter range:
-2147483648 to 2147483647 (initial value: 0)
R DINT
91H
(145)
to 98H
(152)
:
Instance ID
Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
7-4 Message Communication
7-35
7
Co
mm
unic
atin
g w
ith F
D-M
H S
erie
s
For details on current value 0 and current value 1, refer to "Current
Value 0/Current Value 1" (Page 7-12).
00H
99H
(153)
Current
Value 0
(ID10)
Indicates the current value 0 of the sensor of ID
number 10.
Parameter range:
-2147483648 to 2147483647 (initial value: 0)
R WORD
9AH
(154)
to 9EH
(158)
Current
Value 0 (ID
Number 11)
to (ID
Number 15)
(Unassigned) R DINT
9FH
(159)Reserved for system
A0H
(160)
to AEH
(174)
Current
Value 1 (ID
Number 1) to
(ID Number
15)
(Unassigned) R DINT
AFH
(175)Reserved for system
B0H
(176)
Sensor
Status Mask
Setting
Set up the condition to determine if the sensor
error or warning is a recoverable DL-EP1 error
(MS LED blinks in red). If mask is selected, MS
LED does not blink in red when a sensor error or
warning occurs.
Parameter range: 0 to 1 (initial value: 0)
0: Not mask
1: Mask
R/W UINT
B1H
(177)
Sensor
Connected
Number
Indicates the number of connected sensor
amplifiers.
Parameter range: 0 to 10 (initial value: 0)
R UINT
B2H
(178)
to C7H
(199)
Reserved for system
0300H
(768)
Error Code
(ID number
00)
Indicates the error code of ID number 0.
Parameter range: 0 to 65535 (initial value: 0)R UINT
0301H
(769) to
0309H
(777)
:
030AH
(778)
Error Code
(ID number
10)
Indicates the error code of ID number 10.
Parameter range: 0 to 65535 (initial value: 0)R UINT
030BH
(779) to
030FH
(783)
Error Code
(ID number
11) to (ID
number 15)
(Unassigned)
0310H
(784) to
04FFH
(1279)
Reserved for system
Instance ID
Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
Reference
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
7-4 Message Communication
7-36
7
Co
mm
unic
atin
g w
ith F
D-M
H S
erie
s
Attributes for FD-MH Series
Designate the ID number (01H to 0AH) of a sensor amplifier as the instance ID.
Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
Group1
0320H
(800)
Group1
Entry count
Indicates the group 1 entry count.
Parameter range: 22R DINT
0321H
(801)
Sensor
amplifier
error state*1
Indicates the error status of the sensor amplifier.
Bit 2 : Overcurrent error (ErC)
Bit 3 : EEPROM error (ErE)
Bit 4 : The instantaneous flow rate remains 0.
Bit 5 : Same as Bit 4
Bit 6 : Backflow error (rEv)
Bit 8 : Temperature lower limit error
Bit 9 : Temperature upper limit error
Bit 10 : Temperature sensor connection error
(Err tEMP)
Other than the above: Fixed at 0
R DWORD
0322H
(802) to
0323H
(803)
Reserved for system
0324H
(804)
Control output
Integration
pulse output
Abnormal
alarm output
status*2
Indicates the control output.
Bit 0: Output 1
Bit 1: Output 2
Bit 2: Output 3
Other than the above: Fixed at 0
R DWORD
0325H
(805)
Instantaneous
flow rate
(current
value)*3
Indicates the instantaneous flow rate (current
value).
Parameter range:
FD-MH10A: 0.00 to 99.99
FD-MH50A: 0.0 to 999.9
FD-MH100A: 0.0 to 999.9
FD-MH500A: 0.0 to 9999.9
R DINT
0326H
(806)
Integrated flow
rate*4
Indicates the integrated flow rate.
Parameter range:
FD-MH10A: 0.00 to 4294967.29
FD-MH50A: 0.0 to 42949672.9
FD-MH100A: 0.0 to 42949672.9
FD-MH500A: 0 to 429496729
R DINT
0327H
(807)
Instantaneous
flow rate
(peak hold
value)*3
Indicates the instantaneous flow rate (peak hold
value).
Parameter range:
FD-MH10A: 0.00 to 99.99
FD-MH50A: 0.0 to 999.9
FD-MH100A: 0.0 to 999.9
FD-MH500A: 0.0 to 9999.9
R DINT
0328H
(808)
Instantaneous
flow rate
(bottom hold
value)*3
Indicates the instantaneous flow rate (bottom
hold value).
Parameter range:
FD-MH10A: 0.00 to 99.99
FD-MH50A: 0.0 to 999.9
FD-MH100A: 0.0 to 999.9
FD-MH500A: 0.0 to 9999.9
R DINT
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
7-4 Message Communication
7-37
7
Co
mm
unic
atin
g w
ith F
D-M
H S
erie
s
Group1
0329H
(809) to
032AH
(810)
(Reserved for system)
032BH
(811)
Bank
switching
status
Indicates the bank switching status.
Parameter range: 0 to 1
0: Bank A
1: Bank B
R DINT
032CH
(812)(Reserved for system)
032DH
(813)
Current
temperature*5Indicates the current temperature.
Parameter range: 0.0 to 999.9R DINT
032EH
(814)
Temperature
peak hold
value*5
Indicates the temperature peak hold value.
Parameter range: 0.0 to 999.9R DINT
032FH
(815)
Temperature
peak hold
value*5
Indicates the temperature bottom hold value.
Parameter range: 0.0 to 999.9R DINT
0330H
(816) to
0333H
(819)
(Reserved for system)
0334H
(820)
External input
status
Indicates the external input status.
Parameter range: 0 to 1
0:OFF
1:ON
R DINT
0335H
(821)(Reserved for system)
0336H
(822)
Temperature
sensor
connection*6
Indicates the temperature sensor connection.
Parameter range: 0 to 1
0: Not connected
1: Connected
R DINT
0337H
(823) to
033FH
(831)
(Reserved for system)
Group2
0340H
(832)
Group2 Entry
count
Indicates the group 2 entry count.
Parameter range: 8R DINT
0341H
(833)
Instantaneous
flow rate
setting value
1(P1)*7
Indicates the instantaneous flow rate setting
value 1 (P1).
Parameter range:
FD-MH10A: 0.00 to 30.00 (initial value: 3.00)
FD-MH50A: 0.0 to 100.0 (initial value: 15.0)
FD-MH100A: 0.0 to 200.0 (initial value: 30.0)
FD-MH500A: 0.0 to 999.9 (initial value: 100.0)
R/W DINT
0342H
(834)
Instantaneous
flow rate
setting value
2(P1)*7
Indicates the instantaneous flow rate setting
value 2 (P2).
Parameter range:
FD-MH10A: 0.00 to 30.00 (initial value: 10.00)
FD-MH50A: 0.0 to 100.0 (initial value: 50.0)
FD-MH100A: 0.0 to 200.0 (initial value: 100.0)
FD-MH500A: 0.0 to 999.9 (initial value: 200.0)
R/W DINT
Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
7-4 Message Communication
7-38
7
Co
mm
unic
atin
g w
ith F
D-M
H S
erie
s
Group2
0343H
(835)
Temperature
upper limit
setting value*8
Indicates the temperature upper limit setting
value.
Parameter range:
0.1 to 99.9: Upper limit value (initial value: 80.0)
100.0: Upper limit detection invalid
R/W DINT
0344H
(836)
Temperature
lower limit
setting value*9
Indicates the temperature lower limit setting
value.
Parameter range:
0.1 to 99.9: Lower limit value (initial value: 5.0)
0.0: Lower limit detection invalid
R/W DINT
0345H
(837)
Integrated
flow rate
setting value
1
Indicates the integrated flow rate setting value
1.
The value obtained by multiplying this value by
the value set in integrated flow rate units serves
as the actual integrated flow rate setting value.
Parameter range: 0 to 9999 (initial value: 150)
R/W DINT
0346H
(838)
Integrated
flow rate
setting value
2
Indicates the integrated flow rate setting value
2.
The value obtained by multiplying this value by
the value set in integrated flow rate units serves
as the actual integrated flow rate setting value.
Parameter range: 0 to 9999 (initial value: 9999)
R/W DINT
0347H
(839)
Instantaneous
flow rate
setting value
3 (P3)*7
Indicates the instantaneous flow rate setting
value 3 (P3).
Parameter range:
FD-MH10A: 0.00 to 30.00 (initial value: 13.00)
FD-MH50A: 0.0 to 100.0 (initial value: 65.0)
FD-MH100A: 0.0 to 200.0 (initial value: 130.0)
FD-MH500A: 0.0 to 999.9 (initial value: 400.0)
R/W DINT
0348H
(840)
Instantaneous
flow rate
setting value
4 (P4)*7
Indicates the instantaneous flow rate setting
value 4 (P4).
Parameter range:
FD-MH10A: 0.00 to 30.00 (initial value: 20.00)
FD-MH50A: 0.0 to 100.0 (initial value: 100.0)
FD-MH100A: 0.0 to 200.0 (initial value: 200.0)
FD-MH500A: 0.0 to 999.9 (initial value: 500.0)
R/W DINT
0349H
(841) to
035FH
(863)
(Reserved for system)
Group3
0360H
(864)
Group3 Entry
count
Indicates the group 3 entry count.
Parameter range: 5R DINT
0361H
(865)
Key lock
function
Indicates the key lock function.
Parameter range: 0 to 1
0: Key unlock (initial value)
1: Key lock
R/W DINT
0362H
(866)(Reserved for system)
0363H
(867)
Analog output
selection*10
Indicates the analog output selection.
Parameter range: 0 to 1
0: Standard (initial value)
1: Free range analog
R/W DINT
Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
7-4 Message Communication
7-39
7
Co
mm
unic
atin
g w
ith F
D-M
H S
erie
s
Group3
0364H
(868)
Free range
analog
upper limit*10
Indicates the free range analog upper limit.
Parameter range:
FD-MH10A: 0.0 to 30.0
(Initial value: 10.0, settable unit: 0.1)
FD-MH50A: 0 to 100
(Initial value: 50, settable unit: 5)
FD-MH100A: 0 to 200
(Initial value: 100, settable unit: 10)
FD-MH500A: 0 to 1000
(Initial value: 500, settable unit: 50)
R/W DINT
0365H
(869)
Free range
analog
lower limit*10
Indicates the free range analog lower limit.
Parameter range:
FD-MH10A: 0.0 to 30.0
(Initial value: 0.0, settable unit: 0.1)
FD-MH50A: 0 to 100
(Initial value: 0, settable unit: 5)
FD-MH100A: 0 to 200
(Initial value: 0, settable unit: 10)
FD-MH500A: 0 to 1000
(Initial value: 0, settable unit: 50)
R/W DINT
0366H
(870) to
037FH
(895)
(Reserved for system)
Group4
0380H
(896)
Group4 Entry
count
Indicates the group 4 entry count.
Parameter range: 29R DINT
0381H
(897)(Reserved for system)
0382H
(898)
Detection
mode
Indicates the Detection mode.
Parameter range: 0 to 4
0: F-1 (initial value)
1:F-2
2:F-3
3:A-1
4:A-2
R/W DINT
0383H
(899)(Reserved for system)
0384H
(900)
Response
time
Indicates the response time.
Parameter range: 0 to 6
0:0.5s
1:1.0s
2:2.5s
3:5.0s (initial value)
4:10.0s
5:30.0s
6:60.0s
R/W DINT
0385H
(901)
Display
averaging*11
Indicates the display averaging.
Parameter range:
0.0 to 10.0 (initial value: 1.0, settable unit: 0.5)
R/W DINT
0386H
(902)
Output 2
timeout time
Indicates the output 2 timeout time.
Parameter range: 1 to 99 (initial value: 10)R/W DINT
0387H
(903)
Integration
direction
Indicates the integration direction.
Parameter range: 0 to 1
0: Increment (initial value)
1: Decrement
R/W DINT
Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
7-4 Message Communication
7-40
7
Co
mm
unic
atin
g w
ith F
D-M
H S
erie
s
Group4
0388H
(904)
Integrated
flow rate unit
Indicates the integrated flow rate unit.
Parameter range: 0 to 6 (initial value: 2)
FD-MH10A: 0 to 4
FD-MH50A: 1 to 5
FD-MH100A: 1 to 5
FD-MH500A: 2 to 6
Parameter list
0:0.01
1:0.1
2:1
3:10
4:100
5:1000
6:10000
R/W DINT
0389H
(905) to
038CH
(908)
(Reserved for system)
038DH
(909)N.O./N.C.
Indicates N.O./N.C.
Bit 0: Output 1 (0:N.O./1:N.C.) (initial value: 0)
Bit 1: Output 2 (0:N.O./1:N.C.) (initial value: 0)
Bit 2: Output 3 (0:N.O./1:N.C.) (initial value: 0)
R/W DWORD
038EH
(910)Display mode
Indicates display mode.
Parameter range: 0 to 1
0:Std
1:rESo
Initial value:
FD-MH10A/FD-MH500A:0
FD-MH50A/FD-MH100A:1
R/W DINT
038FH
(911) Hysteresis*7
Indicates hysteresis.
Parameter range:
FD-MH10A: 0.00 to 9.99 (initial value: 0.10)
FD-MH50A: 0.0 to 49.9 (initial value: 0.5)
FD-MH100A: 0.0 to 99.9 (initial value: 1.0)
FD-MH500A: 0.0 to 499.9 (initial value: 5.0)
R/W DINT
0390H
(912)
Bank
switching
function
Indicates the bank switching function.
Parameter range: 0 to 1
0: OFF (initial value)
1:ON
R/W DINT
0391H
(913)(Reserved for system)
0392H
(914)
Flow zero
function
Indicates the flow zero function.
Parameter range: 0 to 1
0: OFF (initial value)
1:ON
R/W DINT
0393H
(915)(Reserved for system)
0394H
(916)
Different
frequency
mode
Indicates different frequency mode.
Parameter range: 0 to 1
0: Standard (initial value)
1: Different frequency mode
R/W DINT
Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
7-4 Message Communication
7-41
7
Co
mm
unic
atin
g w
ith F
D-M
H S
erie
s
Group4
0395H
(917) to
0396H
(918)
(Reserved for system)
0397H
(919)Eco mode
Indicates eco mode.
Parameter range: 0 to 1
0: Not use (initial value)
1: Use
R/W DINT
0398H
(920) to
039CH
(924)
(Reserved for system)
039DH
(925)
Flow indicator
display color
Indicates the flow indicator display color.
Parameter range: 0 to 1
0: Red when ON, green when OFF
1: Green when ON, red when OFF (initial value)
R/W DINT
039EH
(926) to
039FH
(927)
(Reserved for system)
Group5
03A0H
(928)
Group5
Entry count
Indicates the group 5 entry count.
Parameter range: 2R DINT
03A1H
(929)
Dry water
error
sensitivity
Indicates the dry water sensitivity.
Parameter range: 0 to 500 (initial value: 100)R/W DINT
03A2H
(930)
Dry water
error
detection time
Indicates the dry water detection time. (The unit
is 100 ms.)
Parameter range: 31 to 255 (initial value: 100)
R/W DINT
03A3H
(931) to
03BFH
(959)
(Reserved for system)
Group6
03C0H
(960)
Group6
Entry count
Indicates the group 6 entry count.
Parameter range: 11R DINT
03C1H
(961)Product code
Indicates the product code.
FD-MA*A: Main unit: 4004
FD-MA*A: Expansion unit: 4005
R DINT
03C2H
(962)Revision
Indicates the revision.
Parameter range: 0101H to FFFFHR DINT
03C3H
(963)
Connected
sensor head*6
Indicates the connected sensor head.
Parameter range: 0 to 3
0:FD-MH10A
1:FD-MH50A
2:FD-MH100A
3:FD-MH500A
R DINT
03C4H
(964) to
03C7H
(967)
Reserved for system
03C8H
(968)
Product
name*11Indicates the product name.
"FD-MA*A"R STRING
Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
7-4 Message Communication
7-42
7
Co
mm
unic
atin
g w
ith F
D-M
H S
erie
s
*1 You can check the error contents of the sensor amplifier according to the ON/
OFF status of each bit.
OFF(0): No error occurred. ON(1): An error occurred.
Two or more errors may simultaneously occur. For details on each error, refer to
"FD-MH Series User's Manual".
*2 You can check the detailed output status according to the ON/OFF status of
each bit.
*3 If the instantaneous flow rate exceeds the upper limit of the display range (if the
display is "FFFF"), data becomes an undefined value that exceeds the upper limit of
the display range. If the sensor amplifier display is ErH, ErS, or rEv or if the sensor
head is in the dry water status, data becomes "0".
Without reference to the display mode set in the sensor amplifier, data for rESo mode is
used.
*4 Data is read in minimum display units without reference to the integration display
unit set in the sensor amplifier. If the integration flow rate exceeds the upper limit,
data retains the upper limit.
*5 If the temperature sensor is not connected, data becomes "0". If the
temperature exceeds the upper limit of the display (if the temperature display
is "FFFF"), data becomes an undefined value that exceeds the upper limit of
the temperature display.
*6 If the sensor amplifier display is ErH, data immediately before ErH is retained.
*7 Without reference to the display mode set in the sensor amplifier, data
becomes identical to the data within the range that can be set in "rESo" mode.
*8 If 100.0 is written, no warning is issued even if data exceeds the upper limit of
the display temperature range. A warning is issued only when data is less than
the lower limit.
*9 If 0.0 is written, no warning is issued even if data becomes less than the lower
limit of the display temperature range. A warning is issued only when data is
greater than or equal to the upper limit.
03C9H
(969) to
03D6H
(982)
Reserved for system
03D7H
(983)Series code
Indicates the series code.
FD-MA*A: Main unit: 4004
FD-MA*A: Expansion unit: 4005
R DINT
03D8H
(984)Series version
Indicates the series version.
Parameter range: 1R DINT
03D9H
(985)Device type
Indicates the device type.
Parameter range: 0R DINT
03DAH
(986) to
03DFH
(991)
Reserved for system
Class Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data
Type
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
7-4 Message Communication
7-43
7
Co
mm
unic
atin
g w
ith F
D-M
H S
erie
s
*10 If "analog output selection" is set to "standard", the free range analog becomes
invalid even if "free range analog upper limit" or "free range analog lower limit"
is rewritten.
*11 The read character string is stored as ASCII code.
For "FD-M": 4d2d4446H
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
7-4 Message Communication
7-44
7
Co
mm
unic
atin
g w
ith F
D-M
H S
erie
s
The following describes how to perform message communication with a DL Object.
(1) Reading parameters from a sensor amplifier
(2) Writing parameters to a sensor amplifier
(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier
(4) Locking sensor amplifier operations
(5) Reading the number of decimal places from a sensor amplifier
(1) Reading parameters from a sensor amplifier
Message communication reads each parameter from the DL-EP1 and the sensor
amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.
Service code 0EH is used.
The following settings are required to use this object.
• Service Code
• Class ID
• Instance ID
• Attribute ID
• Commands
• Responses (when successful)
Using DL Object
Item Description Data Example
Service CodeDesignates "Parameter read (0EH)" (fixed
value).0EH
Class ID Designates DL Object(67H) (fixed value). 67H
Instance ID Designates the ID number. 0AH
Attribute IDDesignates the attribute ID to be read from
"Attribute".0324H(804)
Service Data There is no service data. -
Item Description Data Example
General status
A status (00H) is returned that indicates
normal completion of message
communication.
00H
Service response
data
The settings of the read parameter are
returned.0000H
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
7-4 Message Communication
7-45
7
Co
mm
unic
atin
g w
ith F
D-M
H S
erie
s
• Responses (when unsuccessful)
For details on the attribute ID, settings, general status, and additional status of each
parameter, refer to "DL Object (Class ID:67H)" (Page 7-31) and "Attributes"
(Page 7-33).
(2) Writing parameters to a sensor amplifier
Message communication writes parameters to the DL-EP1 and the sensor amplifierconnected to the DL-EP1.Service code 10H is used.The following settings are required to use this object.• Service Code• Class ID• Instance ID• Attribute ID• Service Data
• Commands
• Responses (when successful)
Item Description Data Example
General status A general status for the service is returned 16H
Additional status An additional status is returned. -
Service response
dataThere is no service response data. -
Item Description Data Example
Service CodeDesignates "Parameter write (10H)" (fixed value).
10H
Class ID Designates DL Object(67H) (fixed value). 67H
Instance ID Designates the ID number. 05H
Attribute IDDesignates the attribute ID to be written from "Attribute".
0347H(839)
Service Data Writes the setting. 0064H
Item Description Data Example
General status
A status (00H) is returned that indicates normal completion of message communication. (The written parameters are reflected in the sensor amplifier at the status (00H) return timing.)
00H
Service response data
There is no service response data. -
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
7-4 Message Communication
7-46
7
Co
mm
unic
atin
g w
ith F
D-M
H S
erie
s
• Responses (when unsuccessful)
For details on the attribute ID, settings, general status, and additional status of eachparameter, refer to "DL Object (Class ID:67H)" (Page 7-31) and "Attributes"(Page 7-33).
(3) Issuing operation commands to a sensor amplifier
Message communication issues operation commands such as error clear to the
sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.
Service code 4BH is used.
The following settings are required to use this object.
• Service Code
• Class ID
• Instance ID
• Attribute ID
• Attribute IDs supported by the instance service 4BH (operation command)
The contents of processing performed by the instance service 4BH (operation
command) depend on the attribute ID to be selected.
The table below details the attribute IDs that can be selected.
Item Description Data Example
General status A general status for the service is returned 0EH
Additional status An additional status is returned. -
Service response data
There is no service response data. -
Attribute ID Name Description
0302H(770)Integration flow rate reset
requestResets the integration flow rate.
0303H(771)Reset during hold
(flow)Resets the instantaneous flow hold.
0304H(772)Reset during hold
(temperature)Resets the temperature hold
0305H(773) Initial reset requestRestores all the sensor amplifier
settings to the default settings.
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
7-4 Message Communication
7-47
7
Co
mm
unic
atin
g w
ith F
D-M
H S
erie
s
• Commands
• Responses (when successful)
• Responses (when unsuccessful)
For details on the attribute ID, settings, general status, and additional status of each
parameter, refer to "DL Object (Class ID:67H)" (Page 7-31) and "Attributes"
(Page 7-33).
Item Description Data Example
Service CodeDesignates the "operation command (4BH)"
(fixed value).4BH
Class ID Designates DL Object (67H)(fixed value). 67H
Instance IDDesignates the ID number. The ID number
(00H) of the DL-EP1 cannot be designated.08H
Attribute ID
Designates the attribute ID to be designated
from "Attribute". "(3) Issuing operation
commands to a sensor amplifier" "Attribute
IDs supported by the instance service 4BH
(operation command)" (Page 7-46)
0301H(769)
Service Data There is no service response data. -
Item Description Data Example
General status
A status (00H) is returned that indicates
normal completion of message
communication.
00H
Service response
dataThere is no service response data. -
Item Description Data Example
General status A general status for the service is returned 08H
Additional status An additional status is returned. -
Service response
dataThere is no service response data. -
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
7-4 Message Communication
7-48
7
Co
mm
unic
atin
g w
ith F
D-M
H S
erie
s
(4) Locking sensor amplifier operations
Message communication executes batch key lock for the sensor amplifier connected
to the DL-EP1.
Service code 4CH is used.
The following settings are required to use this object.
• Service Code
• Class ID
• Instance ID
• Attribute ID
• Service Data
• Commands
• Responses (when successful)
• Responses (when unsuccessful)
If a sensor amplifier that does not support key lock is connected to the DL-EP1, the error code 09H is returned (the settings of the sensor amplifier arenot changed).
Item Description Data Example
Service CodeDesignates the "batch lock setting (4CH)"
(fixed value).4CH
Class ID Designates DL Object (67H)(fixed value). 67H
Instance IDDesignates ID number 0 (00H) for issuing a
command to the DL-EP1 (fixed value).00H
Attribute ID There is no data. -
Service Data Designates the batch lock setting. 0001H
Item Description Data Example
General statusMessage communication has ended
normally.00H
Service response
dataThere is no service response data. -
Item Description Data Example
General status A general status for the service is returned 08H
Additional status An additional status is returned. -
Service response
dataThere is no service response data. -
Point
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
7-4 Message Communication
7-49
7
Co
mm
unic
atin
g w
ith F
D-M
H S
erie
s
(5) Reading the number of decimal places in the parameter from a sensor
amplifier
Message communication reads the number of decimal places in the parameter from
the sensor amplifier connected to the DL-EP1.
Service code 4DH is used.
The following settings are required to use this object.
• Service Code
• Class ID
• Instance ID
• Attribute ID
• Commands
• Responses (when successful)
• Responses (when unsuccessful)
For details on the attribute ID, settings, general status, and additional status of each
parameter, refer to "DL Object (Class ID:67H)" (Page 7-31) and "Attributes"
(Page 7-33).
Item Description Data Example
Service Code Designates parameter read (fixed value). 4DH
Class ID Designates DL Object (67H)(fixed value). 67H
Instance ID Designates the ID number. 01H
Attribute IDDesignates the attribute ID to be read from
"Attribute".
0325H
(805)
Service Data There is no service data. -
Item Description Data Example
General statusMessage communication has ended
normally.00H
Service response
dataThe read decimal point position is returned. 04H
Item Description Data Example
General status A general status for the service is returned 14H
Additional status An additional status is returned. -
Service response
dataThere is no service response data. -
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
7-50
MEMO
7
Co
mm
unic
atin
g w
ith F
D-M
H S
erie
s
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 8-1
8Specifications
8-1 Specifications ..................................................... 8-2
8-2 Data Processing Time ........................................ 8-3
8-3 Dimensions......................................................... 8-5
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -8-2
8
Sp
ec
ifica
tion
s
8-1 Specifications
The specifications of the DL-EP1 are as follows:
*1 D-bus is the name of KEYENCE's wiring-saving system for sensor amplifiers.
*2 The number of connectable sensor units varies with the sensor amplifiers to be
connected.
Product name EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit
Model DL-EP1
Ethernet
specifications
Compliant standardsIEEE802.3 (10BASE-T)
IEEE802.3u (100BASE-TX)
Transmission rate10Mbps (10BASE-T)
100Mbps (100BASE-TX)
Transmission mediumSTP cable or Category 3 or higher UTP cable (10BASE-T)
STP cable or Category 5 or higher UTP cable (100BASE-TX)
Maximum cable length 100 m (Distance between DL-EP1 and Ethernet switch)
Maximum number of
connectable hubs
4 (10BASE-T)
2 (100BASE-TX)
EtherNet/IP
specifications
Compatible functions
Cyclic communication (Implicit messaging)
Message communication (Explicit messaging)
Compatible with UCMM and Class 3
Number of connections 64
RPI (Transmission cycle) 0.5 to 10000 ms (0.5 ms unit)
Tolerable communication
bandwidth for cyclic
communication
6000pps
Conformance test Compatible with Version A7
Sensor connection
specifications
Connectable sensors Sensor amplifiers with D-bus support*1
Number of connectable
sensor unitsUp to 15 units*2
Indicators
Link/activity indicator (LINK/ACT) :Green LED
Module status indicator (MS) :2-color (green/red) LED
Network status indicator (NS) :2-color (green/red) LED
Sensor communication indicator (D-bus) 2-color (green/red) LED
Power voltageIncluding 20 to 30 VDC ripple (p-p) 10%
(This voltage is supplied from the connected sensor amplifer)
Power consumption 1500 mW or less (at 30 V 50 mA max)
Environmental
resistance
Operating ambient air
temperature-20 to +55 °C (no freezing)
Operating ambient air
humidity35 to 85% RH (no condensation)
Vibration resistance10 to 55 Hz compound amplitude 1.5 mm, 2 hours each in X, Y, Z
directions
Pollution degree 2
Materials Main unit case: Polycarbonate
Weight Approx. 70g
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 8-3
8
Sp
ec
ifica
tion
s
8-2 Data Processing Time
This section describes the length of time that lasts from detection by a sensor to data
processing by PLC.
Maximum data processing time = (1) + (2) + (3) + (4)
(1)PLC scan time
(2)RPI (Transmission cycle)
(3)DL-EP1 data communication time
(4)Sensor amplifier response time
(2)RPI is set with the scanner unit. It can be set in 0.5 ms increments between 0.5 ms
and 10000 ms.
(3)DL-EP1 data communication time
The time required for sending outputs and current value data from a sensor
amplifier to the DL-EP1 is as follows:
Sensor amplifier with calculation function OFF, or sensor amplifier with no
calculation function
* For the GT2-100, 50 ms is added to the values in the table.
CPU unitEtherNet/IP
scanner DL-EP1 Sensor amplifier
(1) (2) (3) (4)
Number of connected sensor amplifiers
Output, comparator value, or current value
Other than IG Series* IG Series
1 7.8 ms 5.8 ms
2 9.8 ms 10.8 ms
3 13.8 ms 12.8 ms
4 15.8 ms 16.8 ms
5 19.8 ms -
6 21.8 ms -
7 25.8 ms -
8 27.8 ms -
9 31.8 ms -
10 33.8 ms -
11 37.8 ms -
12 39.8 ms -
13 43.8 ms -
14 45.8 ms -
15 49.8 ms -
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
8-2 Data Processing Time
8-4
8
Sp
ec
ifica
tion
s
Sensor amplifier with calculation function ON
* For the GT2-100, 75 ms is added to the values in the table.
For details on the PLC scan time in (1) and the sensor amplifier response time in (4),
refer to the manual of each unit.
Number of connected sensor amplifiers
Output, comparator value, or current value
Other than IG Series* IG Series
1 11.3 ms 5.8 ms
2 14.3 ms 10.8 ms
3 20.3 ms 12.8 ms
4 23.3 ms 16.8 ms
5 29.3 ms -
6 32.3 ms -
7 38.3 ms -
8 41.3 ms -
9 47.3 ms -
10 50.3 ms -
11 56.3 ms -
12 59.3 ms -
13 65.3 ms -
14 68.3 ms -
15 74.3 ms -
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 8-5
8
Sp
ec
ifica
tion
s
8-3 Dimensions
25.6
35.443.5
94.5
38.1
(42.5
)
29.4
(Unit : mm)
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
8
Sp
ec
ifica
tion
s
8-6
MEMO
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 9-1
9Appendix
9-1 Connecting with Sensor Amplifiers..................... 9-2
9-2 Device Profile...................................................... 9-5
9-3 Troubleshooting .................................................. 9-6
9-4 Default Settings .................................................. 9-8
9-5 Procedures for Communicating with an Allen-Bradley ControlLogix PLC ............................................... 9-9
9-6 Objects Usable by DL-EP1 ............................... 9-20
9-7 Index................................................................. 9-39
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -9-2
9A
pp
en
dix
9-1 Connecting with Sensor Amplifiers
As of July 15, 2010
*1 This sensor cannot be connected to the GT-70 Series.
*2 This sensor cannot be connected to a panel mount type.
*3 For the large display type, up to 11 sensor heads can be connected by adding
head expansion boards to a main unit.
Connectable Sensor Amplifiers
Name Amplifier Form Main Unit Expansion Unit Maximum Number of Connectable Units
High-precision
contact type digital
sensor
GT2 series
DIN rail mount
type
GT2-71(M)(C)N
GT2-71(M)(C)P
GT2-72(C)N
GT2-72(C)P
15 (1 main unit,
14 expansion units)
Panel mount
type
GT2-75N
GT2-75P
GT2-76N
GT2-76P
15 (1 main unit,
14 expansion units)
Large display
type
GT2-100N
GT2-100P-
1
(1 main unit)*3
General-purpose
contact type digital
sensor
GT-70A series*1
DIN rail mount
type
GT-71A
GT-71AP
GT-72A
GT-72AP
10 (1 main unit,
9 expansion units)
Panel mount
type
GT-75A
GT-75AP
GT-76A
GT-76AP
10 (1 main unit,
9 expansion units)
Multi-purpose CCD
laser micrometer
IG Series
DIN rail mount
typeIG-1000 IG-1050
4 (1 main unit,
3 expansion units)Panel mount
typeIG-1500 IG-1550
Transmissive Laser
Discrimination
Sensor
IB Series
DIN rail mount
typeIB-1000 IB-1050
4 (1 main unit,
3 expansion units)Panel mount
typeIB-1500 IB-1550
Electromagnetic
Digital Flow Sensor
FD-MH Series*2
DIN rail mount
type
FD-MA1A
FD-MA1AP
FD-MA2A
FD-MA2AP
10 (1 main unit,
9 expansion units)
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
9-1 Connecting with Sensor Amplifiers
9-3
9
Ap
pe
nd
ix
Different types of sensor amplifiers can be connected to the DL-EP1. However,
connect sensor amplifiers within the following restrictions:
Restrictions on sensor amplifier connection
• Yes: This combination is available.
• No: This combination is not available.
• GT2-100 cannot have a mixed connection with any other types of sensor
amplifiers.
• If GT2-7∗, GT-7∗A, IG, or IB has a mixed connection with any other types of
sensor amplifiers, the calculation function and simultaneous input function cannot
be used.
• If there is even one combination to which a mixed connection is inapplicable
among combinations of connected sensor amplifiers, the DL-EP1 will result in a
"mixed model error (54)".
Restrictions on the number of connectable sensor amplifiers combination of
GT2 series, GT-70A series, IG series, and IB series
* For combinations of seven or more units, contact your nearest KEYENCE office.
Combination of FD-MH series
Limit the total number of units to be connected to 4 or less.
Mixed Connection of Sensor amplifiers
GT2-7∗ GT-7∗A IG IB FD-MH
GT2-7∗ - Yes Yes Yes No
GT-7∗A Yes - Yes Yes No
IG Yes Yes - Yes No
IB Yes Yes Yes - No
FD-MH No No No No -
CombinationMaximum number of units
(indicated by “Yes”) that can be connected
GT2-7∗(main and
expansion units)
GT-7∗A(main and
expansion units)
IG or IB(main and
expansion units)
Yes Yes Not connected Up to 10 units in total
Yes Not connected Yes
Up to 6 units in total*
For the IG or IB, however, up to 4
units can be connected.
Not connected Yes Yes
Not connected Not connectedCombination of
IG and IB
Yes Yes Yes
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
9-1 Connecting with Sensor Amplifiers
9-4
9A
pp
en
dix
Current limitation check
Current limitation check is a function that checks whether expansion units can be
used within rating by checking the amount of current that each unit can pass.
This function checks whether the total consumption current of downstream units is
less than or equal to the allowable current of each unit.
The following values are used as the allowable current and consumption current of
each sensor.
* For the GT2 Series, if nine sensor amplifiers or more are connected, use 27 as
consumption current for calculation.
Model Allowable Current
Consumption Current
DL-EP1 - 20
GT2 Series 400 37*
GT-70A Series 400 32
IG Series 300 64
IB Series 300 21
FD-MH Series 400 37
Main unit
GT2-71N
ID number 1
(1) Allowable Current400
(1)>(2)�OK
Expansion unit
GT2-72A
ID number 2
(1) Allowable Current400
(1)>(2)�OK
Expansion unit
GT2-72A
ID number 3
(1) Allowable Current400
(1)>(2)�OK
Expansion unit
DL-EP1
ID number 0
(1) Allowable Current-
(2) Total current consumed
94
(2) Total current consumed
57
(2) Total current consumed
20
(2) Total current consumed
-(3) Consumption
current37
(3) Consumptioncurrent
37
(3) Consumptioncurrent
37
(3) Consumptioncurrent
20
(1)>(2)�OK
+ + +24V
Upstream Downstream
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 9-5
9
Ap
pe
nd
ix
9-2 Device Profile
Category Item Description
General status
Vendor name Keyence Corporation
Vendor ID 367
Device type 0 (Generic Device)
Revision 1.1
Product code 4501
Product name DL-EP1
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -9-6
9A
pp
en
dix
9-3 Troubleshooting
The indicator LEDs on the DL-EP1 can be used to determine the causes of errors.
Link/activity indicator (LINK/ACT)
This indicator indicates whether the DL-EP1 is communicating correctly.
Module status indicator (MS)
This indicator indicates whether the DL-EP1 is operating normally.
* The setting can be changed so that the red LED does not flash.
Link/activity indicator (Green)
Module status indicator (Green)
Network status indicator (Green)
Sensor communication indicator (Green)
LED Status Condition Corrective Action
Green
Solid The DL-EP1 is normally linked. -
FlashingThe DL-EP1 is normally linked and
is now exchanging data.-
Not lit
Power is not supplied to the DL-
EP1.
The DL-EP1 is not linked.
• Check if the power supply is correctly
connected.
• Check if the DL-EP1 is correctly connected
to the sensor amplifier.
• Check if the IP address is correct.
• Check if the power supply of the
connected device or Ethernet switch is
correctly connected.
• Check if the cable is correctly connected.
LED Status Condition Corrective Action
Green Solid The DL-EP1 is normally operating. -
Red
SolidA system error may have occurred
in the DL-EP1.Contact your nearest KEYENCE office.
Flashing
One or more of the connector
sensors are in the error or warning
status*.
One or more of the connector sensors are in
the error or warning status*.
The number of connected sensor
may have exceed the maximum
number of connectable units.
Check if the number of connected sensors is
less than or equal to the maximum number of
connectable units.
The IP address may be duplicated. Check if the IP address is duplicated.
Not litPower is not supplied to the DL-
EP1.
• Check if the power supply is correctly
connected.
• Check if the DL-EP1 is correctly connected
to the sensor amplifier.
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
9-3 Troubleshooting
9-7
9
Ap
pe
nd
ix
Network status indicator (NS)
This indicator indicates whether the DL-EP1 is communicating correctly with
EtherNet/IP.
Sensor communication indicator (D-bus)
This indicator indicates whether the DL-EP1 is communicating correctly with thesensor amplifier.
If an error occurs, you can identify the cause of the error by reading the error codevia cyclic communication or message communication.
"Error code list" (Page 3-13)
LED Status Condition Corrective Action
GreenSolid
One or more connections are normally established.
If multiple connections are used, the DL-EP1 may be unable to communicate with EtherNet/IP even if the green LED is solid.
Flashing No connection is established. Check if the DL-EP1 is registered in the scanner.
Red
SolidA duplicated IP address was detected.
Check if the IP address setting is duplicated with the IP address setting of the scanner or other adaptors.
FlashingOne or more connections have timed out.
Locate the connections that have timed out and check the power status and wiring of the communication device.
Not lit
Power is not supplied to the DL-EP1.
• Check if the power supply is correctly connected.
• Check if the DL-EP1 is correctly connected to the sensor amplifier.
The IP address is not assigned. Set the IP address.
LED Status
Condition Corrective Action
Solid greenThe DL-EP1 is communicating correctly with the sensor amplifier.
-
Flashing green
After power-on, the DL-EP1 is now starting up.
After it has started up, the DL-EP1 automatically shifts to the normal status.
Solid red
The DL-EP1 could not communicate with the sensor amplifier during its start-up.(Error ID number/code: 00H/52 or 00H/55)
• Check if the DL-EP1 is correctly connected to the sensor amplifier and turn on the power again.
• Check if an unsupported sensor amplifier is connected to the DL-EP1 and turn on the power again.
• If the error cannot be recovered after checking the above, contact your nearest Keyence office.
• Check if the number of connected sensor amplifiers exceeds the maximum number of connectable units.
• Check if there is an electrical noise source around the DL-EP1.
An attempt to assign an ID number has failed.(Error ID number/code: 00H/51)
The DL-EP1 could not communicate continuously with the sensor amplifier for one second or longer.(Error ID number/code: 00H/57)
A system error may have occurred in the DL-EP1.
Flashing redRepetition of 4 consecutive flashes)
A current limitation error occurred.(Error ID number/code: 00H/56)
Check the sensor amplifier configuration.An unsupported sensor amplifier was connected.(Error ID number/code: 00H/53)
Unconnectable models are mixed. (Error ID number/code: 00H/54)
Flashing red(Flashing at fixed intervals)
Sometimes the DL-EP1 cannot temporarily communicate with the sensor amplifier.(Error ID number/code: 00H/57)
Check if there is an electrical noise source around the DL-EP1. (The error is automatically reset if the cause is removed.)
Not lit Power is not supplied to the DL-EP1.• Check if the DL-EP1 is correctly connected to the
sensor amplifier.• Check if the power supply is correctly connected.
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -9-8
9A
pp
en
dix
9-4 Default Settings
The DL-EP1 can be reset and initialized to the default settings by holding down the
reset switch ( Page 1-4) for three seconds or longer or by using the Identity Object
Reset service ( Page 9-24) for message communication.
The DL-EP1 default settings are as follows:
* Only the BOOTP client function can be used when the IP address is 0.0.0.0. The
IP address must be set to use any other functions.
Setting Item Value after Initialization
Communication speed 10/100 Mbps automatic
IP address setting method BOOTP
IP address 0.0.0.0*
Netmask 255.255.255.0
Default gateway 0.0.0.0
Sensor status mask settingMS LED flashes in red when a sensor error or warning
occurs.
Multicast TTL 1
Multicast assignment method 0 (Automatic)
Number of multicast addresses 32
Multicast address 239.255.0.0
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 9-9
9
Ap
pe
nd
ix
9-5 Procedures for Communicating with an Allen-Bradley ControlLogix PLC
This section explains the procedures for communicating with the DL-EP1 using an
Allen-Bradley ControlLogix PLC (EtherNet/IP scanner).
The DL-EP1 is capable of the following communication when connected to an Allen-
Bradley ControlLogix PLC.
• Cyclic communication function maximum data size: 496 bytes
• Message communication function: Class3/UCMM
Changing the cyclic communication settings
Refer to the PLC instruction manual for details on the PLC unit configuration and
settings such as RsLinx, required for communicating with the PC.
1 Select the EIP communication module (1756-ENBT) connected with the
DL-EP1 from RsLogix500 I/O Configuration, and then select "New Module"
with a right click.
Procedures for Communicating with an Allen-Bradley ControlLogix PLC
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
9-5 Procedures for Communicating with an Allen-Bradley ControlLogix PLC
9-10
9A
pp
en
dix
2 Add "ETHERNET-MODULE (Generic Ethernet Module)".
3 Change the settings as required.
Name
Choose a name. The following tags are generated based on the name set
here, and are used as the data exchanged with cyclic communication.
• (Name): I Data received from DL-EP1
• (Name): O Data sent to DL-EP1
• (Name): C Not used.
Comm Format
Designate [Data INT].
IP Address
Designate the DL-EP1's IP address.
Input (DL-EP1 send data size)
• Instance number: 100 (decimal)
• Data size: Value up to 84
Output (DL-EP1 receive data size)
• Instance number 101 (decimal)
• Data size: Value up to 5
Configuration
• Instance number: 1 (decimal)
• Data size: 0
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
9-5 Procedures for Communicating with an Allen-Bradley ControlLogix PLC
9-11
9
Ap
pe
nd
ix
• For the details of InputOnly connection, refer to "Sending data to
multiple PLCs (InputOnly)" (Page 9-11).
• Refer to "Usable Connections" (Page 3-7) for details on the
connection.
RPI
Designate the cyclic communication interval.
Designate a value between 0.5 and 3200 ms.
4 Download the settings to the PLC.
EtherNet/IP communication is enabled after the settings are downloaded
and the status is switched to online.
Sending data to multiple PLCs (InputOnly)
By connecting to multiple PLCs with the InputOnly connection format, multiple
PLCs can receive the data sent from the DL-EP1. Each PLC must be set as
shown below to use the InputOnly connection.
Setting ItemBidirectional
Communication PLC (maximum 1 unit)
PLC Connected with InputOnly
RPI value User set value Same value as left
InputAssembly Instance
numberNo. 100 (decimal) Same value as left
InputAssembly data size User set value Same value as left
OutputAssembly Instance
numberNo. 101 (decimal) No. 254 (decimal)
OutputAssembly data size User set value 0 bite
Comm Format Data-INT Input Data INT
Reference
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
9-5 Procedures for Communicating with an Allen-Bradley ControlLogix PLC
9-12
9A
pp
en
dix
To carry out cyclic communication with multiple PLCs using theInputOnly connection, the DL-EP1 input data must be sent as aMulticast packet. With ControlLogix, the DL-EP1 transmission isfixed to Multicast packet. However, caution is required when usingdevices, such as KV or SYSMAC, for which the connection methodcan be selected from Multicast or Point to Point.
Changing the message communication settings
After completing "Changing the cyclic communication settings" (Page 9-9), issue
the MSG instruction from the ladder program to execute message communication.)
• Refer to "Logix500 Controllers General Instructions" (1756-RM003) for
details on the MSG instructions.
• Select Inhibit Module when not using cyclic communication.
1 Define the following tags under the RsLogix5000 "Controller Tags" field.
• Tag for storing control information for MSG instruction (message- Message
type)
• Tag for storing data exchanged with MSG instruction (tx_param, rx_param -
INT type)
Point
Reference
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
9-5 Procedures for Communicating with an Allen-Bradley ControlLogix PLC
9-13
9
Ap
pe
nd
ix
2 Add the MSG instruction to the RsLogix5000 ladder.
3 Open the "Configuration" tab in the Message instruction setting dialog,
and change the MSG instruction setting.
Message Type
Select "CIP Generic".
ServiceType, Class, Instance, Attribute
Designate a value which matches the message to be sent.
• Example 1: Writing data to DL Object "Bank 0 HIGH setting" when writing
data to attributes
Item Setting Value
ServiceType SetAttributeSingle
ServiceCode - (Cannot be designated)
Class 67H
Instance 01H
Attribute 0341H
SourceElement Name of tag storing send data
SourceLength 4 byte (attribute size is 4)
Destination - (Cannot be designated)
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
9-5 Procedures for Communicating with an Allen-Bradley ControlLogix PLC
9-14
9A
pp
en
dix
• Example 2: Retrieving DL Object "Output 3 (GO)" data when reading
attributes
4 Open the "Communication" tab, and change the MSG communication
settings.
Path
Designate the device name set in "Configuration for cyclic communication".
(An example for the DLEP1 device is shown above.)
Connected, Cache Connections
• For UCMM connection: Invalidate bidirectional (default setting)
• For Class3 connection: Validate bidirectional
5 Describe the process for setting the send data and retrieving the receive
data with the ladder program, and download it to the PLC.
Item Setting Value
ServiceType GetAttributeSingle
ServiceCode - (cannot be designated)
Class 67H
Instance 02H
Attribute 76H
SourceElement - (cannot be designated)
SourceLength - (cannot be designated)
Destination Name of tag storing received data.
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
9-5 Procedures for Communicating with an Allen-Bradley ControlLogix PLC
9-15
9
Ap
pe
nd
ix
The DL-EP1 is capable of the following communication when connected to an Allen-
Bradley SLC5/05 PLC.
• Message communication function: Class3
The size of attribute ID used for SLC5/05 Series is 1 byte or smaller.The SLC5/05 Series does not support the parameter which contains 2 byteattribute ID.
• The SLC5/05 Series does not support the cyclic communication
function, but by accessing the DL-EP1's Assembly Object with
messages, control can be executed with the same data type and
procedures as cyclic communication.
• Up to 248 bytes can be exchanged with the SLC5/05 series message
communication.
• Do not exceed this size when exchanging data with message
communication.
• The Assembly Object data size is the same as the cyclic
communication data size set in the DL-EP1 properties. When using
the SLC5/05, confirm that this value is 248 bytes.
Procedures for Communication with an Allen-Bradley SLC5/05 PLC
Point
Reference
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
9-5 Procedures for Communicating with an Allen-Bradley ControlLogix PLC
9-16
9A
pp
en
dix
Changing the message communication configuration
Message communication is carried out with a ladder program using EEM
instructions.
Refer to the "SLC 500 Instruction Set Reference Manual" (1747-RM001),
etc., for details on the EEM instructions.
1 Define the following file in the RsLogix500 "Data Files" field.
• File storing EEM instruction control information (message-Integer type)
• File storing data exchanged with EEM instruction (tx_param, rx_param -
Integer type)
2 Add EEM instruction to RsLogix500 ladder.
Reference
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
9-5 Procedures for Communicating with an Allen-Bradley ControlLogix PLC
9-17
9
Ap
pe
nd
ix
3 Designate the File used in the EEM instruction defined in Step 1 for the
EEM instruction Control Block, and open the SetupScreen.
Service, Class, Instance, Attribute
Designate a value which matches the message to be sent.
• Example 1: Retrieving DL Object "Output 3 (GO)" data when reading
attributes
Item Setting Value
ServiceType Generic Set Attribute Single
ServiceCode - (Cannot be designated)
Class 67H
Instance 02H
Attribute 76H
Data Table Address (Send data) - (Cannot be designated)
Size In Words (Send data) - (Cannot be designated)
Data Table Address (Received
data)Name of file storing send data
Size In Words (Received data) 1 word (attribute size is 1)
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
9-5 Procedures for Communicating with an Allen-Bradley ControlLogix PLC
9-18
9A
pp
en
dix
• Example 2: To control with same format and procedure as set cycle data,
Access the Assembly Object attribute3: data.
1) Retrieving the DL-EP1 input data
* The message exchanged with SLC5/05 can have up to 124 words (248
bytes). Confirm that the cyclic communication data size is set to 248 in the
DL-EP1 properties.
2) Setting the DL-EP1 output data
* The message exchanged with SLC5/05 can have up to 124 words (248
bytes). Confirm that the cyclic communication data size is set to 248 in the
DL-EP1 properties.
Item Setting Value
Service ReadAssembly
ServiceCode 0EHex (Cannot be designated)
Class 04Hex (Cannot be designated)
Instance 64Hex (Monitor Data)
Attribute 03Hex (Cannot be designated)
Data Table Address (Send data) (Cannot be designated)
Size In Words (Send data) (Cannot be designated)
Data Table Address (Received
data)Name of file storing send data
Size In Words (Received data) 84 words
Value of file storing send data
Data following the format assigned to the DL-EP1
set cycle data communication allocation can be
retrieved.
Item Setting Value
Service WriteAssembly
ServiceCode 10Hex (Cannot be designated)
Class 04Hex (Cannot be designated)
Instance 65Hex (External Input)
Attribute 03Hex (Cannot be designated)
Data Table Address (Send data) Name of file storing send data
Size In Words (Send data) 5 words
Data Table Address (Received
data) (Cannot be designated)
Size In Words (Received data) (Cannot be designated)
Value of file storing send dataDesignate with data having a format following the
DL-EP1 set cycle data communication allocation.
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
9-5 Procedures for Communicating with an Allen-Bradley ControlLogix PLC
9-19
9
Ap
pe
nd
ix
4 Open the "MultiHop" tab, and set the DL-EP1 IP address.
The above screen is an example of when the DL-EP1 IP address is
192.168.0.10.
5 Open the "Send Data" tab and "Receive Data" tab, and check the contents
of the file containing the send and receive data.
6 Describe the process for setting the send data and retrieving the receive data in a ladder program, and download it to the PLC.
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -9-20
9A
pp
en
dix
9-6 Objects Usable by DL-EP1
This section describes the objects usable by the DL-EP1.
The DL-EP1 can use the following objects:
For details on DL Object, refer to "DL Object" of each sensor amplifier.
GT2 Series (Page 3-31)
GT-70A Series (Page 4-31)
IG Series (Page 5-33)
IB Series (Page 6-33)
FD-MH Series (Page 7-31)
List of Usable Objects
Object Name Class ID Instance ID
Identity Object 1(01H) 1(01H)
Message Router Object 2(02H) 1(01H)
Assembly Object 4(04H) 100(64H) to 101(65H)
Connection Manager Object 6(06H) 1(01H)
DL Object 103(67H) 0(00H) to 15(0FH)
TCP/IP Interface Object 245(F5H) 1(01H)
Ethernet Link Object 246(F6H) 1(01H)
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
9-6 Objects Usable by DL-EP1
9-21
9
Ap
pe
nd
ix
Reading class attributes and instance attributes
Example) Excerpt from DL Object class attributes
Data type
The data type is defined in the EtherNet/IP specifications as follows:
Reading Each Object Table
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data Type Parameter Range
01H Vendor ID Indicates the vendor ID. R UINT 367
Item Description
(1) Attribute ID Indicates the attribute ID in hexadecimal notation.
(2) Name Indicates the attribute name.
(3) Description Describes the attribute.
(4) Attribute
Indicates the direction of services for the attribute ID.
R (read): Get_Attribute_Single or Get_Attributes_All can be used to read
attribute values.
W (Write): Set_Attribute_Single can be used to write an attribute value.
(5) Data type Indicates the attribute data type.
(6) Parameter rangeIndicates the data to be read from attributes or the range of parameters that
can be set.
Data Type DescriptionRange
Minimum Maximum
INT Signed 16-bit integer -32768 32767
UINT Unsigned 16-bit integer 0 65535
USINT Unsigned 8-bit integer 0 255
UDINT Unsigned 32-bit integer 0 232-1
WORD Bit string: 16 bits - -
DWORD Bit string: 32 bits - -
BYTE Bit string: 8 bits - -
SHORT_STRING
Character string
(1-byte length information + 1-byte array per
character)
- -
STRING
Character string
(2-byte length information + 1-byte array per
character)
- -
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
9-6 Objects Usable by DL-EP1
9-22
Identity Object
9A
pp
en
dix
This object provides DL-EP1 identification information, general information and a
reset service, etc.
Class
Class service
This object supports Get_Attribute_Single (0EH) and Get_Attributes_All (01H).
Class attribute (instance ID: 00H)
Instance
Instance service
This object supports Get_Attribute_Single (0EH), Get_Attributes_All (01H), and
Reset service (05H).
For details on Reset service, refer to "Reset service" (Page 9-24).
Instance attribute (instance ID: 01H)
Identity Object (Class ID: 01H)
Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data Type
ParameterRange
01H Revision Object revision R UINT 0001H
02H Max InstanceMaximum instance number
R UINT 0001H
03HNumber of Instances
Number of instances in generated object
R UINT 0001H
06HMaximum ID Number Class Attributes
Maximum attribute ID of class attribute
R UINT 0007H
07HMaximum ID Number Instance Attributes
Maximum attribute ID of instance attribute
R UINT 0007H
Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data Type
ParameterRange
01H Vendor IDVendor identification
numberR UINT 016FH
02H Device Type General device type R UINT 0000
03H Product CodeProduct identification
codeR UINT 1195H
04H
Revision Identity object revision R Structure -
Major Revision Major revision USINT 01H
Minor Revision Minor revision USINT 01H
05H Status DL-EP1 status R WORD Reference 1
06H Serial Number Serial number R UDINT Serial number
07H Product Name Product name RSHORT_
STRING“DL-EP1”
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
9-6 Objects Usable by DL-EP1
9-23
Identity Object
9
Ap
pe
nd
ix
Reference 1) Details of status (16 bits)
Bit Name Description
0 OwnedON: This bit is set to ON when one or more class1 or class3
connections are established.
1 Reserved Always OFF.
2 Reserved Always ON.
3 Reserved Always OFF.
4 to 7Extended Device
Status
Bits 4 to 7 are set according to the DL-EN1 status as follows:
0101(1): The DL-EP1 is in the unrecoverable fault status (1).
0010(2): The DL-EP1 is not (1) and one or more connections
have timed out.
0011(3): The DL-EP1 is neither (1) or (2) and no connection
is established.
0110(4): The DL-EP1 is not (1), (2), or (3) and there is one or
more connections that are in the RUN status.
0111: The DL-EP1 is in a status other than (1) to (4).
8Minor Recoverable
FaultAlways OFF.
9Minor
Unrecoverable FaultAlways OFF.
10Major Recoverable
Fault
ON: This bit is set to ON when a recoverable unit error occurs.
The red MS LED flashes.
11Major
Unrecoverable Fault
ON: This bit is set to ON when an unrecoverable unit error
(EEPROM read error, etc.) occurs.
The red MS LED is lit.
12 to 15 Reserved Always OFF.
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
9-6 Objects Usable by DL-EP1
9-24
Identity Object
9A
pp
en
dix
Reset service
The Reset service is a CIP standard function used to emulate the same operations as
power restart as much as possible. When it accepts this service, the DL-EP1 stops
each function, interrupts communication, and reads the settings again. The Reset
service is used as a restart request for reflecting changed parameters (e.g., IP
address, Ethernet communication speed, etc.).
Execute this service by designating 01H as the Instance ID of the Identity object.
• The commands received during Reset processing may be discarded.• The response for the Reset service is returned before the DL-EP1 starts
reset processing.
List of general and additional statuses returned to each service
Service Code Service Name Service Data (1 Byte)
05H Reset
00H: Emulates power reset. (Initial value)
01H: Restores the default settings and emulates power reset.
For details on the default settings, refer to "Default
Settings" (Page 9-8).
• If the DL-EP1 receives the Reset service when 02H or
higher is set, 03H (Invalid parameter value) is returned as
the CIP error code.
Point
Service GeneralStatus
Additional (Extended)
StatusDescription
Get_Attributes_
All
00H - The service has ended normally.
05H - The designated instance ID does not exist.
Reset
00H - The service has ended normally.
03H - The designated reset method is incorrect.
05H - The designated instance ID does not exist.
Get_Attribute_
Single
00H - The service has ended normally.
05H - The designated instance ID does not exist.
14H - The designated attribute ID does not exist.
Others 08H - The designated service is not supported.
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
9-6Objects Usable by DL-EP1
9-25
Message Router Object
9
Ap
pe
nd
ix
This object provides connection points for message communication.
Class
Class service
This object supports Get_Attribute_Single (0EH).
Class attribute (instance ID: 00H)
Instance
Instance service
This object supports Get_Attribute_Single (0EH).
Instance attribute (instance ID: 01H)
Message Router Object (Class ID: 02H)
Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data Type
ParameterRange
01H Revision Object revision R UINT 0001H
02H Max InstanceMaximum instance
numberR UINT 0001H
03HNumber of
Instances
Number of instances in
generated objectR UINT 0001H
06H
Maximum ID
Number Class
Attributes
Maximum attribute ID of
class attributeR UINT 0007H
07H
Maximum ID
Number
Instance
Attributes
Maximum attribute ID of
instance attributeR UINT 0002H
Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data Type
Parameter Range
01H
Object_listSupported
object listR Structure -
NumberNumber of classes
supported in class arrayUINT 0007H
Classes Class ID list
UNIT-
type
array
0001H
0002H
0004H
0006H
00F5H
00F6H
0067H
02HNumber
Available
Maximum number of
connectionsR UINT 0040H
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
9-6 Objects Usable by DL-EP1
9-26
Message Router Object
9A
pp
en
dix
List of general and additional statuses returned to each service
This object directly accesses and controls the data, which is exchanged via cyclic
communication, via message communication. This object can be used to send data
to the devices that do not support cyclic communication.
Class
Class service
This object supports Get_Attribute_Single (0EH).
Class attribute (instance ID: 00H)
Instance
Instance service
This object supports Get_Attribute_Single (0EH) and Set_Attribute_Single (10H).
Instance attribute (instance ID: 64H to 65H)
The instance ID is assigned when it is used to set a tag.
Instance ID: 64H to 65H
*1 Reading with Get_Attribute_Single ensures synchronism in instance ID units.
Name GeneralStatus
Additional (Extended)
StatusDescription
Get_Attribute_Single
00H - The service has ended normally.
05H - The designated instance ID does not exist.
14H - The designated attribute ID does not exist.
Others 08H - The designated service is not supported.
Assembly Object (Class ID: 04H)
Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data Type
ParameterRange
01H Revision Object revision R UINT 0002H
Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data Type
ParameterRange
03H DataData assigned to Instance
IDR/W
BYTE
array
Number of bytes
assigned to instance
ID*1*2
04H SizeNumber of bytes
assigned to Instance IDR UINT
Set size assigned to
instance ID (byte
unit)
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
9-6 Objects Usable by DL-EP1
9-27
Assembly Object
9
Ap
pe
nd
ix
*2 For details on the data assigned to each instance ID, refer to "monitor data"
(instance ID: 64H) and "external input" (instance ID: 65H) of each sensor
amplifier.
GT2 Series(Page 3-30)
GT-70A Series(Page 4-29)
IG Series(Page 5-31)
IB Series(Page 6-31)
FD-MH Series(Page 7-29)
List of general and additional statuses returned to each service
Name GeneralStatus
Additional (Extended)
StatusDescription
Get_Attribute_Single
00H - The service has ended normally.
05H - The designated instance ID does not exist.
14H - The designated attribute ID does not exist.
Set_Attribute_Single
00H - The service has ended normally.
05H - The designated instance ID does not exist.
08H -The instance ID whose attribute is read (R)
was designated.
0CH -
An attempt was made to execute the
service for the instance during cyclic
communication.
0EH -The designated attribute ID cannot be
written.
14H - The designated attribute ID does not exist.
15H -An attempt was made to write the data
larger than the defined size.
Others 08H - The designated service is not supported.
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
9-6 Objects Usable by DL-EP1
9-28
Connection Manager Object
9A
pp
en
dix
This object is used for connection-type communication. Use this to establish a
connection for the DL-EP1.
Class
Class service/class attribute
There is no class service and attribute.
Instance
Instance service
This object supports Forward_Close (4EH) and Forward_Open (54H). For details
on instance services, refer to the CIP Specifications.
Instance attribute
There is no instance attribute.
List of general and additional statuses returned to each service
Connection Manager Object (Class ID: 06H)
Name GeneralStatus
Additional (Extended)
StatusDescription
Forward_Close
00H - The service has ended normally.
04H - An attribute ID was designated.
05H - The designated instance ID does not exist.
13H - The length of send data is too short.
Forward_Open
00H - The service has ended normally.
01H
0100H The designated connection is already in use.
0103H The designated trigger cannot be used.
0106H
• The Connection Point in the target ⇒ originator direction designated in ForwardOpen connection path via cyclic communication is already in use, and is Point to Point.
• The connection type you attempted to establish is Point To Point.
• The size being used differs from the size you are trying to establish.
0108H• The connection in the send direction is not Point to Point.• The connection parameter in the receive direction is not
Point To Point or Multicast.
0109HThe size you are trying to open is larger than the connection
size of the DL-EP1.*1
0111H
• The timeout multiplier is greater than 7.• An RPI less than 500 µs or greater than 10 s was
designated.*2
0114HVendorIDs do not match.ProductCodes do not match.
0115H DeviceTypes do not match.
0116H The revisions do not match.
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
9-6 Objects Usable by DL-EP1
9-29
Connection Manager Object
9
Ap
pe
nd
ix
*1 Forward_Open is successful if the size you are trying to open is less than the
size defined in the scan list. If this error occurs, an extended status is added
and the data size of the tag defined in the second extended status is returned.
*2 RPI is set in increments of 500 µs. If a value that cannot be divided by 500 µs is
set, an RPI rounded to the nearest 500 µs is designated.
Forward_Open
01H
0315H
• Connection Size of the ForwardOpen network connection parameter is 0.
• Connection Path of ForwardOpen does not include ConnectionPoint.
• In Connection Path class ID of ForwardOpen, a value other than 0x04 was set as cyclic or a value other than 02H was set as Class 3.
• In Class3, a value other than 1 is set as the instance ID of Connection Path of ForwardOpen.
• There is a setting unique to the product (data segment).• In cyclic communication, an invalid Connection Point is
designated in the send direction of Connection Path of ForwardOpen.
• In cyclic communication, a value other than 2 is designated as the Connection Size network connection parameter in the send direction of ForwardOpen.
• In cyclic communication, an invalid Connection Point is designated in the receive direction of Connection Path of ForwardOpen.
0322HAn error occurred when the DL-EP1 was reinitializing communication or when it was communicating with a sensor amplifier.
0323H An unsupported sensor was connected.
0324H The connected sensors are in an unmixable combination.
0326H Too many sensors are connected.
04C2H A product-unique setting error occurred.
0640H-067FHThe appropriate device is not connected or an error occurred during communication between sensors.
06C0H-06FFH The number of occupied slots is different
0700H-073FHWhen "Check Model Match" is selected as compatibility check, ProductCodes do not match.
0740H-077FHWhen "Check Model Match" is selected as compatibility check, the major revisions or minor revisions do not match.
0780H-07BFHWhen "Check Series" is selected as compatibility check, the series codes do not match.
07C0H-07FFHWhen "Check Series" is selected as compatibility check, the series version of the real machine is lower than the set series version.
02H -The maximum number of connections have already been used.
04H - The attribute ID is already designated.
05H - The designated instance ID does not exist.
13H - The length of send data is too short.
15H - The length of send data is too large.
Others 08H - The designated service is not supported.
Name GeneralStatus
Additional (Extended)
StatusDescription
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
9-6 Objects Usable by DL-EP1
9-30
TCP/IP Interface Object
9A
pp
en
dix
This object provides the structure for setting the TCP/ IP network interface. The IP
address, subnet mask and gateway, etc, can be set.
Class
Class service
This object supports Get_Attribute_Single (0EH) and Get_Attributes_All (01H).
Class attribute (instance ID: 0)
Instance
Instance service
• This object supports Get_Attribute_Single (0EH), Set_Attribute_Single (10H),
and Get_Attributes_All (01H).
• If the internal process of the previous Set_Attribute_Single in the
Set_Attribute_Single executed for the writable Attribute ID is not completed, the
general status "0CH" (Object State Conflict) is returned.
• Changes to the writable Attribute ID are reflected when the power supply is
restarted or when the reset service is executed.
TCP/IP Interface Object (Class ID: F5H)
Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data Type
ParameterRange
01H Revision Object revision R UINT 0001H
02H Max InstanceMaximum instance
numberR UINT 0001H
03HNumber of
Instances
Number of instances in
generated objectR UINT 0001H
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
9-6 Objects Usable by DL-EP1
9-31
TCP/IP Interface Object
9
Ap
pe
nd
ix
Instance attributes (instance ID: 1)
Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data Type
ParameterRange
01H Status Interface status R DWORD Reference 1
02HConfigurationCapability
Method for acquiring initial IP address
R DWORD Reference 2
03HConfigurationControl
Method in which the device acquires initialization at start-up
R/W DWORD Reference 3
04H
PhysicalLink Object
Path to physical link object
R
Structure -
Path size Path size (bytes) UINT 0004H
PathSegment for identifying physical link object
PaddedEPATH
20F62401H
05H
Interface Configuration
TCP/IP network interface setting
R/W
Structure -
IP AddressDevice IP address(IP address)
UDINT Setting value*1
Network MaskDevice network mask(Subnet mask)
UDINT Setting value*1
Gateway Address
Default gateway address(Gateway address)
UDINT Setting value*1
Name ServerPrimary name server(DNS server)
UDINT Setting value*1
Name Server 2Secondary name server (reserved)
UDINT Setting value*1
Domain NameDefault domain name(reserved)
STRING" "(character string can be set)
06H Host Name Host name R/W STRING" "(character string can be set)
08H TTL Value Multicast TTL R/W USINT1 (1 to 255)
setting value1*1
09H
Mcast Config Multicast address setting
R/W
Structure -
Alloc ControlMulticast address setting function (multicast allocation method)
USINT
0: Automatic allocation1:User-designated allocation
Reserved Reserved USINT 00H
Num Mcast
Number of multicast addresses(Number of multicast addresses)
UINT
For automatic allocation: 0020HFor user-designated allocation: 1 to
256*1
Mcast Start Addr
Start multicast address(Allocation start multicast address)
UDINT
For automatic
allocation: *2
For user-designated allocation:
Setting value*1
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
9-6 Objects Usable by DL-EP1
9-32
TCP/IP Interface Object
9A
pp
en
dix
*1 If an invalid value is written, the general status 09H (Invalid Attribute Value) is
returned.
*2 When automatic allocation is selected, the start multicast address is calculated
from the expression "239.192.1.0+ ((IP address host section -1) * 03FF) x 32).
(Example)
When the IP address is 192.168.0.10, the multicast address is as follows:
Start address = 239.192.1.0 + (((192.168.0.10 - 1) & 0x3FF) << 5)
= 239.192.1.0 + ((192.168.0.9 & 0x3FF) << 5)
= 239.192.1.0 + (0.0.0.9 << 5)
= 239.192.1.0 + 0.0.1.32
= 239.192.2.32
Reference 1) Status list
Reference 2) Configuration capability list
Reference 3) Configuration control list
Bit Name Description
0 to 3Interface Configuration
Status
0: IP address is not set (BOOTP start state).
1: IP address is set.
2 or higher: The DL-EP1 returns nothing.
4 Mcast Pending
This bit is set to 1 when "TTL Value" or "Mcast Config" is
set.
This bit is cleared to 0 when the power is turned on
again.
5 to 31 Reserved All these bits are fixed at OFF.
Bit Name Description
0 BOOTP Client ON (fixed)
1 DNS Client OFF (fixed)
2 DHCP Client OFF (fixed)
3 DHCP-DNS Update OFF (fixed)
4 Configuration Settable ON (fixed)
5 to 31 Reserved OFF (fixed)
Bit Name Description
0 to 3 StartupConfiguration
Display and set the "IP address setting method" of the IP
address setting tool.
0: Fixed IP address
1:BOOTP
2 to 15: The IP address cannot be set. If the IP address is
set, the general status 09H (Bad attribute data value) is
returned.
4 DNS Enable OFF (fixed): The operation set by this bit is ignored.
5 to 31 Reserved All these bits are fixed at OFF.
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
9-6 Objects Usable by DL-EP1
9-33
TCP/IP Interface Object
9
Ap
pe
nd
ix
List of general and additional statuses returned to each service
Name GeneralStatus
Additional (Extended)
StatusDescription
Get_Attributes_All00H - The service has ended normally.
05H - The designated instance ID does not exist.
Get_Attribute_Single
00H - The service has ended normally.
05H - The designated instance ID does not exist.
14H - The designated attribute ID does not exist.
Set_Attribute_Single
00H - The service has ended normally.
05H - The designated instance ID does not exist.
09H - The written value is invalid.
0EH - The designated attribute ID cannot be written.
13H - The length of send data is too short.
14H - The designated attribute ID does not exist.
Others 08H - The designated service is not supported.
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
9-6 Objects Usable by DL-EP1
9-34
Ethernet Link Object
9A
pp
en
dix
This object provides Ethernet status information.
Class
Class service
This object supports Get_Attribute_Single (0EH) and Get_Attributes_All (01H).
Class attribute (instance ID: 00H)
Instance
Instance service
This object supports Get_Attribute_Single (0EH), Set_Attribute_Single (10H), and
Get_Attributes_All (01H).
Instance attribute (instance ID: 01H)
Ethernet Link Object (Class ID: F6H)
Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data Type
ParameterRange
01H Revision Object revision R UINT 0002H
02H Max InstanceMaximum instance
numberR UINT 0001H
03HNumber of
Instances
Number of instances in
generated objectR UINT 0001H
Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data Type
ParameterRange
01H Interface SpeedInterface communication speed
R UDINT 10, 100
02H Interface Flags Interface status flag R DWORD (Reference 1)
03HPhysical Address
MAC layer address RARRAY
of 6 USINTs
Current value
04H
Interface Counters
R
Structure -
In Octets
Number of octets received on the interface.Includes the unnecessary multicast packets and discarded packets counted with In Discards.
UDINT Current value
In Ucast Packets
Number of unicast packets received on the interface. Does not include the discarded packets counted with In Discards.
UDINT Current value
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
9-6 Objects Usable by DL-EP1
9-35
Ethernet Link Object
9
Ap
pe
nd
ix
04H
In NUcast Packets
Number of nonunicast packets received on the interface.Includes the unnecessary multicast packets but does not include the discarded packets counted with In Discards.
R
UDINT Current value
In Discards
Number of inbound packets discarded after they had been received on the interface.
UDINT Current value
In ErrorsNumber of inbound packets including errors. Not included in In Discards.
UDINT Current value
In Unknown Protos
Number of inbound packets including unknown protocols.
UDINT 0 (fixed)
Out OctetsNumber of octets received on the interface.
UDINT Current value
Out Ucast Packets
Number of unicast packets sent on the interface.
UDINT Current value
Out NUcast Packets
Number of nonunicast packets sent on the interface.
UDINT Current value
Out DiscardsNumber of discarded outbound packets.
UDINT Current value
Out ErrorsNumber of outbound packets including errors.
UDINT Current value
05H
Media Counters Counter unique to media.
R
Structure -
Alignment Errors
Number of received frames whose lengths are not an octet integer.
UDINT Current value
FCS ErrorsNumber of received frames for which FCS check is unsuccessful.
UDINT Current value
Single Collisions
Number of successfully sent frames with only one collision.
UDINT 0 (fixed)
Multiple Collisions
Number of successfully sent frames with two or more collisions.
UDINT 0 (fixed)
SQE Test ErrorsNumber of times SQE test error messenger was generated.
UDINT 0 (fixed)
Deferred Transmissions
Number of frames whose first transmission was deferred because media was busy.
UDINT 0 (fixed)
Late CollisionsNumber of collisions detected in packet transmission later than 512-bit time.
UDINT 0 (fixed)
Excessive Collisions
Number of frames whose transmission failed because of excessive collisions.
UDINT 0 (fixed)
Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data Type
ParameterRange
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
9-6 Objects Usable by DL-EP1
9-36
Ethernet Link Object
9A
pp
en
dix
*1 The following interface speeds can be set as Forced Interface Speed.
When auto-negotiation is disabled (half-duplex): fixed at 10 Mbps (setting
value: 10)
When auto-negotiation is enabled (half-duplex/full duplex): 100/10 Mbps
automatic (setting value: 0 or 100)
Reference 1) Interface flags list
05H
MAC Transmit Errors
Number of frames whose transmission failed because of internal MAC sublayer transmit error.
R
UDINT 0 (fixed)
Carrier Sense Errors
Number of times the carrier sense condition was lost or not asserted when an attempt was made to send frames.
UDINT Current value
Frame Too Long
Number of received frames that exceeded the maximum tolerable frame size.
UDINT Current value
MAC Receive Errors
Number of frames that could not be received on the interface due to an internal MAC sublayer receive error.
UDINT 0 (fixed)
06H
Interface Control
Setting of the following physical interfaces.
WFollowing structure
-
Control BitsInterface control bit (designation of AutoNego, full duplex).
WORD (Reference 2)
Forced Interface Speed
Operation speed forced by interface (fixed to 10 Mbps, etc.).
UINT Setting value*1
Bit Name Description
0 Link StatusOFF: Non-active link
ON: Active link
1 Half/Full DuplexOFF: Half-duplex
ON: Full duplex (OFF when Link Status=0)
2 to 4 Negotiation Status
0: Auto-negotiation is in progress.
1: Auto-negotiation and speed could not be detected.
2: Auto-negotiation failed but speed was successfully
detected.
3: Speed and duplex mode were successfully
negotiated.
4: Auto-negotiation cannot be performed.
(When communication speed is fixed at 10 Mbps)
5Manual Setting
Requires Speed
OFF: Changes can be automatically reflected. ON: Reset
service is required to reflect changes (fixed).
6 Local Hardware Fault OFF (fixed)
7 to 31 Reserved OFF (fixed)
Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data Type
ParameterRange
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
9-6 Objects Usable by DL-EP1
9-37
Ethernet Link Object
9
Ap
pe
nd
ix
Reference 2) Control bits list
List of general and additional statuses returned to each service
Bit Name Description
0 Auto-negotiate
OFF: Auto-negotiation is disabled (communication
setting is fixed at 10 Mbps).
ON: Auto-negotiation is enabled (communication setting
is fixed at 100/10 Mbps auto).
1 ForcedDuplex Mode OFF (fixed)
2 to 15 Reserved OFF (fixed)
Error Code GeneralStatus
Additional (Extended)
StatusDescription
Get_Attributes_All00H - The service has ended normally.
05H - The designated instance ID does not exist.
Get_Attribute_Single
00H - The service has ended normally.
05H - The designated instance ID does not exist.
14H - The designated attribute ID does not exist.
Set_Attribute_Single
00H - The service has ended normally.
05H - The designated instance ID does not exist.
09H - The written value is invalid.
0CH -The object cannot execute the requested
service in the current state.
0EH - The designated attribute ID cannot be written.
13H - The length of send data is too short.
14H - The designated attribute ID does not exist.
Others 08H - The designated service is not supported.
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
9-38
MEMO
9A
pp
en
dix
9A
pp
en
dix
9-7 Index
9
- EtherNet/IP Compatible NetwoC
Checking the Package Contents .......... 1-3
Package contents .......................... 1-3
Configuring Communication with the
DL-EP1 .................................................. 2-12
DL-EP1 Settings ........................... 2-12
Configuring Communication with the
Scanner ................................................. 2-15
Setting the scanner ..................... 2-15
Connecting with Sensor Amplifiers ...... 9-2
Connectable Sensor Amplifiers ... 9-2
Mixed Connection of Sensor
amplifiers ........................................ 9-3
D
Data Processing Time ............................ 8-3
Device Profile .......................................... 9-5
Dimensions ............................................. 8-5
DL-EP1 Overview ................................... 1-2
Overview ......................................... 1-2
Types and Number of Connectable
Sensor Amplifiers ........................... 1-2
F
FD-MH Series
Assignment to IN Area
(DL-EP1 to Scanner) ..................... 7-8
Assignment to OUT Area
(Scanner to DL-EP1) ................... 7-15
Basic Format and Processing Flow
of Message Communication ....... 7-28
Checking the Device
Compatibility ................................ 7-20
Communication Methods ............ 7-17
Configuring Cyclic
Communication .............................. 7-6
Configuring Message
Communication ............................ 7-22
Cyclic communication ................... 7-5
DL Object (Class ID:67H) ........... 7-31
DL-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication
Functions ........................................ 7-3
Message Communication ........... 7-21
Objects and Services .................. 7-25
Objects Usable by DL-EP1 ......... 7-27
Overview of Communication
Methods .......................................... 7-3
Reading the DL Object Table .... 7-30
-39
rk Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -Usable Connections ...................... 7-7
Using DL Object .......................... 7-44
What can Cyclic Communication
do? .................................................. 7-6
What can Message Communication
do? ................................................ 7-22
What is EtherNet/IP? ...................... 7-2
G
GT2 Series
Assignment to IN Area
(DL-EP1 to Scanner) ..................... 3-8
Assignment to OUT Area
(Scanner to DL-EP1) ................... 3-15
Basic Format and Processing Flow
of Message Communication ...... 3-28
Checking the Device
Compatibility ................................ 3-20
Communication Methods ............ 3-17
Configuring Cyclic
Communication .............................. 3-6
Configuring Message
Communication ............................ 3-22
Cyclic communication ................... 3-5
DL Object (Class ID:67H) ........... 3-31
DL-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication
Functions ........................................ 3-3
Message Communication ........... 3-21
Objects and Services .................. 3-25
Objects Usable by DL-EP1 ........ 3-27
Overview of Communication
Methods .......................................... 3-3
Reading the DL Object Table .... 3-30
Usable Connections ...................... 3-7
Using DL Object .......................... 3-46
What can Cyclic Communication
do? .................................................. 3-6
What can Message Communication
do? ................................................ 3-22
What is EtherNet/IP? ...................... 3-2
GT-70A Series
Assignment to IN Area
(DL-EP1 to Scanner) ..................... 4-8
Assignment to OUT Area
(Scanner to DL-EP1) ................... 4-15
Basic Format and Processing Flow
of Message Communication ...... 4-28
Checking the Device
Compatibility ................................ 4-20
Communication Methods ............ 4-17
9-7 Index
9
Ap
pe
nd
ix
Configuring Cyclic
Communication .............................. 4-6
Configuring Message
Communication ............................ 4-22
Cyclic communication .................. 4-5
DL Object (Class ID:67H) ........... 4-31
DL-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication
Functions ........................................ 4-3
Message Communication ........... 4-21
Objects and Services ................. 4-25
Objects Usable by DL-EP1 ........ 4-27
Overview of Communication
Methods .......................................... 4-3
Reading the DL Object Table .... 4-30
Usable Connections ...................... 4-7
Using DL Object .......................... 4-45
What can Cyclic Communication
do? .................................................. 4-6
What can Message Communication
do? ................................................ 4-22
What is EtherNet/IP? ..................... 4-2
I
IB Series
Assignment to IN Area
(DL-EP1 to Scanner) ..................... 6-8
Assignment to OUT Area
(Scanner to DL-EP1) ................... 6-16
Basic Format and Processing Flow
of Message Communication ...... 6-29
Checking the Device
Compatibility ................................ 6-21
Communication Methods ........... 6-18
Configuring Cyclic
Communication .............................. 6-6
Configuring Message
Communication ............................ 6-23
Cyclic communication .................. 6-5
DL Object (Class ID:67H) ........... 6-32
DL-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication
Functions ........................................ 6-3
Message Communication ........... 6-22
Objects and Services ................. 6-26
Objects Usable by DL-EP1 ........ 6-28
Overview of Communication
Methods .......................................... 6-3
Reading the DL Object Table .... 6-31
Usable Connections ...................... 6-7
Using DL Object .......................... 6-53
What can Cyclic Communication
do? .................................................. 6-6
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network U
What can Message Communication
do? ................................................ 6-23
What is EtherNet/IP? ..................... 6-2
IG Series
Assignment to IN Area
(DL-EP1 to Scanner) ..................... 5-8
Assignment to OUT Area
(Scanner to DL-EP1) ................... 5-15
Basic Format and Processing Flow
of Message Communication ...... 5-28
Checking the Device
Compatibility ................................ 5-20
Communication Methods ........... 5-17
Configuring Cyclic
Communication ............................. 5-6
Configuring Message
Communication ........................... 5-22
Cyclic communication .................. 5-5
DL Object (Class ID:67H) .......... 5-31
DL-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication
Functions ........................................ 5-3
Message Communication .......... 5-21
Objects and Services ................. 5-25
Objects Usable by DL-EP1 ........ 5-27
Overview of Communication
Methods ......................................... 5-3
Reading the DL Object Table .... 5-30
Usable Connections ..................... 5-7
Using DL Object .......................... 5-52
What can Cyclic Communication
do? .................................................. 5-6
What can Message Communication
do? ................................................ 5-22
What is EtherNet/IP? ..................... 5-2
Installation and Connection to Sensor
Amplifiers ................................................ 2-3
Assigning ID Numbers ................. 2-6
Mounting and connection to Sensor
Amplifiers ....................................... 2-3
N
Names and Functions of Each Part ..... 1-4
O
Objects usable by DL-EP1
Assembly Object (class ID: 04H) 9-26
Connection Manager Object
(class ID: 06H) ............................. 9-28
Ethernet Link Object
(class ID: F6H) ............................. 9-34
nit DL-EP1 User’s Manual - 9-40
9-7Index
9
9A
pp
en
dix
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Netwo
Identity Object (class ID: 01H) ... 9-22
List of Usable Objects ................. 9-20
Message Router Object
(class ID: 02H) ............................. 9-25
Reading Each Object Table ....... 9-21
TCP/IP Interface Object
(class ID: F5H) ............................. 9-30
P
Procedures for Communicating with
an Allen-Bradley ControlLogix PLC ...... 9-9
Procedures for Communication
with an Allen-Bradley
SLC5/05 PLC ................................ 9-15
Procedures from Installation before
Using the DL-EP1 to Configuration ...... 2-2
Configuration Procedures ............. 2-2
S
Specifications ......................................... 8-2
T
Troubleshooting ...................................... 9-6
W
Wiring ..................................................... 2-10
Connecting a communication
cable ............................................. 2-10
-41
rk Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit DL-EP1 User’s Manual -
Revision History
Print date Revision no. Description
March, 2011 Initial release
WARRANTIES AND DISCLAIMERS
(1) KEYENCE warrants the Products to be free of defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of shipment. If any models or samples were shown to Buyer, such models or samples were used merely to illustrate the general type and quality of the Products and not to represent that the Products would necessarily conform to said models or samples. Any Products found to be defective must be shipped to KEYENCE with all shipping costs paid by Buyer or offered to KEYENCE for inspection and examination. Upon examination by KEYENCE, KEYENCE, at its sole option, will refund the purchase price of, or repair or replace at no charge any Products found to be defective. This warranty does not apply to any defects resulting from any action of Buyer, including but not limited to improper installation, improper interfacing, improper repair, unauthorized modification, misapplication and mishandling, such as exposure to excessive current, heat, coldness, moisture, vibration or outdoors air. Components which wear are not warranted.
(2) KEYENCE is pleased to offer suggestions on the use of its various Products. They are only suggestions, and it is Buyer's responsibility to ascertain the fitness of the Products for Buyer’s intended use. KEYENCE will not be responsible for any damages that may result from the use of the Products.
(3) The Products and any samples ("Products/Samples") supplied to Buyer are not to be used internally in humans, for human transportation, as safety devices or fail-safe systems, unless their written specifications state otherwise. Should any Products/Samples be used in such a manner or misused in any way, KEYENCE assumes no responsibility, and additionally Buyer will indemnify KEYENCE and hold KEYENCE harmless from any liability or damage whatsoever arising out of any misuse of the Products/Samples.
(4) OTHER THAN AS STATED HEREIN, THE PRODUCTS/SAMPLES ARE PROVIDED WITH NO OTHER WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER. ALL EXPRESS, IMPLIED, AND STATUTORY WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF PROPRIETARY RIGHTS, ARE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL KEYENCE AND ITS A FFILIATED ENTITIES BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON OR ENTITY FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY DAMAGES RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF INFORMATION, LOSS OR INACCURACY OF DATA, LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF SAVINGS, THE COST OF PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTED GOODS, SERVICES OR TECHNOLOGIES, OR FOR ANY MATTER ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCTS, EVEN IF KEYENCE OR ONE OF ITS AFFILIATED ENTITIES WAS ADVISED OF A POSSIBLE THIRD PARTY’S CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OR ANY OTHER CLAIM AGAINST BUYER. In some jurisdictions, some of the foregoing warranty disclaimers or damage limitations may not apply.
BUYER'S TRANSFER OBLIGATIONS:If the Products/Samples purchased by Buyer are to be resold or delivered to a third party, Buyer must provide such third party with a copy of this document, all specifications, manuals, catalogs, leaflets and written information provided to Buyer pertaining to the Products/Samples.
E 1110-2
Copyright (c) 2011 KEYENCE CORPORATION. All rights reserved.96140E 1031-1 96140E Printed in Japan